JP2020006059A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that prevents the interest of a player from being lowered.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: first performance means capable of executing a first performance to display a first performance display when an operation is detected by detection means in a state where a first effective display is displayed as an effective display; and second performance means capable of executing a second performance to display a second performance display that can specify the selection result in accordance with the detection of an operation when the operation is detected by the detection means in a state where a second effective display is displayed that indicates the operation for selecting one option from a plurality of options is valid as the effective display. Recognition difficult performance means can execute a recognition difficult performance when the first effective display is displayed and the first performance means executes a first performance, and does not execute the recognition difficult performance when the second effective display is displayed and the second performance means executes a second performance.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 20-2

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  In conventional gaming machines, the display of the effect symbol is erased when the variable stop effect is executed, and even if the display of the effect symbol is erased, the reduced display is performed so that the player can recognize that the variable display is being executed. There is one that displays a small symbol that is a changed display (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2015-217185 A

  As an effect during the execution of such a variable display, there is an effect that prompts the player to perform an operation. When an operation is detected, an effect corresponding to the operation is performed. At the time of an effect that prompts the player to perform an operation, an image indicating that the detection of the operation is valid is displayed. However, another effect performed while the image is being displayed may cause the player to perform an unintended operation. There is. When an unintended operation is performed, the effect performed thereafter is also unintended, and there is a possibility that the interest of the player may be reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that prevents a decrease in interest of a player.

  (1) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention performs a game and includes a display unit (eg, an image display device 5 or the like) capable of displaying an effect display related to the game (eg, a pachinko game). Machine 1 etc.), detecting means (for example, controller sensor unit 35A, push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting the player's movement, and an effective display (for example, indicating that the detection of the movement by the detecting means is effective) , Effective display means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) for displaying the effective display 64SH003, 64SH005, etc. on the display means, and effect display including the effective display displayed by the effective display means (for example, display in the promotion effect). And the like (for example, CPU 120 for effect control). In the state where the first valid display (for example, the valid display 64SH005 or the like) is displayed as the valid display, when an operation is detected by the detection means, the first effect display (for example, a treasure box and a character string) is displayed. The first effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120 or the like) capable of performing a first effect (for example, a corresponding effect in a button effect) for displaying a character, and selecting one option from a plurality of options as the effective display When an operation is detected by the detection means in a state where a second validity display (for example, a validity display 64SH003 or the like) indicating that the operation to be performed is valid, the selection is made in accordance with the detection of the operation. A second effect (for example, a selected effect) that displays a second effect display capable of specifying a result (for example, a selection result (for example, a selected character) shown in FIG. 20-1 (B2)). (For example, effect control CPU 120 etc.), and the first visual display is displayed on the difficult-to-view effect effect means. When the first effect is performed, it is possible to perform a visual effect that is difficult to view (for example, when a positive determination is made in 64SH104 and 64SH105 in FIG. 20-4, a button effect and a visual effect that is difficult to view are performed). 2 The effective display is displayed, and when the second effect is performed by the second effect means, the effect that is difficult to visually recognize is not performed (for example, when a positive determination is made in 64SH101 of FIG. 20-4 or a negative determination is made in 64SH104). , 64SH110, an affirmative determination is made, a selection effect is performed, and an effect that is difficult to see is not performed, etc.), and further, an advantageous state (eg, For example, a suggestion effect execution unit (eg, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (eg, a reach effect) that suggests that the game is controlled to a big hit game state, and a title notification capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestion effect. Means (for example, effect control CPU 120), and the title notifying means can notify a title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect (for example, FIG. 9D). , (F)).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the interest of the player from decreasing. In addition, the effect of production can be enhanced.

  In the present embodiment, an example was described in which the production of difficult-to-view effects was performed during the reach. Depending on the state, etc.), an effect that is difficult to see may be performed. Difficult-to-view production in a state other than the big hit state may be performed as a performance that increases the big hit expectation as shown in the present embodiment. It may be performed as an effect to perform.

  Further, an effect that is difficult to see may be performed according to the effect mode. Since the background, the effect, and the like differ depending on the effect mode, the effect of the invisible effect can be further enhanced by performing the invisible effect in the effect mode suitable for the invisible effect.

  Furthermore, an effect that is difficult to see may be performed using an RTC (Real-Time Clock). For example, it is easy to generate an effect that is difficult to see at a predetermined time or time zone. Such an effect using the RTC is particularly effective when a plurality of pachinko gaming machines are installed in a game arcade.

  In the present embodiment, the bar indicating the period is displayed together with the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B as the valid display, but the present invention is not limited to this mode. Other effective displays include a display of only a character string prompting an operation such as "press a button", a display of only a button or a stick, and the like. In addition to a bar, a digital display that counts down or an analog clock that indicates the period by movement of a hand may be used to indicate the valid period.

  (2) The gaming machine according to (1), wherein the second validity display is displayed during a period in which the effect of making visual recognition difficult is performed (for example, a period from timing 64SHT1 to timing 64SHT7 in FIG. 20-7). (For example, a period from the timing 64SHT2 to the timing 64SHT5).

  According to such a configuration, the interest can be improved without giving a misunderstanding to the player.

  (3) The gaming machine according to (1) or (2), wherein game-related information indicating information related to the game (for example, small design, hold display, active display, fourth design, right-hand display, etc.) is displayed. A possible game-related information display means (for example, effect control CPU 120, etc.) is provided, and the difficult-to-visual effect means visually recognizes the game-related information displayed by the game-related information display means even during a difficult-to-visual effect. It is not difficult (for example, FIG. 20-7 (C)).

  According to such a configuration, the interest can be improved without giving the player a misunderstanding.

  Other game-related information includes acquired payouts displayed during a big hit, the number of big hits, a display of an icon indicating a big hit type as a big hit history during the big hit, and the like.

  (4) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3), which can perform a notice effect (for example, a notice effect of super reach A, B, and C in FIG. 20-6). When a notice effect is provided during the difficult-to-view effect by the difficult-to-view effect means, the notice effect means includes, for example, a sound (for example, CPU 120 for effect control). , Super reach A, B, C, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, the player can recognize the mode of the notice effect even during the effect of making the visual recognition difficult, and can improve the interest.

  As the sound according to the mode, not only the sound such as “Super Reach A” described in the present embodiment but also music including sound effects may be output. Further, another display device (such as a sub liquid crystal or an LED) may be used to express the effect mode.

  (5) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4), wherein the visual difficulty presentation unit performs image processing on the production display to make the production display difficult to view.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform an effect that is difficult to see in accordance with the state of the effect display, and it is possible to improve interest.

  (6) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4), wherein the invisibly difficult presentation means prepares in advance a moving image showing an effect display that is difficult to view, and sets the moving image as an invisibly difficult presentation. Display a movie (for example).

  According to such a configuration, according to such a configuration, the processing load can be suppressed as compared with the case where image processing is performed on the effect display.

  Embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include the following inventions (7) to (14). 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been a gaming machine that performs a title display for notifying a type of a reach effect at the start of a reach effect, as disclosed in JP-A-2006-101428. In the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, it is desired to increase the effect of the game. In view of this point, there is a demand for providing a game machine capable of increasing the effect of the game.

(7) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to another aspect is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player, and Effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect) that suggests that the effect is controlled, and title notification means (for example, effect control) for notifying a title corresponding to the suggestion effect. CPU 120), and the title notification means can notify a title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect (for example, FIGS. 9D and 9F). .
According to such a configuration, the effect can be enhanced.

(8) In the gaming machine according to (7), the suggestion effect execution means can execute a plurality of types of the suggestion effects, and in the plurality of types of the suggestion effects, at least a part of the effects within the predetermined period. May be executed in a common mode (for example, FIG. 9C).
According to such a configuration, attention can be paid to which of the suggestion effects is executed, and the interest is improved.

(9) In the gaming machine according to (7) or (8), at a plurality of execution timings during the execution of the suggested effect, a specific effect (for example, an advanced effect or a notice effect) indicating that the game is controlled to the advantageous state is performed. It may be executable, and the execution timing of the specific effect may not be provided during the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the player's expectation can be maintained even after the title is announced.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (7) to (9), the suggestion effect execution means includes at least a first suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of super reach A or super reach B) as the suggestion effect. And a second suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of Super Reach D or Super Reach E) can be executed. In the second suggestion effect, the title suggestion effect starts from the start of the second suggestion effect. May be notified.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute the notification of the title according to the suggestion effect, so that the effect of the effect is improved.

(11) In the gaming machine according to the above (10), the ratio in which the advantageous state is controlled is higher when the first suggestion effect is executed than when the second suggestion effect is executed. Is also good.
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect is improved.

(12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (7) to (11), the suggestion effect execution unit may execute the suggestion effect in an effect mode related to a title notified in the predetermined period. You may.
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect is improved.

(13) In the gaming machine according to any one of (7) to (12),
Detecting means (for example, a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B) capable of detecting a player's movement;
Specific display execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) for performing specific display (for example, small button image 31AK043, large button image 31AK047, stick image 31AK051) corresponding to the detection means,
The specific display execution means,
As the specific display, a first specific display (for example, a small button image 31AK043) and a second specific display (for example, a large button image 31AK047, a stick image 31AK051) that is more advantageous to the player than the first specific display are displayed. Is possible,
In the non-valid period of the detection by the detecting means, after the first specific display is displayed, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, FIGS. 17E and 18I).
During the valid period of the detection by the detecting means, an operation effect using the changed second specific display may be executed (for example, FIGS. 18 (J) and 18 (K)).
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect is improved.

(14) In the gaming machine according to any one of (7) to (13),
As a suggestion display indicating the degree of expectation of the control to the advantageous state, a first suggestion display whose display size is the first size (display of the first size shutter image 31AK061 displayed at the time of the shutter effect shown in FIG. 19A) Display means (for example, an image having the second size reach title image 31AK062 displayed at the time of the reach title effect shown in FIG. 19 (d)) and a second suggestion display whose display size is the second size. Further comprising a display device 5 and an effect control CPU 120).
The display means,
Plural types of elements having different aspects (elements E1 (banana), element E2 (melon), element E3 (apple), element E4 (watermelon), element E5 (strawberry) shown in FIGS. 19 (a) and (d)) Can be displayed (for example, fruit patterns shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D).
When displaying either the first suggestion display or the second suggestion display in a pattern including the specific image, a plurality of types of elements are included in both the first suggestion display and the second suggestion display. (Either the shutter image 31AK061 or the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D may be displayed such that the elements E1 to E5 are included).
According to such a configuration, the specific image can be suitably displayed regardless of the display size of the suggestion display. Thereby, it is possible to accurately convey that the specific image is displayed.

  In addition, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting change unit that changes a set value of a plurality of stages based on a setting change operation from the outside has been proposed. In a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when changing a set value, it is necessary to appropriately execute control relating to the provision of a game medium. The invention according to the means A1 to A9 has been made in view of the above situation, and an object of the invention is to provide a gaming machine that appropriately executes control related to providing game media.

The game machine of the means A1 is
Gaming device capable of executing processing related to valuable value (prepaid balance, ball holding, ball storage, etc.) (processing related to ball lending consuming prepaid balance, ball lending consuming ball holding, ball lending consuming ball storage, etc.) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of receiving a signal (a VL signal, a BRDY signal, a BRQ signal, etc.) output from the (card unit 21TM050),
Providing means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370 for controlling the payout motor 21TM289) for providing a game medium based on a signal output from the gaming machine;
A specific control means (step S21TM1690 or the like for executing a process such as step S21TM1690) capable of executing specific control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (a set value 1 to 6 in which the range of the big hit determination random number is different) A control microcomputer 100);
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling to the setting change mode capable of changing the set value;
With
When controlled in the setting change mode, application of a game medium based on a signal output from the gaming device is limited. (1. The game control microcomputer 100 when controlled in the setting change mode) Does not turn on the connection confirmation signal (does not output it to the payout control board 21TM037), 2. When the game control microcomputer 100 does not transmit the connection confirmation command while being controlled in the setting change mode, the payout control micro 2. The computer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal. 3. When the gaming machine frame opening sensor detects that the gaming machine frame 3 is open, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal. No, 4. When the game is being controlled in the setting change mode, Since the microcomputer 100 does not transmit the connection confirmation command (because the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not receive the connection confirmation command), even if the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the BRQ signal is turned on, the EXS signal is output. Do not turn it on.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, when being controlled to the setting change mode, it is possible to execute appropriate control regarding the provision of the game medium.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 22-12 and 22-13, when the power switch 21TM055 is operated and the operating voltage is supplied to the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 turns on the lock switch 21TM051. And based on the fact that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, control is performed to a setting change mode in which the set value can be changed. During the period in which the setting change mode is being controlled, the connection confirmation signal is not output to the payout control board 21TM037 because the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 is not executed, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 Do not perform ball rental.

Further, as a game machine of means AA for solving the problem of the game machine described in JP 2010-200902A,
Gaming device capable of executing processing related to valuable value (prepaid balance, ball holding, ball storage, etc.) (processing related to ball lending consuming prepaid balance, ball lending consuming ball holding, ball lending consuming ball storage, etc.) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of receiving a signal (a VL signal, a BRDY signal, a BRQ signal, etc.) output from the (card unit 21TM050),
Providing means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370 for controlling the payout motor 21TM289) for providing a game medium based on a signal output from the gaming machine;
A specific control means (step S21TM1690 or the like for executing a process such as step S21TM1690) capable of executing specific control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (a set value 1 to 6 in which the range of the big hit determination random number is different) A control microcomputer 100);
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling to the setting change mode capable of changing the set value;
With
When controlled in the setting change mode, the application of the game medium based on the signal output from the gaming device is restricted (1. When the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled in the setting change mode, 1. The connection confirmation signal is not turned on (not output to the payout control board 21TM037) 2. The payout control microcomputer 100 does not transmit the connection confirmation command when the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled in the setting change mode. 2. 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal. 3. When the game machine frame opening sensor detects that the gaming machine frame 3 is open, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal. 4. When the game is being controlled to the setting change mode, Since the computer 100 does not transmit the connection confirmation command (because the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not receive the connection confirmation command), even if the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the BRQ signal is on, the EXS signal is output. Do not turn it on.),
further,
Display means (for example, image display device 5 or the like) capable of displaying an effect display related to the game,
Detecting means (for example, a controller sensor unit 35A, a push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting a player's movement;
Valid display means (for example, effect control CPU 120, etc.) for displaying on the display means a valid display (for example, valid display 64SH003, 64SH005, etc.) indicating that the detection of the operation by the detection means is valid;
Difficult-to-visual effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120, etc.) for performing a difficult-to-visual effect that makes at least a part of an effect display (for example, a display in a promotion effect) including the effective display displayed by the effective display means difficult to visually recognize. When,
When an operation is detected by the detection means in a state where a first validity display (for example, a validity display 64SH005 or the like) is displayed as the validity display, a first effect display (for example, a treasure chest and a character string) is displayed. A first effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120 or the like) capable of performing a first effect to be displayed (for example, a corresponding effect in a button effect);
The operation is detected by the detection unit while a second validity display (for example, a validity display 64SH003 or the like) indicating that the operation of selecting one option from a plurality of options is valid as the validity display. In this case, a second effect display is displayed in which the result of the selection (for example, the result of the selection (for example, the selected character) shown in FIG. 20-1 (B2)) can be specified according to the detection of the motion. A second effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120 or the like) capable of performing a second effect (for example, a corresponding effect in a selected effect),
The difficult-to-visual effect means displays the first valid display, and can perform a poor-visibility effect when the first effect is performed by the first effect means (for example, 64SH104 in FIG. 20-4). When the affirmative determination is made in 64SH105, a button effect and a visual difficulty effect are performed, etc.), the second effective display is displayed, and when the second effect is performed by the second performance means, the visual effect is not performed. (For example, when the affirmative determination is made at 64SH101 in FIG. 20-4, or when the negative determination is made at 64SH104 and the affirmative determination is made at 64SH110, the selection effect is performed, and the effect of difficulty in visual recognition is not performed.)
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
According to this feature, it is possible to execute appropriate control regarding the provision of the game medium when the game mode is controlled to the setting change mode. Further, it is possible to prevent the interest of the player from decreasing.

The game machine of means A2 is
The gaming machine of the means A1,
Game control means (game control microcomputer 100 for executing a game control timer interrupt process) having the specific control means and the setting change mode control means, and controlling the progress of the game in the gaming machine;
The game control means includes a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value,
The provision means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) can provide a game medium when a special signal (connection confirmation signal) is input from the game control means,
The game control means does not output the special signal when being controlled in any one of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode (the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 outputting the connection confirmation signal Will be executed after exiting the mode and after exiting the setting confirmation mode),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to prevent a game medium from being provided when the game machine is controlled to any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of the means A3 is
The gaming machine of the means A1,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The providing means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) outputs a first predetermined signal (PRDY signal) to the gaming device, and based on the input of the first predetermined signal, the gaming device Game media can be provided based on the input of the second predetermined signal (BRDY signal) output from
The first predetermined signal is not output when being controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (1. The PRDY signal is not turned on when the connection confirmation signal is not input; When the command is not received, the PRDY signal is not turned on),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to prevent a game medium from being provided when the game machine is controlled to any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means A4 is
The gaming machine of the means A1,
Game control means (game control microcomputer 100 for executing a game control timer interrupt process) having the specific control means and the setting change mode control means, and controlling the progress of the game in the gaming machine;
At least one of the game control means and the provision means (for example, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) has an open state detection means (an open state detection means for detecting an open state in which a game machine frame or a door frame corresponding to the game machine is open). A gaming machine frame opening sensor capable of detecting that the gaming machine frame 3 is open, a door frame opening sensor capable of detecting that the glass door frame 3a is open, Door frame opening sensor 21TM300) is provided,
Regardless of whether or not the setting change mode is controlled, the application of the game medium is restricted when the open state is detected (when the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, the glass door frame 3a Does not turn on the PRDY signal when is open),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, when the game machine frame or the door frame is opened to control the setting change mode, the provision of the game medium can be restricted.

The game machine of means A5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to the means A4,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The providing means outputs a provision signal in response to input of a provision request signal from the gaming device (a BRQ signal is turned on) (turns an EXS signal on) and outputs the provision signal. A game medium is provided when an application command signal output from the gaming device in response to the input is input (when the card unit 21TM050 that has detected the ON of the EXS signal turns off the BRQ signal),
When the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the application preparation signal is not output even if the application request signal is input (the EXS signal is turned on even if the BRQ signal is detected on). do not do),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to prevent a game medium from being provided when the game machine is controlled to any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of the means A6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to the means A5,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
When the setting change condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on when the power is turned on, and the clear switch (setting switch) ) When 21TM052 is ON), control is performed to the setting change mode,
The setting confirmation mode control means determines that the setting confirmation condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) ) If 21TM052 is off), control to the setting confirmation mode,
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power supply to the gaming machine is started.

The game machine of means A7 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to the means A6,
When controlled to the setting change mode, the game state is initialized (RAM clear of step S21TM1410 is executed),
After the notification corresponding to the end of the control of the setting change mode is executed based on the end of the control of the setting change mode (after the set value is blinked on the display monitor 21TM029), the gaming state is initialized. (Displaying the character “C” on the display monitor 21TM029),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, a clerk of the game hall or the like can grasp that the control of the setting change mode has ended and the gaming state has been initialized.

The game machine of means A8 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to the means A7,
A game control means having the specific control means and the setting change mode control means, and controlling a progress of a game in the gaming machine (a game control microcomputer 100 executing a game control timer interrupt process);
Effect control means (effect control CPU 120) for controlling the execution of the effect,
The game control means further includes a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling to a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value,
The game control means outputs a command (a setting change mode command, a setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means in accordance with being controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode,
The effect control means executes control relating to notification in accordance with the command (displays “Setting change in progress” on the image display device 5 when a setting change mode command is received, and executes a setting confirmation mode command when received. "Setting is being confirmed" is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible for a store clerk or the like at the game arcade to know that the control has been performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means A9 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to the means A8,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 at power-on) and an initialization operation (operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 at power-on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
Along with the control in the setting change mode, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized (if the game mode is controlled in the setting change mode, the RAM clear processing in step S21TM1410 is executed), and the game proceeds to the setting confirmation mode. As a result of the control, the gaming state of the gaming machine is not initialized (if the game mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the RAM clearing process of step S21TM1410 is performed only when NO is determined in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330). Is executed),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, a store clerk or the like at the game hall can select whether to control the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and can also select whether to initialize the game state.
The correspondence between the means A2 to A9 and the means A1 can be applied to the correspondence between the means A2 to A9 and the means AA.

  In addition, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting change unit that changes a set value of a plurality of stages based on a setting change operation from the outside has been proposed. In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when changing the set value, it is necessary to appropriately execute control based on a signal output from the gaming machine. The invention according to means B1 to means B7 has been made in view of the above situation, and is to provide a gaming machine that appropriately executes control based on a signal output from a gaming device.

The gaming machine of the means B1 is
Gaming device capable of executing processing related to valuable value (prepaid balance, ball holding, ball storage, etc.) (processing related to ball lending consuming prepaid balance, ball lending consuming ball holding, ball lending consuming ball storage, etc.) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of receiving a signal (a VL signal, a BRDY signal, a BRQ signal, etc.) output from the (card unit 21TM050),
Predetermined control means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370 for controlling the payout motor 21TM289) for executing predetermined control (ball lending) based on a signal output from the gaming machine;
A specific control means (step S21TM1690 or the like for executing a process such as step S21TM1690) capable of executing specific control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (a set value 1 to 6 in which the range of the big hit determination random number is different) A control microcomputer 100);
A setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting change mode capable of changing the setting value;
It is possible to execute a predetermined control based on a signal output from the gaming device regardless of whether or not the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode (the gaming control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the setting change mode). Even during the period, the connection confirmation signal is turned on, the connection confirmation command and the winning ball number command can be transmitted, and the connection confirmation command and the winning ball number command are received in the connection confirmation signal ON state. The microcomputer 21TM370 can execute the ball lending regardless of whether the period is controlled to the setting change mode),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to appropriately execute the predetermined control based on the signal output from the gaming device, and it is possible to avoid a control burden when the predetermined control is not executed when being controlled in the setting change mode. .

Further, as a game machine of means BA for solving the problem of the game machine described in JP 2010-200902 A,
Gaming device capable of executing processing related to valuable value (prepaid balance, ball holding, ball storage, etc.) (processing related to ball lending consuming prepaid balance, ball lending consuming ball holding, ball lending consuming ball storage, etc.) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of receiving a signal (a VL signal, a BRDY signal, a BRQ signal, etc.) output from the (card unit 21TM050),
Predetermined control means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370 for controlling the payout motor 21TM289) for executing predetermined control (ball lending) based on a signal output from the gaming machine;
A specific control means (step S21TM1690 or the like for executing a process such as step S21TM1690) capable of executing specific control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (a set value 1 to 6 in which the range of the big hit determination random number is different) A control microcomputer 100);
A setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting change mode capable of changing the setting value;
It is possible to execute predetermined control based on a signal output from the gaming device regardless of whether or not the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode (the gaming control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the setting change mode). Even during the period, the connection confirmation signal is turned on, the connection confirmation command and the prize ball number command can be transmitted, and the connection confirmation command and the prize ball number command are received when the connection confirmation signal is on. The microcomputer 21TM370 can execute ball lending irrespective of whether or not the period is controlled to the setting change mode),
further,
Display means (for example, image display device 5 or the like) capable of displaying an effect display related to the game,
Detecting means (for example, a controller sensor unit 35A, a push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting a player's movement;
Valid display means (for example, effect control CPU 120, etc.) for displaying on the display means a valid display (for example, valid display 64SH003, 64SH005, etc.) indicating that the detection of the operation by the detection means is valid;
Difficult-to-visual effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120, etc.) for performing a difficult-to-visual effect that makes at least a part of an effect display (for example, a display in a promotion effect) including the effective display displayed by the effective display means difficult to visually recognize. When,
When an operation is detected by the detection means in a state where a first validity display (for example, a validity display 64SH005 or the like) is displayed as the validity display, a first effect display (for example, a treasure chest and a character string) is displayed. A first effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120 or the like) capable of performing a first effect to be displayed (for example, a corresponding effect in a button effect);
The operation is detected by the detection unit while a second validity display (for example, a validity display 64SH003 or the like) indicating that the operation of selecting one option from a plurality of options is valid as the validity display. In this case, a second effect display is displayed in which the result of the selection (for example, the result of the selection (for example, the selected character) shown in FIG. 20-1 (B2)) can be specified according to the detection of the motion. A second effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120 or the like) capable of performing a second effect (for example, a corresponding effect in a selected effect),
The difficult-to-visual effect means displays the first valid display, and can perform a poor-visibility effect when the first effect is performed by the first effect means (for example, 64SH104 in FIG. 20-4). When the affirmative determination is made in 64SH105, a button effect and a visual difficulty effect are performed, etc.), the second effective display is displayed, and when the second effect is performed by the second performance means, the visual effect is not performed. (For example, when the affirmative determination is made at 64SH101 in FIG. 20-4, or when the negative determination is made at 64SH104 and the affirmative determination is made at 64SH110, the selection effect is performed, and the effect of difficulty in visual recognition is not performed.)
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
According to this feature, it is possible to appropriately execute the predetermined control based on the signal output from the gaming device, and to avoid a control burden when the predetermined control is not executed when being controlled in the setting change mode. it can. Further, it is possible to prevent the interest of the player from decreasing.

The gaming machine of the means B2 is
The game machine of the means B1,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
When the predetermined control is being executed, the predetermined control is interrupted based on the occurrence of a predetermined event (e.g., a power failure). After the end of the change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the predetermined control is restarted (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 suspends the ball lending when the power is cut off during the ball lending, and resumes the power supply after the power supply is restarted. When the game control microcomputer 100 shifts to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the ball lending is resumed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends without immediately resuming the ball lending),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, even when the control is switched to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the occurrence of the predetermined event, the predetermined control can be appropriately executed.

The gaming machine of the means B3 is
The game machine of the means B1,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
If the control is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode while the predetermined control is being executed, the predetermined control is ended (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines that the power is cut off during the ball lending operation). When it occurs, the ball lending is forcibly terminated (stopped), and the ball lending is not resumed when the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode at the time of restoring power, and the setting change is not performed. Ball rental is not resumed even after the end of the mode or setting confirmation mode),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, the control for restarting the predetermined control after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode becomes unnecessary, and the predetermined control can be simplified.

The game machine of the means B4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B1 to the means B3,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The setting change mode control means determines that the setting change condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is ON and the clear switch 21TM052 is ON). Control) to the setting change mode,
The setting confirmation mode control means determines that the setting confirmation condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is ON, and the clear switch 21TM052 is OFF). Control) to the setting confirmation mode,
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode according to the condition that is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started.

The game machine of means B5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B1 to the means B4,
When controlled to the setting change mode, game information is initialized (when controlled to the setting change mode, RAM clear of step S21TM1410 is executed),
When the set value is changed in the setting change mode, after the change of the set value is notified (after the set value is blinked on the display monitor 21TM029), it is notified that the gaming state is initialized (display). The character "C" is displayed on the monitor 21TM029),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, a clerk of the game hall or the like can grasp that the control of the setting change mode has ended and the gaming state has been initialized.

The gaming machine of the means B6 is
Any of gaming machines selected from the means B1 to the means B5,
A game control means having the specific control means and the setting change mode control means, and controlling a progress of a game in the gaming machine (a game control microcomputer 100 executing a game control timer interrupt process);
Effect control means (effect control CPU 120) for controlling the execution of the effect,
The game control means further includes a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling to a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value,
The game control means outputs a command (a setting change mode command, a setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means in accordance with being controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode,
The effect control means executes control relating to notification in accordance with the command (displays “Setting change in progress” on the image display device 5 when a setting change mode command is received, and executes a setting confirmation mode command when received. "Setting is being confirmed" is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible for a store clerk or the like at the game arcade to know that the control has been performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means B7 is
Any of gaming machines selected from the means B1 to the means B6,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 at power-on) and an initialization operation (operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 at power-on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
Along with the control in the setting change mode, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized (if the game mode is controlled in the setting change mode, the RAM clear processing in step S21TM1410 is executed), and the game proceeds to the setting confirmation mode. As a result of the control, the gaming state of the gaming machine is not initialized (if the game mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the RAM clearing process of step S21TM1410 is performed only when NO is determined in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330). Is executed),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, a store clerk or the like at the game hall can select whether to control the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and can also select whether to initialize the game state.
The correspondence between the means B2 to B7 and the means B1 described above can be applied to the correspondence between the means B2 to B7 and the means BA.

  In addition, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting change unit that changes a set value of a plurality of stages based on a setting change operation from the outside has been proposed. In a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately execute control when a game medium passes through a specific area when changing a set value. The invention according to means C1 to means C6 has been made in view of the above situation, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that appropriately executes control when a game medium passes through a specific area.

The game machine of the means C1 is
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific areas (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening), a specific control (special value 1 to 6 in which the range of the random number for big hit determination is different) according to the set value (special control) A specific control means (a game control microcomputer 100 executing a process such as step S21TM1690) capable of executing a big hit determination process or the like in a symbol process process;
A setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting change mode capable of changing the setting value;
When being controlled to the setting change mode, the specific control is not executed even if the game medium passes through the specific area (control to the setting change mode prior to the setting of the timer interrupt (step S21TM1500)). Accordingly, during the period in which the mode is controlled to the setting change mode, the special symbol process process (big hit determination process) of step S21TM1690 is not executed),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to prevent the specific control from being executed when the setting value may be changed.

Further, as a gaming machine of means CA for solving the problem of the gaming machine described in JP 2010-200902A,
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific areas (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening), a specific control (special value 1 to 6 in which the range of the random number for big hit determination is different) according to the set value (special control) A specific control means (a game control microcomputer 100 executing a process such as step S21TM1690) capable of executing a big hit determination process or the like in a symbol process process;
A setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting change mode capable of changing the setting value;
When being controlled to the setting change mode, the specific control is not executed even if the game medium passes through the specific area (the control is changed to the setting change mode before the timer interrupt setting (step S21TM1500)). As a result, during the period in which the setting change mode is being controlled, the special symbol process process (big hit determination process) in step S21TM1690 is not executed),
further,
Display means (for example, image display device 5 or the like) capable of displaying an effect display related to the game,
Detecting means (for example, a controller sensor unit 35A, a push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting a player's movement;
Valid display means (for example, effect control CPU 120, etc.) for displaying on the display means a valid display (for example, valid display 64SH003, 64SH005, etc.) indicating that the detection of the operation by the detection means is valid;
Difficult-to-visual effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120, etc.) for performing a difficult-to-visual effect that makes at least a part of an effect display (for example, a display in a promotion effect) including the effective display displayed by the effective display means difficult to visually recognize. When,
When an operation is detected by the detection means in a state where a first validity display (for example, a validity display 64SH005 or the like) is displayed as the validity display, a first effect display (for example, a treasure chest and a character string) is displayed. A first effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120 or the like) capable of performing a first effect to be displayed (for example, a corresponding effect in a button effect);
The operation is detected by the detection unit while a second validity display (for example, a validity display 64SH003 or the like) indicating that the operation of selecting one option from a plurality of options is valid as the validity display. In this case, a second effect display is displayed in which the result of the selection (for example, the result of the selection (for example, the selected character) shown in FIG. 20-1 (B2)) can be specified according to the detection of the motion. A second effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120 or the like) capable of performing a second effect (for example, a corresponding effect in a selected effect),
The difficult-to-visual effect means displays the first valid display, and can perform a poor-visibility effect when the first effect is performed by the first effect means (for example, 64SH104 in FIG. 20-4). When the affirmative determination is made in 64SH105, a button effect and a visual difficulty effect are performed, etc.), the second effective display is displayed, and when the second effect is performed by the second performance means, the visual effect is not performed. (For example, when the affirmative determination is made at 64SH101 in FIG. 20-4, or when the negative determination is made at 64SH104 and the affirmative determination is made at 64SH110, the selection effect is performed, and the effect of difficulty in visual recognition is not performed.)
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the specific control from being executed when the setting value may be changed. Further, it is possible to prevent the interest of the player from decreasing.

The game machine of the means C2 is
A game machine of means C1,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The setting change mode control means determines that the setting change condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is ON and the clear switch 21TM052 is ON). Control) to the setting change mode,
The setting confirmation mode control means determines that the setting confirmation condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is ON, and the clear switch 21TM052 is OFF). Control) to the setting confirmation mode,
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode according to the condition that is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started.

The game machine of the means C3 is
A game machine of means C1 or means C2,
When the game mode is controlled to the setting change mode, the game state is initialized (when the game mode is controlled to the setting change mode, the RAM is cleared in step S21TM1410).
After the notification corresponding to the end of the control of the setting change mode is executed based on the end of the control of the setting change mode (after the set value is blinked on the display monitor 21TM029), the gaming state is initialized. (Displaying the character “C” on the display monitor 21TM029),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, a clerk of the game hall or the like can grasp that the control of the setting change mode has ended and the gaming state has been initialized.

The game machine of means C4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means C1 to the means C3,
A game control means having the specific control means and the setting change mode control means, and controlling a progress of a game in the gaming machine (a game control microcomputer 100 executing a game control timer interrupt process);
Effect control means (effect control CPU 120) for controlling the execution of the effect,
The game control means further includes a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling to a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value,
The game control means outputs a command (a setting change mode command, a setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means in accordance with being controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode,
The effect control means executes control relating to notification in accordance with the command (displays “Setting change in progress” on the image display device 5 when a setting change mode command is received, and executes a setting confirmation mode command when received. "Setting is being confirmed" is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible for a store clerk or the like at the game arcade to know that the control has been performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means C5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means C1 to the means C4,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
When the game medium is controlled in the setting confirmation mode, the specific control is not executed even if the game medium passes through the specific area (the control is performed in the setting confirmation mode before the timer interrupt setting (step S21TM1500)). Accordingly, during the period in which the mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the special symbol process process (big hit determination process) in step S21TM1690 is not executed),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to prevent the specific control from being executed when the setting value is confirmed.

The game machine of means C6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means C1 to the means C5,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 at power-on) and an initialization operation (operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 at power-on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
Along with the control in the setting change mode, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized (if the game mode is controlled in the setting change mode, the RAM clear processing in step S21TM1410 is executed), and the game proceeds to the setting confirmation mode. As a result of the control, the gaming state of the gaming machine is not initialized (if the game mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the RAM clearing process of step S21TM1410 is performed only when NO is determined in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330). Is executed),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, a store clerk or the like at the game hall can select whether to control the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and can also select whether to initialize the game state.
The correspondence between the means C2 to C6 and the means C1 described above can be applied to the correspondence between the means C2 to C6 and the means CA.

  In addition, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting change unit that changes a set value of a plurality of stages based on a setting change operation from the outside has been proposed. In a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to execute an appropriate process when power supply is stopped when a set value is changed. The invention relating to the means D1 to D5 has been made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine which executes appropriate processing when power supply is stopped.

The gaming machine of the means D1 is
A specific control means (step S21TM1690 or the like for executing a process such as step S21TM1690) capable of executing specific control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (a set value 1 to 6 in which the range of the big hit determination random number is different) A control microcomputer 100);
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling to the setting change mode capable of changing the set value;
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling a setting confirmation mode for notifying the set value in a confirmable manner;
Setting value storage means (setting value storage area of the RAM 102 in which the setting values are stored) for storing the setting values,
The setting change mode control means determines that the first condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state) and the second condition is satisfied (the clear switch ( The setting change mode) based on the setting change switch 21TM052 being ON),
The setting confirmation mode control means determines that the first condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is ON) and the second condition is not satisfied (clear). Switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in an OFF state) to control the setting confirmation mode,
The setting value is determined based on a specific operation in the setting change mode (operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state),
The setting value storage means stores the setting value before being controlled to the setting change mode when the setting change mode is being controlled (the setting value is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 before the transition to the setting change mode). The set value that has been set is continuously stored without being changed with the transition to the setting change mode),
In the setting change mode, the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing the specific operation (the power is cut off without performing the operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state), and thereafter When the setting check mode is controlled when the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed, the set value stored in the set value storage unit is notified (the control mode is switched to the setting check mode after power-on). In this case, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 before the transition to the setting confirmation mode).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, the clerk at the game hall or the like can appropriately set the set value in the case where the power supply is stopped while being controlled in the setting change mode.

Further, as a game machine of means DA for solving the problem of the game machine described in JP 2010-200902 A,
A specific control means (step S21TM1690 or the like for executing a process such as step S21TM1690) capable of executing specific control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (a set value 1 to 6 in which the range of the big hit determination random number is different) A control microcomputer 100);
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling to the setting change mode capable of changing the set value;
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling a setting confirmation mode for notifying the set value in a confirmable manner;
Setting value storage means (setting value storage area of the RAM 102 in which the setting values are stored) for storing the setting values,
The setting change mode control means determines that the first condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state) and the second condition is satisfied (the clear switch ( The setting change mode) based on the setting change switch 21TM052 being ON),
The setting confirmation mode control means determines that the first condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is ON) and the second condition is not satisfied (clear). Switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in an OFF state) to control the setting confirmation mode,
The setting value is determined based on a specific operation in the setting change mode (operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state),
The setting value storage means stores the setting value before being controlled to the setting change mode when the setting change mode is being controlled (the setting value is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 before the transition to the setting change mode). The set value that has been set is continuously stored without being changed with the transition to the setting change mode),
In the setting change mode, the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing the specific operation (the power is cut off without performing the operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state), and thereafter If the setting check mode is controlled when the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed, the setting value stored in the setting value storage unit is notified (the power supply is controlled to the setting checking mode after power-on). In this case, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 before the transition to the setting confirmation mode).
further,
Display means (for example, image display device 5 or the like) capable of displaying an effect display related to the game,
Detecting means (for example, a controller sensor unit 35A, a push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting a player's movement;
Valid display means (for example, effect control CPU 120, etc.) for displaying on the display means a valid display (for example, valid display 64SH003, 64SH005, etc.) indicating that the detection of the operation by the detection means is valid;
Difficult-to-visual effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120, etc.) for performing a difficult-to-visual effect that makes at least a part of an effect display (for example, a display in a promotion effect) including the effective display displayed by the effective display means difficult to visually recognize. When,
When an operation is detected by the detection means in a state where a first validity display (for example, a validity display 64SH005 or the like) is displayed as the validity display, a first effect display (for example, a treasure chest and a character string) is displayed. A first effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120 or the like) capable of performing a first effect to be displayed (for example, a corresponding effect in a button effect);
The operation is detected by the detection unit while a second validity display (for example, a validity display 64SH003 or the like) indicating that the operation of selecting one option from a plurality of options is valid as the validity display. In this case, a second effect display is displayed in which the result of the selection (for example, the result of the selection (for example, the selected character) shown in FIG. 20-1 (B2)) can be specified according to the detection of the motion. A second effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120 or the like) capable of performing a second effect (for example, a corresponding effect in a selected effect),
The difficult-to-visual effect means displays the first valid display, and can perform a poor-visibility effect when the first effect is performed by the first effect means (for example, 64SH104 in FIG. 20-4). When the affirmative determination is made in 64SH105, a button effect and a visual difficulty effect are performed, etc.), the second effective display is displayed, and when the second effect is performed by the second performance means, the visual effect is not performed. (For example, when the affirmative determination is made at 64SH101 in FIG. 20-4, or when the negative determination is made at 64SH104 and the affirmative determination is made at 64SH110, the selection effect is performed, and the effect of difficulty in visual recognition is not performed.)
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
According to this feature, a store clerk or the like at the amusement arcade can appropriately set the set value when the power supply is stopped while being controlled to the setting change mode. Further, it is possible to prevent the interest of the player from decreasing.

The gaming machine of the means D2 is
The gaming machine of the means D1,
The setting change mode control means performs a shift operation (an operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051) and an initialization operation (turns the clear switch 21TM052 on) when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Control) to perform the setting change mode when the
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode when the shift operation is performed when the power supply to the gaming machine is started and the initialization operation is not performed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, a store clerk or the like at the game hall can select which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

The gaming machine of the means D3 is
A game machine of means D1 or means D2,
When controlled to the setting change mode, the game state is initialized (RAM clear of step S21TM1410 is executed),
Based on the end of the control of the setting change mode, a notification corresponding to the end of the control of the setting change mode is executed (the set value blinks on the display monitor 21TM029).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, the clerk at the game hall or the like can grasp that the control of the setting change mode has ended.

The gaming machine of means D4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means D1 to the means D3,
A game control means for controlling the progress of a game in the gaming machine, the game control means including a game control microcontroller for executing a game control timer interrupt process; Computer 100)
Effect control means (effect control CPU 120) for executing effect control,
The game control means outputs a command (a setting change mode command, a setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means in accordance with being controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode,
The effect control means executes a notification according to the command (displays “setting is being changed” on the image display device 5 when a setting change mode command is received, and displays an image when a setting confirmation mode command is received). "Setting is being confirmed" is displayed on the device 5),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible for a store clerk or the like at the game arcade to know that the control has been performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of the means D5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means D1 to the means D4,
Timing after the power supply to the gaming machine is started (timing after the game control microcomputer 100 can execute the game control timer interrupt processing after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends) When the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, a predetermined notification is performed (the effect control CPU 120 outputs a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated, a clear switch (setting switch). When the setting changeover switch operation command indicating that the 21TM052 has been operated is received from the game control microcomputer 100, "operation of the lock switch has been detected.", "Operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected." Is displayed on the image display device 5)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, a clerk of the game hall or the like can grasp that the first condition or the second condition is satisfied at a timing after the power supply is started.
The correspondence between the means D2 to D5 and the means D1 described above can be applied to the correspondence between the means D2 to D5 and the means DA.

  In addition, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting change unit that changes a set value of a plurality of stages based on a setting change operation from the outside has been proposed. Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. Regarding the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (Paragraph 0007), it may be necessary for the external device to grasp the status of processing related to the change of the set value. Even if the conventional game machine signal output technology described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, there is a problem that it is difficult for the external device to grasp this. The invention according to means E1 to E8 has been made in view of the above situation, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of grasping the status of a process related to a change in a set value on an external device side. is there.

The game machine of the means E1 is
A gaming machine capable of executing specific control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (a set value 1 to 6 in which the range of the random number for jackpot determination is different),
The set value is changeable (changeable based on an operation in a setting change mode),
A specific signal (security signal) can be output from the first terminal (tenth terminal) in response to a predetermined event (abnormal winning, switch abnormality detection, magnetic error, RAM clear, etc.) occurring in the gaming machine,
A special signal (setting change corresponding signal) can be output from the second terminal (seventh terminal) in response to the processing related to the change of the set value (transition to the setting change mode, transition to the setting confirmation mode). ,
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the execution of the process related to the change of the set value can be notified to the outside in a distinguishable manner.

Further, as a gaming machine of means EA for solving the problem of the gaming machine described in JP 2010-200902 A and JP 2014-200506 A,
A gaming machine capable of executing specific control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (a set value 1 to 6 in which the range of the random number for jackpot determination is different),
The set value is changeable (changeable based on an operation in a setting change mode),
A specific signal (security signal) can be output from the first terminal (tenth terminal) in response to a predetermined event (abnormal winning, switch abnormality detection, magnetic error, RAM clear, etc.) occurring in the gaming machine,
A special signal (setting change corresponding signal) can be output from the second terminal (seventh terminal) in response to the processing related to the change of the set value (transition to the setting change mode, transition to the setting confirmation mode). ,
further,
Display means (for example, image display device 5 or the like) capable of displaying an effect display related to the game,
Detecting means (for example, a controller sensor unit 35A, a push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting a player's movement;
Valid display means (for example, effect control CPU 120, etc.) for displaying on the display means a valid display (for example, valid display 64SH003, 64SH005, etc.) indicating that the detection of the operation by the detection means is valid;
Difficult-to-visual effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120, etc.) for performing a difficult-to-visual effect that makes at least a part of an effect display (for example, a display in a promotion effect) including the effective display displayed by the effective display means difficult to visually recognize. When,
When an operation is detected by the detection means in a state where a first validity display (for example, a validity display 64SH005 or the like) is displayed as the validity display, a first effect display (for example, a treasure chest and a character string) is displayed. A first effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120 or the like) capable of performing a first effect to be displayed (for example, a corresponding effect in a button effect);
The operation is detected by the detection unit while a second validity display (for example, a validity display 64SH003 or the like) indicating that the operation of selecting one option from a plurality of options is valid as the validity display. In this case, a second effect display is displayed in which the result of the selection (for example, the result of the selection (for example, the selected character) shown in FIG. 20-1 (B2)) can be specified according to the detection of the motion. A second effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120 or the like) capable of performing a second effect (for example, a corresponding effect in a selected effect),
The difficult-to-visual effect means displays the first valid display, and can perform a poor-visibility effect when the first effect is performed by the first effect means (for example, 64SH104 in FIG. 20-4). When the affirmative determination is made in 64SH105, a button effect and a visual difficulty effect are performed, etc.), the second effective display is displayed, and when the second effect is performed by the second performance means, the visual effect is not performed. (For example, when the affirmative determination is made at 64SH101 in FIG. 20-4, or when the negative determination is made at 64SH104 and the affirmative determination is made at 64SH110, the selection effect is performed, and the effect of difficulty in visual recognition is not performed.)
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
According to this feature, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the execution of the process related to the change of the set value can be notified to the outside in a distinguishable manner. Further, it is possible to prevent the interest of the player from decreasing.

The game machine of means E2 is
The game machine of means E1,
The specific signal can be output in response to the start of power supply to the gaming machine (a security signal is output when RAM clear is executed),
Setting change mode control means (the game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling to the setting change mode capable of changing the set value when the power supply to the gaming machine is started; Prepare,
When controlled to the setting change mode, both the specific signal and the special signal can be output (the security signal and the setting corresponding change signal are output simultaneously).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, since it is possible to notify to the outside at least the possibility of being controlled to the setting change mode by the specific signal, even in a conventional external device which does not assume the input of the special signal, the setting change is performed by the specific signal. It is possible to know that the mode may have been controlled.

The game machine of means E3 is
The game machine of means E2,
When both the specific signal and the special signal are output based on the control to the setting change mode, the output period of the specific signal is longer than the output period of the special signal (output of the setting corresponding change signal). For 30 seconds after the end of the security signal)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, since it is possible to notify the outside that there is a possibility that at least the setting change mode may be controlled by the specific signal, even in a conventional external device that does not assume the input of the special signal, the setting is performed by the specific signal. It is possible to know that there is a possibility of being controlled in the change mode.

The game machine of means E4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means E1 to the means E3,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The special signal can be output based on the control in the setting confirmation mode (a setting correspondence change signal is output during a period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to notify the outside that there is a possibility that the setting has been controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means E5 is
The game machine of means E4,
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the setting check mode can be controlled (when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is ON and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF). Is controlled to the setting check mode)
It is possible to output both the specific signal and the special signal based on being controlled to the setting confirmation mode (simultaneously outputs a security signal and a setting correspondence change signal),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, since it is possible to notify to the outside at least the possibility of being controlled to the setting confirmation mode by the specific signal, even in a conventional external device that does not assume the input of the special signal, the setting is confirmed by the specific signal. It is possible to know that the mode may have been controlled.

The game machine of means E6 is
The game machine of means E1,
Setting change mode control means (the game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling to the setting change mode capable of changing the set value when the power supply to the gaming machine is started; Prepare,
The special signal can be output when the setting change mode is controlled (a setting change corresponding signal is output when the setting change mode is controlled), and the specific signal can be output when the setting change mode ends. (If the RAM clear is executed, a security signal is output when the setting change mode ends).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to notify the outside of the occurrence of the predetermined event while simplifying the signal output processing when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode.

The game machine of means E7 is
A game machine of means E1 or means E6,
A setting confirmation mode control means (the game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling to the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value when the power supply to the gaming machine is started; Prepared,
The special signal can be output when the setting confirmation mode is controlled (a setting change corresponding signal is output when the setting confirmation mode is controlled), and the specific signal can be output when the setting confirmation mode ends. (If the RAM clear is executed, a security signal is output when the setting confirmation mode ends)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to notify the occurrence of the predetermined event to the outside while simplifying the signal output processing when the mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means E8 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means E1 to the means E7,
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling to the setting change mode capable of changing the set value;
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value.
In the setting change mode, the set value can be changed according to a setting change operation (the set value can be changed by operating the setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052 and operating the lock switch 21TM051),
When the setting change operation is performed while neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, a predetermined notification is performed (the effect control CPU 120 operates the lock switch 21TM051). When a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch operation command has been received from the game control microcomputer 100, the lock switch operation command has been detected. , A warning that “operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected” is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, the clerk at the game hall or the like can grasp that the inappropriate setting change operation has been performed.
The correspondence between the means E2 to E8 and the means E1 described above can be applied to the correspondence between the means E2 to E8 and the means EA.

  In addition, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting change unit that changes a set value of a plurality of stages based on a setting change operation from the outside has been proposed. Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. Regarding the gaming machine described in JP 2010-200902 A (paragraph 0007), it may be necessary for the external device to grasp information related to the set value. Even if the conventional game machine signal output technology described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication (Paragraph 0102) is applied, there is a problem that it is difficult for the external device to grasp this. The invention according to the means F1 to F11 has been made in view of the above situation, and an object of the invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of grasping information related to a set value on an external device side.

The gaming machine of the means F1 is:
A gaming machine capable of executing specific control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (a set value 1 to 6 in which the range of the random number for jackpot determination is different),
The setting value can be changed to any one of a plurality of values (changeable based on an operation in a setting change mode),
A special signal (setting change corresponding signal) can be output in response to a process related to the change of the setting value (transition to the setting change mode, transition to the setting confirmation mode),
The special signal can be output in a special mode in which the set value can be specified (a number of pulses corresponding to the set value are output).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

Further, as a game machine of means FA for solving the problem of the game machine described in JP-A-2010-200902 and JP-A-2014-200506,
A gaming machine capable of executing specific control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (a set value 1 to 6 in which the range of the random number for jackpot determination is different),
The setting value can be changed to any one of a plurality of values (changeable based on an operation in a setting change mode),
A special signal (setting change corresponding signal) can be output in response to a process related to the change of the setting value (transition to the setting change mode, transition to the setting confirmation mode),
The special signal can be output in a special mode in which the set value can be specified (a number of pulses corresponding to the set value are output),
further,
Display means (for example, image display device 5 or the like) capable of displaying an effect display related to the game,
Detecting means (for example, a controller sensor unit 35A, a push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting a player's movement;
Valid display means (for example, effect control CPU 120, etc.) for displaying on the display means a valid display (for example, valid display 64SH003, 64SH005, etc.) indicating that the detection of the operation by the detection means is valid;
Difficult-to-visual effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120, etc.) for performing a difficult-to-visual effect that makes at least a part of an effect display (for example, a display in a promotion effect) including the effective display displayed by the effective display means difficult to visually recognize. When,
When an operation is detected by the detection means in a state where a first validity display (for example, a validity display 64SH005 or the like) is displayed as the validity display, a first effect display (for example, a treasure chest and a character string) is displayed. A first effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120 or the like) capable of performing a first effect to be displayed (for example, a corresponding effect in a button effect);
The operation is detected by the detection unit while a second validity display (for example, a validity display 64SH003 or the like) indicating that the operation of selecting one option from a plurality of options is valid as the validity display. In this case, a second effect display is displayed in which the result of the selection (for example, the result of the selection (for example, the selected character) shown in FIG. 20-1 (B2)) can be specified according to the detection of the motion. A second effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120 or the like) capable of performing a second effect (for example, a corresponding effect in a selected effect),
The difficult-to-visual effect means displays the first valid display, and can perform a poor-visibility effect when the first effect is performed by the first effect means (for example, 64SH104 in FIG. 20-4). When the affirmative determination is made in 64SH105, a button effect and a visual difficulty effect are performed, etc.), the second effective display is displayed, and when the second effect is performed by the second performance means, the visual effect is not performed. (For example, when the affirmative determination is made at 64SH101 in FIG. 20-4, or when the negative determination is made at 64SH104 and the affirmative determination is made at 64SH110, the selection effect is performed, and the effect of difficulty in visual recognition is not performed.)
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
According to this feature, it is possible to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside. Further, it is possible to prevent the interest of the player from decreasing.

The game machine of the means F2,
The gaming machine of the means F1,
A setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a setting change mode capable of changing the setting value;
Outputting the special signal in the special mode with the end of the setting change mode (when the setting change mode ends, outputting a number of pulses corresponding to the determined set value);
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to output a signal for notifying whether or not the setting change mode is controlled and a signal for notifying the set value of the gaming machine from the common terminal.

The game machine of the means F3 is
The game machine of means F2,
A special signal in a non-special mode (a setting change corresponding signal which is turned on during the period in which the setting change mode is being controlled) is output when the setting change mode is being controlled, and the setting change mode is terminated. After temporarily stopping the output of the special signal (after temporarily turning off the setting change corresponding signal with the end of the setting change mode), the special signal of the special mode (the number of pulse-like settings corresponding to the determined set value) Change response signal),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to notify to the outside whether or not the setting change mode is controlled by the special signal, and also to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

The game machine of means F4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means F1 to the means F3,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
Outputting the special signal of the special mode with the end of the setting confirmation mode (when the setting confirmation mode ends, outputting a number of pulses corresponding to the displayed set value);
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to output a signal notifying whether or not the control is set to the setting check mode and a signal notifying the setting value of the gaming machine from the common terminal.

The game machine of means F5 is
A game machine of means F4,
A special signal in a non-special mode (a setting change corresponding signal that is turned on during the period of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode) is output when the setting confirmation mode is being controlled. After the output of the special signal is temporarily stopped (after the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off with the end of the setting confirmation mode), the special signal of the special mode (the number of pulse-shaped pulses corresponding to the displayed set value) is obtained. Output the setting change response signal),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to notify to the outside whether or not the control is set to the setting confirmation mode by the special signal, and also to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

The gaming machine of the means F6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means F1 to the means F5,
In the special signal of the special mode, the set value can be specified by the number of pulses. (By setting the number of output times of the pulse-shaped setting change corresponding signal to the same number as the set value, the set value can be specified in the external device. is there),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to easily specify the set value in the external device.

The game machine of means F7 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means F1 to the means F6,
A specific signal (security signal) can be output in response to a predetermined event (abnormal winning, switch abnormality detection, magnetic error, RAM clear, etc.) occurring in the gaming machine.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event can be notified to the outside.

The game machine of the means F8 is
A game machine of means F7,
The specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change correspondence signal) are output from a common terminal (for example, output from a tenth terminal).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the set value can be notified externally with a simple configuration.

The game machine of means F9 is:
A game machine of means F7,
Outputting the specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change corresponding signal) from different terminals (for example, outputting a security signal from the tenth terminal and outputting a setting change corresponding signal from the seventh terminal);
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the set value can be notified to the outside in a manner that can be clearly distinguished.

The gaming machine of the means F10 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means F1 to the means F9,
A setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a setting change mode capable of changing the setting value;
In the setting change mode, the set value can be changed according to a setting change operation (the set value can be changed according to an operation of a setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052);
Regardless of whether or not the setting change operation has been performed in the setting change mode, the special signal of the special mode is output upon completion of the setting change mode (when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off, Regardless of whether or not the setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated before, the number of pulses corresponding to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is output as a setting change corresponding signal. ,
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the signal output process by executing the common signal output process regardless of whether the setting change operation is actually performed.

The gaming machine of the means F11 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means F1 to the means F10,
The special signal of the special mode is output at the end of the process related to the change of the set value (the number of pulse signals corresponding to the set values stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 at the end of the set change mode). And outputs a number of pulse-like setting change corresponding signals corresponding to the set values stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 with the end of the setting confirmation mode. After the output is completed, the special signal of the special mode is output at a predetermined timing different from the processing related to the change of the set value (for example, the end of the big hit game state) (stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102). Output the number of pulse-like setting change corresponding signals corresponding to the set value
It is characterized by the following.
According to this, it is possible to notify the setting value to the outside at a predetermined timing, and therefore, it is possible to increase opportunities for the external device to specify the setting value.
The correspondence between the means F2 to F11 and the means F1 described above can be applied to the correspondence between the means F2 to F11 and the means FA.

  In addition, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting change unit that changes a set value of a plurality of stages based on a setting change operation from the outside has been proposed. In a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when changing a set value, it is necessary to appropriately execute control relating to the provision of a game medium. The invention relating to the means G1 to G10 has been made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that appropriately executes control related to providing a game medium.

The gaming machine of the means G1 is:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) including a granting means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370 for controlling the payout motor 21TM289) capable of granting a game value (pachinko ball),
A specific control means (step S21TM1690 or the like for executing a process such as step S21TM1690) capable of executing specific control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (a set value 1 to 6 in which the range of the big hit determination random number is different) A control microcomputer 100);
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value;
Open state detection capable of detecting an open state in which at least one of the game machine frame (game machine frame 3) and the door frame (glass door frame 3a) corresponding to the game machine is opened (for example, the game machine frame 3). Means (a game machine frame open sensor capable of detecting that the game machine frame 3 is in an open state, a door frame open sensor capable of detecting that the glass door frame 3a is in an open state) And a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 having a machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300).
Regardless of whether the setting change mode is controlled or not, when the open state is detected, the provision of the game value is restricted (when the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, the glass door frame When 3a is in the open state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289, so that the payout of the game medium in the ball lending process and the prize ball process is not performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute appropriate control regarding the provision of the game value when the game mode is controlled to the setting change mode.

Further, as a game machine of means GA for solving the problem of the game machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) including a granting means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370 for controlling the payout motor 21TM289) capable of granting a game value (pachinko ball),
A specific control means (step S21TM1690 or the like for executing a process such as step S21TM1690) capable of executing specific control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (a set value 1 to 6 in which the range of the big hit determination random number is different) A control microcomputer 100);
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value;
Open state detection capable of detecting an open state in which at least one of the game machine frame (game machine frame 3) and the door frame (glass door frame 3a) corresponding to the game machine is opened (for example, the game machine frame 3). Means (a game machine frame open sensor capable of detecting that the game machine frame 3 is in an open state, a door frame open sensor capable of detecting that the glass door frame 3a is in an open state) And a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 having a machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300).
Regardless of whether the setting change mode is controlled or not, when the open state is detected, the provision of the game value is restricted (when the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the glass door frame 3a Is in the open state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289, so that the payout of the game medium in the ball lending process and the prize ball process is not performed).
further,
Display means (for example, image display device 5 or the like) capable of displaying an effect display related to the game,
Detecting means (for example, a controller sensor unit 35A, a push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting a player's movement;
Valid display means (for example, effect control CPU 120, etc.) for displaying on the display means a valid display (for example, valid display 64SH003, 64SH005, etc.) indicating that the detection of the operation by the detection means is valid;
Difficult-to-visual effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120, etc.) for performing a difficult-to-visual effect that makes at least a part of an effect display (for example, a display in a promotion effect) including the effective display displayed by the effective display means difficult to visually recognize. When,
When an operation is detected by the detection means in a state where a first validity display (for example, a validity display 64SH005 or the like) is displayed as the validity display, a first effect display (for example, a treasure chest and a character string) is displayed. A first effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120 or the like) capable of performing a first effect to be displayed (for example, a corresponding effect in a button effect);
The operation is detected by the detection unit while a second validity display (for example, a validity display 64SH003 or the like) indicating that the operation of selecting one option from a plurality of options is valid as the validity display. In this case, a second effect display is displayed in which the result of the selection (for example, the result of the selection (for example, the selected character) shown in FIG. 20-1 (B2)) can be specified according to the detection of the motion. A second effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120 or the like) capable of performing a second effect (for example, a corresponding effect in a selected effect),
The difficult-to-visual effect means displays the first valid display, and can perform a poor-visibility effect when the first effect is performed by the first effect means (for example, 64SH104 in FIG. 20-4). When the affirmative determination is made in 64SH105, a button effect and a visual difficulty effect are performed, etc.), the second effective display is displayed, and when the second effect is performed by the second performance means, the visual effect is not performed. (For example, when the affirmative determination is made at 64SH101 in FIG. 20-4, or when the negative determination is made at 64SH104 and the affirmative determination is made at 64SH110, the selection effect is performed, and the effect of difficulty in visual recognition is not performed.)
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
According to this feature, it is possible to execute appropriate control regarding the provision of the game value when the game mode is controlled to the setting change mode. Further, it is possible to prevent the interest of the player from decreasing.

The gaming machine of the means G2 is
The gaming machine of means G1,
The setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) is provided with the open state detection means (game machine capable of detecting that the game machine frame 3 is in the open state). The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 having a gaming machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 including a frame open sensor and a door frame open sensor capable of detecting that the glass door frame 3a is in an open state. When (the state in which the gaming machine frame 3 is opened) is detected, the setting change mode can be controlled (if YES in step S21TM3520, processing in step S21TM3530 and subsequent steps is executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game machine frame or the door frame from being controlled to the setting change mode in a state where the open state is not detected.

The game machine of means G3 is
A game machine of means G1 or G2,
A specific information storage unit (RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100) for storing specific information (value of the setting change flag) that can specify that the setting change mode has been controlled;
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped,
The setting change mode control means can set a game stop state when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means after power supply to the gaming machine is resumed (game). If the setting change flag is set after the power is turned on, the control microcomputer 100 indicates that the gaming machine frame 3 is open, the lock switch 21TM051 is ON, and the clear switch 21TM052 is ON. If the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied under the condition that the condition is satisfied, the process does not shift to the normal game processing, and loops until the power is turned off.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, after the power supply is restarted, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, the game can be set to the stop state.

The game machine of means G4 is
A game machine of means G3,
In response to the end of the setting change mode, the specific information (the value of the setting change flag) is deleted (YES is determined in step S21TM3530 based on the operation of turning off the lock switch 21TM051), and the setting change mode is set. The processing is ended, and the setting change flag is cleared in step S21TM3710.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to shift to the normal game process after the setting change mode ends.

The gaming machine of means G5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means G1 to G4,
Game control means (game control microcomputer 100 for executing a game control timer interrupt process) for controlling the progress of the game,
The giving means (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that controls the payout motor 21TM289) has the open state detecting means, and determines whether or not to give the game value based on the detection of the open state. (When the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the gaming medium is not paid out, When neither the gaming machine frame 3 nor the glass door frame 3a is opened, the payout of the game medium is executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, since the giving means for controlling the giving of the game value includes the open state detecting means, it is easy to determine whether or not to give the game value, and the processing load can be reduced.

The gaming machine of means G6 is
A game machine of means G5,
The providing means (dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370 for controlling the dispensing motor 21TM289) includes:
Executing a game value assignment based on receiving information (payout number) relating to the assignment of the game value from the game control means (the game control microcomputer 100 executing the game control timer interrupt process);
Storage means (RAM 21TM302 having an unpaid number storage buffer formed in a backup area in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) capable of storing grant information (number of unpaid numbers) relating to a game value to be given;
The storage means can store the additional information even after power supply to the gaming machine is stopped,
After the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted, the giving means executes the giving of the game value in accordance with the adding information stored in the storage means (the power supply is interrupted during the payout of the game medium). If this occurs, the payout of the game media is interrupted, the interrupted payout is resumed after the power is turned on, and the unpaid number of game media is paid out),
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, it is possible to store the grant information regarding the game value to be granted, and to store the information after the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted. Since it is possible to assign a game value corresponding to the assignment information, it is possible to avoid the disadvantage of the player.

The game machine of means G7 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means G1 to the means G6,
It can be connected to a gaming device (card unit 21TM050),
The giving means (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 which controls the payout motor 21TM289) executes the giving of the game value based on the signals (VL signal, BRDY signal, BRQ signal, etc.) outputted from the gaming machine,
When the open state is detected, the provision of the game value based on the signal output from the gaming device is restricted (the gaming machine frame provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is provided for the gaming machine). When detecting opening of the frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated, the card unit 21TM050 does not transmit the BRDY signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout of the game medium is executed. Is not done),
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, since the assignment of the game value while the gaming machine frame or the door frame is being opened is limited, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a problem associated with the giving operation while the gaming machine frame or the door frame is being opened, Maintenance work or the like while the gaming machine frame or door frame is open can be smoothly advanced.

The gaming machine of means G8 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means G1 to the means G7,
A setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3580) capable of controlling a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming a set value;
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 at power-on) and an initialization operation (operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 at power-on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
Along with being controlled to the setting change mode, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized,
Along with the control in the setting confirmation mode, the gaming state of the gaming machine is not initialized (in the case of control in the setting change mode, based on the fact that the clear switch 21TM052 is in the ON state, in step S21TM3040) If the determination is YES, the RAM is cleared in step S21TM3050, or if the determination is YES in step S21TM3140, the RAM is cleared in step S21TM3150. Is determined to be NO in step S21TM3040 based on the fact that the clear switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state, so that the process does not proceed to step S21TM3050 or is determined to be NO in step S21TM3140. Do not want to migrate to step S21TM3150),
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, a store clerk or the like at the game hall can select whether to control the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and can also select whether to initialize the game state.

The game machine of means G9 is
A game machine of means G8,
Storage means (RAM 21TM302 having an unpaid number storage buffer formed in a backup area in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) capable of storing grant information (data on unpaid number) relating to a game value to be given;
The additional information is initialized as the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized (when the RAM clear of step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 for initializing the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed). At the same time, the RAM clearing in step S21TM1880 for initializing the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is also executed. The number of data is initialized),
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized including the grant information on the gaming value to be granted, thereby facilitating management at the gaming shop.

The game machine of means G10 is
A game machine of means G8,
Storage means (RAM 21TM302 having an unpaid number storage buffer formed in a backup area in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) capable of storing grant information (data on unpaid number) relating to a game value to be given;
Regardless of whether or not the gaming state of the gaming machine has been initialized, the additional information is not initialized. Also, since the RAM clear of step S21TM1880 for initializing the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed, the unpaid number of the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed. Is not initialized),
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, even when the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized, the assignment information is not initialized, so that information on the game value to be assigned can be appropriately protected.
The correspondence between the means G2 to G10 and the means G1 described above can be applied to the correspondence between the means G2 to G10 and the means GA.

  In addition, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting change unit that changes a set value of a plurality of stages based on a setting change operation from the outside has been proposed. Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. With respect to a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), the state of occurrence of a predetermined event in the gaming machine and the state of execution of processing related to a change in a set value are determined on the external device side. In some cases, it is necessary to distinguish and recognize them. However, even if the conventional game machine signal output technology described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, the external device side needs to recognize both. There is a problem that it is difficult to distinguish and recognize. The invention according to the means H1 to H5 has been made in view of the above situation, and the external device side distinguishes the occurrence situation of a predetermined event in a gaming machine and the execution situation of a process related to a change of a set value on an external device side. It is to provide a gaming machine that can be recognized separately.

The game machine of the means H1 is:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing specific control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (a set value 1 to 6 in which the range of the random number for jackpot determination differs),
The setting value can be changed,
A specific signal (security signal) can be output in response to a predetermined event (RAM clear, game machine frame / door frame open detection, etc.) occurring in the gaming machine, and processing (setting change) related to the change of the set value Mode), and can output a specific signal.
The output period of the specific signal corresponding to the predetermined event is different from the output period of the specific signal corresponding to the process related to the change of the set value (the security signal is not controlled to the setting change mode because the RAM is cleared. Is output for 30 seconds, and if the RAM is cleared and controlled to the setting change mode, the signal is output for a period obtained by adding 30 seconds to the period controlled to the setting change mode.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the execution of the process related to the change of the set value can be notified to the outside in a distinguishable manner.

Further, as a game machine of means HA for solving the problem of the game machine described in JP-A-2010-200902 and JP-A-2014-200506,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing specific control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (a set value 1 to 6 in which the range of the random number for jackpot determination differs),
The setting value can be changed,
A specific signal (security signal) can be output in response to a predetermined event (RAM clear, game machine frame / door frame open detection, etc.) occurring in the gaming machine, and processing (setting change) related to the change of the set value Mode), and can output a specific signal.
The output period of the specific signal corresponding to the predetermined event is different from the output period of the specific signal corresponding to the process related to the change of the set value. Is output for 30 seconds, and if the RAM is cleared and controlled to the setting change mode, the signal is output for a period obtained by adding 30 seconds to the period controlled to the setting change mode.)
further,
Display means (for example, image display device 5 or the like) capable of displaying an effect display related to the game,
Detecting means (for example, a controller sensor unit 35A, a push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting a player's movement;
Valid display means (for example, effect control CPU 120, etc.) for displaying on the display means a valid display (for example, valid display 64SH003, 64SH005, etc.) indicating that the detection of the operation by the detection means is valid;
Difficult-to-visual effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120, etc.) for performing a difficult-to-visual effect that makes at least a part of an effect display (for example, a display in a promotion effect) including the effective display displayed by the effective display means difficult to visually recognize. When,
When an operation is detected by the detection means in a state where a first validity display (for example, a validity display 64SH005 or the like) is displayed as the validity display, a first effect display (for example, a treasure chest and a character string) is displayed. A first effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120 or the like) capable of performing a first effect to be displayed (for example, a corresponding effect in a button effect);
The operation is detected by the detection unit while a second validity display (for example, a validity display 64SH003 or the like) indicating that the operation of selecting one option from a plurality of options is valid as the validity display. In this case, a second effect display is displayed in which the result of the selection (for example, the result of the selection (for example, the selected character) shown in FIG. 20-1 (B2)) can be specified according to the detection of the motion. A second effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120 or the like) capable of performing a second effect (for example, a corresponding effect in a selected effect),
The difficult-to-visual effect means displays the first valid display, and can perform a poor-visibility effect when the first effect is performed by the first effect means (for example, 64SH104 in FIG. 20-4). When the affirmative determination is made in 64SH105, a button effect and a visual difficulty effect are performed, etc.), the second effective display is displayed, and when the second effect is performed by the second performance means, the visual effect is not performed. (For example, when the affirmative determination is made at 64SH101 in FIG. 20-4, or when the negative determination is made at 64SH104 and the affirmative determination is made at 64SH110, the selection effect is performed, and the effect of difficulty in visual recognition is not performed.)
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
According to this feature, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the execution of the process related to the change of the set value can be notified to the outside in a distinguishable manner. Further, it is possible to prevent the interest of the player from decreasing.

The game machine of the means H2 is
A game machine of means H1,
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value;
Setting check mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3580) capable of controlling a setting check mode capable of checking a set value,
The output period of the specific signal is different between the case where the setting is controlled to the setting change mode and the case where the setting is controlled to the setting confirmation mode. (When the security signal is controlled to the setting change mode, the security signal is controlled to the setting change mode. Is output for a period obtained by adding 30 seconds to the set period, and is output for a period obtained by adding 50 ms to the period controlled by the setting check mode when the mode is controlled to the setting check mode.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to externally distinguish between control in the setting change mode and control in the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of the means H3 is
A game machine of means H1 or means H2,
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value;
Setting check mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3580) capable of controlling a setting check mode capable of checking a set value,
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 at power-on) and an initialization operation (operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 at power-on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
When at least one of the transition operation and the initialization operation is performed while not being controlled by any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, a predetermined notification is performed (the effect control CPU 120 is When a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated and a setting switch operation command indicating that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has been operated are received from the game control microcomputer 100, the "lock switch" Is detected on the image display device 5) and a warning "Operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected."
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, a store clerk or the like at a game arcade can grasp that an inappropriate setting change operation has been performed.

The game machine of means H4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means H1 to the means H3,
A special signal (setting change corresponding signal) can be output in response to the processing (setting change mode, setting check mode) related to the change of the set value.
The specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change corresponding signal) are output from different terminals (for example, a security signal is output from a tenth terminal, and a setting change corresponding signal is output from a seventh terminal). ),
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the execution of the process related to the change of the set value can be externally distinguished, and the process related to the change of the set value is executed. Can be notified to the outside in a clearer manner.

The game machine of means H5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means H1 to the means H4,
A special signal (setting change corresponding signal) can be output in response to the processing (setting change mode, setting check mode) related to the change of the set value.
The special signal can be output in a special mode in which a set value can be specified (a number of pulses corresponding to the set value are output).
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.
The correspondence between the means H2 to H5 and the means H1 described above can be applied to the correspondence between the means H2 to H5 and the means HA.

  As disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting change unit that changes a set value of a plurality of stages based on an external setting change operation. Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. Regarding the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it may be necessary for the external device to grasp the execution status of the processing related to the set value. Even if the conventional game machine signal output technology described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, there is a problem that it is difficult for the external device to grasp this. The invention according to the means I1 to I6 has been made in view of the above situation, and is to provide a gaming machine capable of grasping the execution state of a process related to a set value on an external device side. .

The gaming machine of the means I1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing specific control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (a set value 1 to 6 in which the range of the random number for jackpot determination differs),
The setting value can be changed,
In response to the start of the control (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode) related to the set value, the output of the specific signal (security signal) is started,
Stopping the output of the specific signal (security signal) in response to the end of the control (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode) related to the set value,
The output period of the specific signal corresponding to the control related to the set value is longer than a predetermined period (when the control signal is controlled to the setting change mode, the output period of the security signal is 30 seconds or more, and when the control signal is controlled to the setting confirmation mode). , The output period of the security signal is 50 ms or more),
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, the control state related to the set value can be appropriately notified to the outside of the gaming machine.

Further, as a gaming machine of means IA for solving the problem of the gaming machine described in JP 2010-200902 A and JP 2014-200506 A,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing specific control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (a set value 1 to 6 in which the range of the random number for jackpot determination differs),
The setting value can be changed,
In response to the start of the control (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode) related to the set value, the output of the specific signal (security signal) is started,
Stopping the output of the specific signal (security signal) in response to the end of the control (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode) related to the set value,
The output period of the specific signal corresponding to the control related to the set value is longer than a predetermined period (when the control signal is controlled to the setting change mode, the output period of the security signal is 30 seconds or more, and when the control signal is controlled to the setting confirmation mode). , The output period of the security signal is 50 ms or more),
further,
Display means (for example, image display device 5 or the like) capable of displaying an effect display related to the game,
Detecting means (for example, a controller sensor unit 35A, a push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting a player's movement;
Valid display means (for example, effect control CPU 120, etc.) for displaying on the display means a valid display (for example, valid display 64SH003, 64SH005, etc.) indicating that the detection of the operation by the detection means is valid;
Difficult-to-visual effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120, etc.) for performing a difficult-to-visual effect that makes at least a part of an effect display (for example, a display in a promotion effect) including the effective display displayed by the effective display means difficult to visually recognize. When,
When an operation is detected by the detection means in a state where a first validity display (for example, a validity display 64SH005 or the like) is displayed as the validity display, a first effect display (for example, a treasure chest and a character string) is displayed. A first effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120 or the like) capable of performing a first effect to be displayed (for example, a corresponding effect in a button effect);
The operation is detected by the detection unit while a second validity display (for example, a validity display 64SH003 or the like) indicating that the operation of selecting one option from a plurality of options is valid as the validity display. In this case, a second effect display is displayed in which the result of the selection (for example, the result of the selection (for example, the selected character) shown in FIG. 20-1 (B2)) can be specified according to the detection of the motion. A second effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120 or the like) capable of performing a second effect (for example, a corresponding effect in a selected effect),
The difficult-to-visual effect means displays the first valid display, and can perform a poor-visibility effect when the first effect is performed by the first effect means (for example, 64SH104 in FIG. 20-4). When the affirmative determination is made in 64SH105, a button effect and a visual difficulty effect are performed, etc.), the second effective display is displayed, and when the second effect is performed by the second performance means, the visual effect is not performed. (For example, when the affirmative determination is made at 64SH101 in FIG. 20-4, or when the negative determination is made at 64SH104 and the affirmative determination is made at 64SH110, the selection effect is performed, and the effect of difficulty in visual recognition is not performed.)
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
According to this feature, the control state related to the set value can be appropriately notified to the outside of the gaming machine. Further, it is possible to prevent the interest of the player from decreasing.

  Note that a setting value suggestion effect indicating the set value information set may be executed depending on the type of the effective display and the type of the effect display displayed when the operation is detected. For example, by selecting a valid display or an effect display using a selection table or the like in which the selection ratio of each effective display or each effect display is different according to the set value information, and performing a set value suggestive effect based on the selected effective display or effect display. Thereby, the player may be able to estimate the set value based on the appearance ratio of each effective display and each effect display. By doing so, the effective display and the effect display are rich in change, and the player can be given an opportunity to guess the set value based on the appearance ratio of each effective display and each effect display. be able to.

The game machine of the means I2 is
The game machine of means I1,
A specific signal (security signal) can be output in response to a predetermined event (RAM clear, game machine frame / door frame open detection, etc.) generated in the gaming machine,
The output period of the specific signal corresponding to the predetermined event is different from the output period of the specific signal corresponding to the control (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode) related to the set value (for the security signal, RAM clear is executed. If the setting change mode is not controlled, the signal is output for 30 seconds. If the RAM is cleared and the setting change mode is controlled, the signal is output for a period obtained by adding 30 seconds to the period controlled by the setting change mode. ),
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the execution of the process related to the change of the set value can be notified to the outside in a distinguishable manner.

The gaming machine of the means I3 is
A game machine of means I1 or means I2,
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value;
Setting check mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3580) capable of controlling a setting check mode capable of checking a set value,
The output period of the specific signal is different between the case where the setting is controlled to the setting change mode and the case where the setting is controlled to the setting confirmation mode. (When the security signal is controlled to the setting change mode, the security signal is controlled to the setting change mode. Is output for a period obtained by adding 30 seconds to the set period, and is output for a period obtained by adding 50 ms to the period controlled by the setting check mode when the mode is controlled to the setting check mode.)
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to externally distinguish between being controlled to the setting change mode and being controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of the means I4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means I1 to the means I3,
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3600) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value;
Setting check mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM3540 to S21TM3580) capable of controlling a setting check mode capable of checking a set value,
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 at power-on) and an initialization operation (operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 at power-on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
When at least one of the transition operation and the initialization operation is performed while not being controlled by any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, a predetermined notification is performed (the effect control CPU 120 is When a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated and a setting switch operation command indicating that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has been operated are received from the game control microcomputer 100, the "lock switch" Is detected on the image display device 5) and a warning "Operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected."
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, a store clerk or the like at a game arcade can grasp that an inappropriate setting change operation has been performed.

The gaming machine of the means I5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means I1 to the means I4,
A special signal (setting change corresponding signal) can be output in response to the control (setting change mode, setting check mode) related to the set value.
The specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change corresponding signal) are output from different terminals (for example, a security signal is output from a tenth terminal, and a setting change corresponding signal is output from a seventh terminal). ),
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the execution of the process related to the change of the set value can be externally distinguished, and the process related to the change of the set value is executed. Can be notified to the outside in a clearer manner.

The gaming machine of the means I6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means I1 to the means I5,
A special signal (setting change corresponding signal) can be output in response to the control (setting change mode, setting check mode) related to the set value.
The special signal can be output in a special mode in which a set value can be specified (a number of pulses corresponding to the set value are output).
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.
The correspondence between the means I2 to the means I6 and the means I1 can be applied to the correspondence between the means I2 to the means I6 and the means IA.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of effect control process processing. It is a figure for explaining a fluctuation pattern and a kind of reach. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of notice effect determination processing. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio in a notice effect determination process. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation of a modification. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation of a modification. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation of a modification. It is a figure showing a mode of three kinds of effects. It is a figure showing a mode of a visual recognition effect. It is a figure for explaining each production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process performed in a variable display setting process. It is a figure which shows an example of a difficult-to-view effect determination ratio and an appearance character determination ratio. It is a figure which shows the example of an output of the sound according to the mode of the notice effect during the visual difficulty effect. It is a timing chart in a modification, and a figure showing that game-related information does not perform a visually difficult presentation. It is a figure showing an example of a look-ahead effect. It is a figure showing an example of an image which performed other image processing which makes it difficult to recognize. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. (A), (B) is a figure which illustrates the production control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various big hits. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit A), (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit B and big hit C), (C) FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the change pattern for loss. It is a flowchart showing a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows a setting value confirmation process. (A) is a flowchart showing RAM location processing, and (B) is a schematic diagram of the RAM. It is a flowchart which shows a setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows a part of timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows a power-off detection process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing information stored in a RAM and a cleared state. It is an explanatory view showing an initial symbol for each received command. It is an explanatory view showing a notification mode at the time of starting the pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows a power-off detection process. It is a flowchart which shows a part of effect control process processing. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a setting change process according to a modification 8. It is a flow chart which shows a part of effect control main processing in modification 8. FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of the image display device according to a modification 8. FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of the image display device according to a modification 9. FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of the image display device according to a tenth modification. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of a payout control board. It is a rear view showing a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display result determination table. (A) is a simplified front view of the main board, and (B) is an explanatory view for explaining the display contents of the display monitor. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a partial configuration of a storage area in a RAM on a main board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a memory map of a CPU on a main board. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a RAM area corresponding to a storage area of a main board RAM. (A) is a time chart showing the display time of the item displayed on the display monitor, and (B-1) to (B-6) are explanatory diagrams for explaining changes in the display content of the display monitor. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating movement of data stored in a storage area of a ring buffer. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display mode of a display monitor in a setting change mode. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a display mode of a display monitor in a setting confirmation mode. (1) is a diagram showing information displayed on the image display device when controlled in the setting change mode, and (2) shows information displayed on the image display device when controlled in the setting confirmation mode. FIG. (1) to (3) are explanatory diagrams showing an effect mode of a setting suggestion effect, and (4) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining an effect mode of a setting suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the control signal output to a payout control board from a game control board. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the control command transmitted / received between a game control board and a payout control board. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing signal lines and the like used for transmitting and receiving control signals and control commands. It is a sequence diagram showing transmission and reception of signals between the microcomputer for game control and the microcomputer for payout control during normal operation. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing which CPU for payout control performs. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process which CPU for payout control performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of the ball lending restriction method in this embodiment. It is a timing chart for explaining communication between a card unit and a pachinko gaming machine. It is a timing chart which shows the 1st ball lending restriction method. It is a timing chart which shows the 2nd ball lending restriction method. It is a timing chart which shows the 3rd ball lending restriction method. It is a timing chart which shows the 4th ball lending restriction method. FIG. 9 is a timing chart showing an example in which ball lending is not restricted during the setting change mode. It is a timing chart which shows the example which restarts payout after the end of a setting change mode. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing an example in which payout is forcibly terminated in accordance with a shift to a setting change mode. It is a timing chart which shows transmission and reception of the signal between the microcomputer for game control and the microcomputer for payout control at the time of normal operation. It is a timing chart which shows transmission and reception of the signal between the microcomputer for game control and the microcomputer for payout control during the period when it is controlled to the setting change mode. It is a timing chart which shows transmission and reception of the signal between the microcomputer for game control and the microcomputer for payout control during the period when the game machine frame or the glass door frame is open. (1) is an explanatory diagram showing control when a power failure occurs before a set value is determined, and (2) is an explanatory diagram showing control when a power failure occurs after a set value is determined. It is a figure showing a warning screen when a setting change operation is performed during a game. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of a signal output from each output terminal. FIG. 4 is a timing chart showing an output period of a security signal and a setting change correspondence signal. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a relationship between a set value and an output mode of a setting change correspondence signal. FIG. 6 is a timing chart showing an output mode and an output period of a setting change corresponding signal. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power-on process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a power-on process. (1) A diagram showing a value displayed on the display monitor when the set value is not a regular value, and (2) a diagram showing a value displayed on the display monitor when the set value is a regular value. . It is a timing chart showing a method of restricting ball lending based on detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame. It is a timing chart which shows the method of restarting ball lending after completion of detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing a method of resuming ball lending without shifting to the setting change mode after power-off. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing a method of shifting to a setting change mode after power-off to forcibly end ball lending. It is a timing chart which shows the method which changes to a setting change mode after power-off and restarts ball lending. It is a timing chart showing a method of restricting award ball payout based on detection of an open state of a gaming machine frame. It is a timing chart which shows the method of restarting award ball payout after completion of the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame. It is a timing chart which shows the method of restarting award ball payout without shifting to the setting change mode after power-off. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing a method of shifting to a setting change mode after power-off and forcibly terminating award ball payout. It is a timing diagram showing a method of shifting to the setting change mode after power-off and restarting the prize ball payout. FIG. 4 is a timing chart showing an output period of a security signal and a setting change correspondence signal. FIG. 4 is a timing chart showing an output period of a security signal and a setting change correspondence signal.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined hitting and firing device into the game area.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special figure game) of a special symbol (also called a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is provided. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B for performing are provided. These are each composed of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating “0” to “9” or a lighting pattern such as “−”. The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

  The “variable display” of a special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The fluctuation includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the case of the change of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. In addition, the fluctuation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be referred to as a variable display or a variable display.

  The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is referred to as “first special figure game”, and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as “second special figure game”. In addition, the special symbol display device which performs the variable display of the special symbol may be one type.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special figure game and the second special figure game, a decorative pattern as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern (a pattern indicating a number or the like). Is variably displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, up and down). (Scroll display of direction and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decoration symbol executed synchronously is also simply referred to as a variable display.

  On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. The hold display and the active display are also collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

  The number of variable displays suspended is also referred to as the suspended storage number. The number of reserved storages corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as a first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storages corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as a second reserved storage number. In addition, the sum of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2, there are provided a first hold display 25A and a second hold display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs. Displays the first number of reserved storages, and the second reservation display 25B displays the second number of reserved storages based on the number of lighted LEDs.

  Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

  The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning port that is always kept in a fixed open state by which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special figure game can be started.

  The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning prize ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing piece is in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in an off state, so that the tip of the movable wing piece is Is in the closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning port (also referred to as the second starting winning port being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning prize ball device 6B is in an open state in which a game ball can enter the second starting winning opening when the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 81 is on (second starting). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special figure game can be started. It should be noted that the variable winning ball device 6B only needs to change between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four lower right and left sides of the game area), a general winning opening 10 which is always kept in a fixed open state by a predetermined ball receiving member is provided. In this case, when the player enters any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning port is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a special winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and a special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. Form.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door (for the special electric accessory) is in the off state, the special winning opening door closes the special winning opening, and the game ball becomes large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is in the ON state, the special winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball easily enters the special winning opening. Become.

  When game balls enter the special winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10, for example.

  A game ball entering each winning port including the general winning port 10 is also referred to as “winning”. In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the left side of the game area), a normal symbol display 20 is provided. As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 includes a 7-segment LED or the like, and variably displays ordinary symbols as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbol is represented by a number indicating “0” to “9”, a lighting pattern such as “−”, or the like. The normal design may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal symbol is also called an ordinary game.

  On the left side of the image display device 5, a pass gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided. Based on the passing of the game ball through the passage gate 41, the general-purpose game is executed.

  Above the normal symbol display 20, there is provided a general symbol holding display 25 </ b> C. The general-purpose display indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored general-purpose reservations, which is the number of general-purpose games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

  On the surface of the game board 2, in addition to the above-described configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails are provided. At the bottom of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports are taken in.

  Loudspeakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a gaming effect lamp 9 for a gaming effect is provided around the gaming area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

  At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

  At a lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to fire a game ball toward a game area by a hit ball firing device is provided.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball rented by a predetermined ball rental machine is held so that it can be supplied to the hitting ball launching device (storage). ) Is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) for paying out prize balls when the upper plate is full is provided.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by a player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like is provided. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detecting means for detecting the operation (operation, etc.) of the player, but other detecting means may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
A game ball is fired toward a game area by a rotation operation by a player on a hit ball operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the ordinary symbol game on the ordinary symbol display 20 is started. In the case where the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41 during a period during the execution of the previous general-purpose game or the like (when the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41 but cannot immediately execute the general-purpose game based on the passage). The normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In this ordinary symbol game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol will be "per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol (regular symbol lost symbol) other than the symbol per regular symbol is stopped and displayed as the determined ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol is “regular symbol lost”. When "per day" is reached, opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening becomes open).

  When a game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, a first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

  When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

  Note that, when the game ball enters (wins) the starting winning opening during a period during which the special figure game is being executed, or a period in which the game is controlled to the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state described later (the start winning prize has occurred. When the special figure game based on the start winning prize cannot be immediately executed), the execution of the special figure game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In the special figure game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, “7”, the actual symbol is different depending on the big hit type to be described later) is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol, it becomes “big hit” and the big hit symbol If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, “2”) different from the above is stopped and displayed, “small hit” is obtained. If a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, “−”) different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, “losing” is displayed.

  After the display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the big hit gaming state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the game is controlled to the small hit game state.

  In the big hit gaming state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is defined as a timing when a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, and a timing when the number of game balls entering the special winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, nine). It is continued until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which a special winning opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the special winning opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the round reaches a predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times).

  In the big hit game state, the player can obtain a prize ball by causing the game ball to enter the big winning opening. Therefore, the big hit gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the big hit game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous to the player.

  Note that the "big hit" is set with a big hit type. For example, a plurality of types of opening modes of the special winning opening (the number of rounds and the upper limit period of opening) and a game state after the big hit game state (a normal state, a time saving state, a probable change state, etc. to be described later) are prepared. Type is set. As the big hit type, a big hit type where many prize balls can be obtained or a big hit type where few or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

  In the small hitting game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small hitting game state, the opening mode is the same as the big hitting game state in the case of some of the big hit types (the number of opening of the special winning opening is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the special winning opening is also the same). Etc.) to open the big winning opening. As in the case of the big hit type, a small hit type may be provided for “small hit”.

  After the big hitting game state is ended, the state may be controlled to a time saving state or a probable change state according to the above big hit type.

  In the time saving state, control (time saving control) for shortening the average special figure fluctuation time (the period during which the special figure is fluctuated) is performed as compared with the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average time for fluctuating the figure (the period for fluctuating the figure) is shortened compared to the normal state, and the probability of "hitting the figure" in the figure drawing game is improved compared to the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that allow the game balls to easily enter the second start winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly, the second special symbol) is improved, and is a state advantageous to the player.

  In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result is “big hit” is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probable change state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because the change efficiency of the special symbol is improved and a “big hit” is likely to occur.

  The time-saving state and the probable change state continue until one of the end conditions such as the execution of the predetermined number of special figure games and the start of the next big hit game state is satisfied first. Execution of a predetermined number of special figure games as an end condition is also referred to as count cut (time cut, time cut probability change, etc.).

  The normal state is a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time-saving state, a probable change state, or the like. The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special map game will be a "big hit", is set in the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when a system reset is performed). This is a state in which control is performed in the same manner as when the processing is not performed.

  The state in which the probable change control is being executed is also referred to as a high-probability state, and the state in which the probable change control is not being executed is referred to as a low-probability state. The state in which the time-saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time-saving control is not executed is called a low base state. By combining these, the time saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the probable change state is a high-precision high-base state, and the normal state is also a low-probability low-base state. The high-accuracy and low-base state is also referred to as a high-accuracy low-base state.

  After the small hitting game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the control is continued to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes “small hit” (however, “small hit” occurs. If the special figure game at that time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number cut, the game state is naturally changed). Note that the display result of the special figure game does not have to have “small hit”.

  Note that the gaming state may change based on the fact that a game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area within a special winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when a game ball passes through a specific area, the state may be controlled to be a positively changed state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game and raising the game) are executed in accordance with the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. Note that the effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or a game effect lamp 9 is provided. May be performed by turning on / off the light, operating the movable body 32, or the like.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5, as the effect performed in accordance with the progress of the game, the first special figure game or the In response to the start of the two special figure game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. At the timing when the display result (also called a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game or the second special figure game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative symbols) which is a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also stopped (derived).

  During the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbols, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for a decorative symbol that is not yet stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 forms a part of a jackpot combination described later. Is continued.

  In addition, a reach effect is executed in response to the reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special figure game and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) to be a "big hit" (also referred to as a big hit reliability or a big hit expectation) according to the effect mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach having a higher hit reliability than the normal reach.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “big hit”, a fixed decoration pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, “7”) are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

  In the case of "probable change big hit" which is controlled to the probable change state after the end of the big hit game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and after the big hit game state ends, the probable change state is set. In the case of a non-probable variable jackpot (normal jackpot) that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, “6”) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as positive variation symbols, and the even-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as non-positive variable symbols (normal symbols). After reaching the reach mode with the non-probable variable symbol, a promotion effect that eventually becomes “probable variable jackpot” may be executed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “small hit”, the display result of the variable display of the decoration symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 is a fixed decoration symbol (for example, “ 1 35 ”) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols forming the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left," "middle," and "right." In addition, when the display result of the special figure game is “big hit” of some big hit types (big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it is “small hit” Alternatively, a common fixed decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “losing”, the decorative display variable display mode does not become the reach mode, and the non-reach combination fixed decorative pattern (“ (Also referred to as “non-reach loss”) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is “non-reach loss”). When the display result is “losing”, after the decorative pattern variable display mode becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination other than the big hit combination (“reach loss”) is displayed as the decorative symbol variable display result. The fixed decoration symbol may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decoration symbol is "reach loss").

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the above-described variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for giving a notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a look-ahead notice effect for giving a notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display with execution suspended). As the prefetch notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

  In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and restarting the variable display, one variable display is made to look like a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. A pseudo continuous production may be executed.

  During the big hit game state, a big hit middle effect for notifying the big hit game state is executed. As the large hit production, a production that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion production that indicates that the value of the big hit game state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, a small hitting effect for notifying the small hitting game state is executed. The big hit game in the small hit game state and in some big hit types (a big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, a big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a high accuracy state) By performing a common effect in the state and the state, the player may not be able to know whether the current state is the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state. In such a case, by performing a common effect after the end of the small hitting game state and after the end of the big hitting game state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between the high-accuracy state and the low-accuracy state. You may.

  Further, for example, when a special map game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15 and the like as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of holding), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of holding), Game state, small hitting game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an input / output port (I / O) 105.

  The CPU 103 performs a process for controlling the progress of the game (a process for realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns to be described later, effect control commands to be described later, and data to be referred to when making various determinations to be described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is partially or entirely stopped. Note that all or a part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

  The random number circuit 104 renewably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first reservation). An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second reservation display 25B, the general-purpose reservation display 25C, and the like (solenoid driving signal).

  The switch circuit 110 detects detection signals (game balls pass or fail) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, starting port switch (first starting port switch 22A and second starting port switch 22B), count switch 23). (A detection signal indicating that the vehicle has entered and the switch has been turned on, etc.), and is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the passing or approach of the game ball has been detected.

  The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a special winning opening door. Transmit.

  The main board 11 (the game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, directs an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game, etc.) in accordance with the progress of the game. 12 The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a big hit type)), and a fluctuation pattern used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), A game status (for example, start and end of variable display, open status of a special winning opening, occurrence of a prize, the number of storages held, a game state), a command for specifying an error occurrence, and the like.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game. (Including various types of notification such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of restoration of power interruption).

  The effect control board 12 includes an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute an effect together with the display control unit 123 (this is a process for realizing the above functions of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). Determination, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and a signal appropriately indicating the operation content). In some cases, the control unit 123 may be instructed.

  The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

  The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating a sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output a sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and to turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or a lamp signal (a signal designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

  The audio control board 13 includes various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signals, and outputs sounds designated by the sound designation signals from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let it.

  The lamp control board 14 includes various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode specified by the lamp signal. I do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the turning on / off of the lamp.

  The sound output, the control of turning on / off the lamp (supply of a sound designation signal or a lamp signal, etc.), and the control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32, etc.) are executed by the effect control CPU 120. You may do so.

  The random number circuit 124 counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (effect random numbers) used for executing various effects in an updatable manner. The effect random number may be updated by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for inputting an effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11 or the like, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). And an output port.

  Substrates other than the main substrate 11, such as the effect control board 12, the voice control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, an operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of the main board 11)
First, main operations of the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a game control main process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, and the like), setting of making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on while the clear switch is on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), an initialization process (step S8) is performed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in a work area.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

  If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes a power supply stop processing immediately before the power supply is stopped due to the stop of the power supply. In the process at the time of power supply stop, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a process of protecting data in the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes a process of adding an error detection code (check sum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for progressing the game (including various flags, various timer states, and the like), but also the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (Step S4; No), an initialization process (Step S8) is executed.

  When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (Step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (Step S4). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time of stopping the power supply, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (Step S5; No), the initialization process (Step S8) is executed because the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (Step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (Step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time of stopping the power supply. In the recovery processing, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state is restored to the state when the power supply was stopped, and if the special symbol is being changed, the special symbol change is restarted from the state before the recovery by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

  Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing recovery from the power interruption to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In conjunction with this, the effect control command to specify the backed-up game state before the power interruption, or the effect control to specify the display result of the running special figure game if the special figure game is being executed. A command may be transmitted. As these commands, the same commands as those set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the time of restoration from the power interruption, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the restoration from the power interruption has been performed or that the restoration from the power interruption is being performed. Screen display to perform The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

  After transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12 after ending the restoration process or the initialization process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, a register of a CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically performed every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and an interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). Thereafter, a loop process is started. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute a timer interrupt process.

  Upon receiving the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receiving the interrupt request, the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, so that the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether a detection signal has been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of the jackpot) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins and the like, and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the state has changed to a certain probability) are output (step S23).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the game random number used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). When the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special figure game, control of the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized. See below).

  Subsequent to the special symbol processing, the ordinary symbol processing is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process process every time the timer interrupts, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the general symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on “per-day drawing”. The execution of the ordinary symbol game is performed by driving the ordinary symbol display device 20, and the ordinary symbol reservation display 25C is turned on to display the ordinary symbol reservation number.

  After executing the normal symbol process process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt process. Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes a command control process (Step S27). In some cases, the CPU 103 sets transmission of a production control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set to be transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process ends.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as a special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

  In the start winning prize determination process, a process of detecting occurrence of a start winning prize, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of stored holds is executed. When a winning start occurs, a random number value for determining a display result (including a big hit type) and a fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading a display result or a variation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of stored memories, transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command for designating a determination result such as occurrence of a start winning prize, the number of stored memories, and pre-reading determination is performed on the effect control board 12. . The effect control command at the time of the start winning set thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. Is transmitted to

  After executing the start winning determination processing in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processing in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

  The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is "big hit" or "small hit", and the big hit type in the case of "big hit" Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any of a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. Thereafter, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “1”, and the special special pattern normal processing ends. Note that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed prior to the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the order of winning the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special figure game may be established in the order of the winning (also referred to as winning order).

  When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions made on the main board 11 and various decisions made on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, any one of a plurality of types of variation patterns is determined by using a random value for determining a variation pattern based on a result of a predetermined determination as to whether the display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. And the like are determined. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”, and the variation pattern setting process ends.

  The fluctuation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (the special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (whether or not there is reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. (Such as the type of reach effect) and is also referred to as a variable display pattern.

  The special symbol change process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “2”. The special symbol change processing includes a process of setting a special symbol to be changed in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. And the like. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special figure change time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “3”, and the special symbol change processing ends.

  The special symbol stop processing in step S113 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop processing, the change of the special symbol is stopped by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). The processing for making the setting is included. If the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is “small hit”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. When the display result is “losing”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”. When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", the game state is updated when the time reduction state or the probable change state is being controlled and the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

  The big hit opening pre-processing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. The big hit opening pre-processing includes, for example, a process of starting a round in the big hit gaming state and setting a big winning opening to an open state based on a display result of “big hit” or the like. Have been. When opening the special winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, an open upper limit period in which the special winning opening is opened and an upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set according to, for example, the type of the big hit. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, and the big hit opening pre-processing ends.

  The big hit opening processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. The processing during the opening of the jackpot is based on a process of measuring the elapsed time from the opening of the jackpot, and on the basis of the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. For determining whether it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to “6”, The processing during the opening of the big hit ends.

  The post-big hit release processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". The post-big hit opening process includes a process of determining whether or not the number of rounds in which the large winning opening is opened has reached a set upper limit number of times, and a process of determining whether or not the number of hits has reached the upper limit number of times. And the like to make settings for ending the process. When the number of rounds has not reached the upper limit execution number, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release processing ends.

  The big hit end processing in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. The big hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which an ending effect is performed as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state, and a change in response to the end of the big hit game state. Processing for performing various settings for starting control and time-saving control is included. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the big hit end processing ends.

  The small hit release pre-processing of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. The small hit opening pre-processing includes, for example, a process of setting the large winning opening to the open state in the small hit gaming state based on the display result being “small hit”. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “9”, and the small hit release pre-processing ends.

  The small hit opening processing in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". The processing during opening of the small hits includes processing for measuring the elapsed time from the opening of the special winning opening and timing for returning the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes a process of determining whether or not the event has occurred. When the big winning port is returned to the closed state and the timing of ending the small hitting game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “10”, and the small hit opening processing ends.

  The small hit end processing in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit gaming state is executed is performed. Here, when the small hitting game state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hitting gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the small hitting end processing ends.

(Main operation of effect control board 12)
Next, main operations of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12 The register setting of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit) is performed. Further, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32 such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation is executed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process stands by.

  Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be disabled. However, when a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disabled state is used, the interrupt is disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition command (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In the command reception interrupt processing, a production control command is fetched from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among input ports included in the I / O 125. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt processing.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control commands are read out. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the effect control command that has been read out is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or is stored in the RAM 122 so that the effect control process processing or the like can confirm which effect control command has been received and the content specified by the effect control command. It turns on the provided reception flag. When the effect control command specifies a game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

  After executing the command analysis processing in step S75, an effect control process processing is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, a display operation of an effect image in a display area of the image display device 5, a sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative luminous body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decoration LED, and a movable body 32 The control for operating various effect devices, such as the driving operation of the device, is performed. In addition, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed on the control content of the rendering operation using various rendering devices in accordance with the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like.

  Following the effect control process in step S76, an effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random number used on the effect control board 12 is updated by software. After that, the process returns to the step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

  FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a prefetch notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing a look-ahead notice effect are performed based on a start control effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying a hold display is executed based on the number of held memories specified from the effect control command.

  After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of the variable display has been received from the main board 11. And so on. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”, and the variable display start waiting process ends.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In the variable display start setting processing, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol, the reach Whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are to be executed, the mode thereof, the execution start timing, and the like are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (a set of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, updates the value of the effect process flag to “2”, and ends the variable display start setting process. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol according to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  The variable display effect processing in step S172 is processing executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 displays an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5 by instructing the display control unit 123. Driving the movable body 32, outputting a voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and transmitting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect controls such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED by the output are performed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating stop display of the fixed decorative symbol from the main board 11 is received. In response to, for example, the fixed decoration symbol which is the display result of the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the rendering process flag is updated to “3”, and the rendering process during variable display ends.

  The wait process per special figure in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state from the main board 11 has been received. Then, when an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to “6”. To ". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the small hit effect effect processing. Also, when the reception wait time of the command has elapsed without receiving a command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special map game is "losing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”. When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process per special figure ends.

  The small hit production process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is “4”. In the small hit effect production process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set contents. . Further, in the small hit effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating the end of the small hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. It is updated to a certain “5”, and the small hit production process ends.

  The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In the small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and performs various effect controls based on the set contents at the end of the small hit game state. Execute Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”, and the small hit end effect process ends.

  The big hit production process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is “6”. In this big hit effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set contents. In addition, in the big hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating termination of the big hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7 ", and ends the big hit production process.

  The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In the ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the big hit game state, and performs various effect controls of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the set contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”, and the ending effect process ends.

(Modification of the basic description)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description is a payout-type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but the game media is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. An enclosed game machine may be used.

  Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, when the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the sign indicating “−” may not be displayed as a display result).

  In the above basic description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted, a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated in accordance with the operation of the operating lever by the player, When the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button and the combination of the stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine in which one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus etc.) are mounted.

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form that is distributed and provided to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium. It may be in a form of being distributed by being installed in a storage device included in the storage device. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, programs and data for implementing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. It does not matter.

  The game can be executed not only by installing a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, the program may be directly executed using hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

  In the present specification, the expression of comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of an effect (expressions such as “high”, “low”, and “different”) indicates that one of them is a ratio of “0%”. May be included. For example, it may also include that one is a ratio of “0%” and the other is a ratio of “100%” or a ratio of less than “100%”.

(Explanation about the characteristic part 31AK)
Next, the characteristic portion 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining a variation pattern and a type of reach in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 8 (A), in the present embodiment, the non-reach loss variation patterns PA1-1 and PA1-2 in which the variable display mode of the decorative symbol does not become the reach mode and the display result is "losing". , The display pattern is a "big hit", such as reach-losing variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-6, PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc., in which the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode and the display result is "losing". There are prepared the following fluctuation patterns PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4, and the like.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8B, in the present embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach AE are executed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggestion effect that indicates that it is controlled to the big hit state. The reliability (big hit reliability) when each reach is executed is represented by the number of black stars in FIG. 8B, normal reach <super reach E <super reach D <super reach C <super reach B <Super Reach A increases in order. In addition, you may provide the reach which determines that it is a big hit.

  In this embodiment, super reach is executed via normal reach. In addition, during the super-reach reach effect, an advanced effect that evolves (promotes) to a more reliable reach may be executed. The variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc., and variation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4, etc. shown in FIG. 8A are variation patterns corresponding to the execution of the development effect. Note that FIG. 8A shows a variation pattern in which the reliability evolves into a super-reach one step higher, but a variation pattern in which the reliability evolves in two or more steps is also provided. Further, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed a plurality of times may be provided.

  In this embodiment, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established, except for the normal reach having the lowest reliability. As shown in FIG. 8B, the title notification mode differs depending on the type of reach. Specifically, the super reach E having the lowest reliability among the super reach is notified of the title of the reach only by display, and the other super reach is notified of the title by display and sound. As described above, the notification of the title is executed by a larger number of effect devices in the reach with the higher reliability than in the reach with the lower reliability. As a result, the player's sense of expectation can be effectively instigated, and the staging effect is improved. The title notification mode may be arbitrarily changed depending on the reliability or irrespective of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be changed according to the actual display result or the like. Further, the font of the title character (Gothic, Mincho, etc.) or the typeface (line, square, etc.) may be changed depending on the type of the reach.

  The notification of the title of the reach (title notification) is not limited to the title itself such as the name of the reach, but may be the name of the character appearing in the reach effect, the content of the effect of the reach effect, or the like.

(Example of the production operation of the characteristic part 31AK)
Next, an example of a rendering operation according to the present embodiment will be described. The following production operation is executed by the production control CPU 120 executing the production control process based on the production control command transmitted from the main board 11. 9 and 10 are diagrams illustrating an example of a super-reach effect production operation according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9A shows that the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. . Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 9 (B), the decorative symbol indicating the number 7 on the “left” and “right” stops and the reach mode is reached. After that, the production branches depending on the type of reach.

(Super Reach A)
In the case of Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 9C, a character 31AK001, which is a friendly character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and a reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period elapses from the start of the super-reach production, such as the end of the introduction part of the super-reach production (also referred to as super-reach production), the entire screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. The title 31AK002 of Super Reach A (here, the character of “SP Reach A”) is displayed and the sound (here, “Super Reach A”) corresponding to the title name of Reach is output from the speaker 8. , The title of Super Reach A is announced. Thereafter, the title 31AK002 of Super Reach A is erased, and as shown in FIG. 9 (E), the character 31AK003 which is the enemy character is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK003 confront each other. The subsequent part of the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. An effect in which the characters confront each other is also referred to as a battle effect. In the battle effect, a victory occurs when an ally character wins, and a loss occurs when the ally character loses.

  In addition, when the words are displayed on the image display device 5 during the super reach effect, a sound corresponding to the words may be output from the speaker 8. Further, the dialogue is not limited to being displayed in a balloon as shown in FIG. 9E, and may be displayed as subtitles in a lower portion of the image display device 5 or the like.

(Super Reach B)
In the case of Super Reach B, as shown in FIG. 9C, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period elapses after the super reach effect is started, such as when the introduction portion of the super reach effect ends, as shown in FIG. 9 (F), the title 31AK005 of super reach B is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. In this case, the character “SP Reach B” is displayed, and a sound (here, “Super Reach B”) corresponding to the title of Reach is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of Super Reach B is notified. You. Thereafter, the title 31AK005 of Super Reach B is deleted, and as shown in FIG. 9 (G), the character 31AK006, which is the enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK006 confront each other. The subsequent part of the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed.

  As described above, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title of the reach is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed since the super reach effect was started. By doing so, the title can be notified after the introduction part of the super reach effect is shown to the player, and the effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

  In the super reach A (FIG. 9 (C) → (D) → (E)...) And the super reach B (FIG. 9 (C) → (F) → (G). In the introductory portion until the notification, the super reach effect is executed in a common effect mode (FIG. 9C). By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which super-reach has been started since the super-reach production has started, and which title is to be notified. The superreach A and the superreach B are not limited to the completely common production mode until the title is announced, and it is possible to determine at least one superreach by watching the production. The sections may have a common effect mode. For example, in the introduction part of Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a super reach effect (for example, an effect of displaying an enemy character or suggesting an enemy character) may be executed in a manner related to a title to be notified thereafter. It may be. By doing so, the effect of the effect is improved, and the player pays attention to the effect. As described above, the title notification may be executed after the super reach can be specified.

(Super Reach D)
In the case of Super Reach D, the title 31AK007 of Super Reach D (here, the character of “SP Reach D”) is displayed in a part of the center of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. At the same time, the sound (here, “defeat the enemy”) corresponding to the title of the reach is output from the speaker 8 to notify the title of the super reach D. As described above, in the super reach D, the title is notified at the start of the super reach effect. Under the title 31AK007, an expectation degree suggestion indication 31AK008 indicating the degree of expectation of the reach is displayed. The degree of expectation is represented by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. Here, the degree of expectation is the degree of expectation to be a big hit, but does not have to completely match the big hit reliability of the reach.

  The notification by the voice of Super Reach D does not report the title as it is, but reports the content of the reach. As described above, in the present embodiment, the notification mode of the title notification by voice differs depending on the type of the reach. Thereby, the notification mode of the title notification is diversified, and the interest is improved.

  After the title is announced in the super reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. At this time, the title 31AK007 and the degree of expectation suggestion display 31AK008 continue to be displayed in a reduced size in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 or the like. By doing so, the player can grasp the expectation degree of the reach even during the reach effect. Although FIG. 9 (I) shows the effect contents common to FIG. 9 (C) (super reach A, super reach B), a super reach effect dedicated to super reach D may be executed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 9 (J), the character 31AK009, which is the enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the reach effect of the super reach D in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 confront each other is executed. You.

(Super Reach E)
In the case of Super Reach E, the title 31AK010 of Super Reach E (here, the character of “SP Reach E”) is displayed on the upper left part of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. Thus, the title of Super Reach E is announced. In the super reach E, the notification of the title by voice is not performed. In addition to the display of the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011, which is an enemy character, are displayed. Be executed. As described above, in Super Reach E, the title is notified in accordance with the progress of the reach effect. In the super reach E, the title 31AK010 is continuously displayed during the reach effect.

  In the reach effect of the super reach E having a low jackpot reliability, by giving the title information without stopping the progress of the reach effect, it is possible to prevent the player from giving an excessive sense of expectation. On the other hand, in the reach effects of the super reach A, the super reach B, and the super reach D, the progress of the reach effect is stopped and the title is notified (FIGS. 9D, 9F, and 9F). H)). By doing so, the title notification according to the super reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect can be improved. It should be noted that in super reach effects such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, the title may be notified without stopping the progress of the reach. Also, in contrast to this embodiment, in a super-reach reach production with high jackpot reliability, the title may be notified without stopping the progress of the reach production. In the reach effect of the super reach having a low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach effect may be stopped to notify the title.

(Timing notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is announced after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of Super Reach production, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, Super Reach production The title is announced at the start. By doing in this way, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B having high jackpot reliability, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the superreach production, and Super Reach D and Super Reach have low jackpot reliability. In E, the title was announced at the start of the super-reach production, but the title was announced at the start of the super-reach production in the case of the reach with a high jackpot reliability, and the super The title may be notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the reach effect.

(Title display area)
Further, in this embodiment, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title is notified on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in the super reach D and the super reach E, the image display device 5 is displayed. Is notified in a part of the screen (second area). By doing in this way, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In particular, in the case of a reach with a high jackpot reliability, title notification is executed in a wider display area than in a case of a reach with a low reliability, so that effective title notification is possible. Note that the title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be such that the title is displayed in a size that fits the entire screen, or the entire background is displayed as a title notification background. (Title notification using the entire screen) or the like. Further, the display area for performing the title notification may be different between the super reach A and the super reach B, or the display area for performing the title notification may be different between the super reach D and the super reach E.

  The method for changing the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect may be arbitrarily changed. For example, in the case of a reach with a high jackpot reliability, the title notification may be executed in a narrower display area than in a case of a reach with a low reliability. Further, when the display area for performing the title notification is made different according to the reach effect, the display area may be made different as in this embodiment, or the display place may be made different.

(Expectation degree suggestion display)
In this embodiment, in the title notification in the super reach A and the super reach B having the high jackpot reliability, the super reach D having the lower jackpot reliability than the super reach A and the super reach B is displayed without displaying the indication of the expectation degree. In the title notification in, an indication of the degree of expectation was displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the effect from becoming dull. In addition, in the title notification in Super Reach E, which has a lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach D, an indication of the degree of expectation is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the expectation by displaying the expectation indicator indicating that the reliability is low in the reach with low reliability. Note that an expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed on at least a part of the super reach A, the super reach B, and the super reach E.

  Note that the indication of the degree of expectation is not limited to the one indicated by the number of black stars as shown in FIG. 9 (H) and the like, and the degree of expectation may be indicated by a meter or a gauge. The set numerical value may be displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 9 (H) and the like, in the case where the number of black stars is indicated, half (or half) black stars may be displayed, and the number of levels of expectation may be increased.

(Title display end timing)
In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is erased and a super reach effect is executed. Thereby, in the super reach A and the super reach B, it is possible to pay attention to the reach effect. Further, in the super reach D and the super reach E, after the title is displayed, the title is continuously displayed until a determined effect described later is executed. Thereby, in the super reach D and the super reach E, it is possible to grasp the type of the reach even during the super reach effect. Further, by performing the above, the title notification corresponding to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect can be improved. In addition, the display end timing of the title may be arbitrarily changed in any case in order to improve the staging effect.

  Note that, here, the production operation of the reach production of the super reach C is omitted, but for example, a title notification or an expectation suggestion display according to the jackpot reliability may be executed.

(Decided production)
At the timing of deriving the display result (the end of the variable display) after the execution of each reach effect, a determined effect for notifying whether or not the display result is a "big hit" is executed. The fixed effects include a fixed effect indicating that the display result is "big hit" and a fixed effect indicating that the display result is "losing". In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10B, a fixed effect in which the image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 5 is executed. Thereafter, if the display result is "big hit", an image 31AK013 indicating that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 10C, and a big hit combination is formed as shown in FIG. 10D. A fixed decoration symbol is derived. If the display result is "losing", an image indicating that the ally character has been defeated is displayed, and a fixed decorative symbol that is a reach-losing combination is derived.

  In this embodiment, even when the title is continuously informed during the reach effect, the notification of the title is finished before the fixed effect is executed. As a result, attention can be paid to the determined effect, and a sharp title notification can be executed.

  In the effect operation examples shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, during the reach effect of the super reach, the decorative design is reduced and the variable display is executed at the lower right portion of the image display device 5. The method of displaying the decorative pattern of the symbol may be arbitrary. For example, the decorative design may not be displayed during the reach effect, and the display mode (size, position, shading, number, etc.) may be changed depending on the type of the reach effect.

  In addition, in the case of displaying the characters resident during the hold display, the active display, and the variable display, and the display related to the mobile communication on the image display device 5, the display is appropriately hidden during the super-reach reach effect so as to focus on the reach effect. It may be. At this time, these displays may be kept displayed during a low-reliability reach effect such as super reach E. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a player from excessively expecting a low-reliability reach effect, and to pay attention to the reach effect in a high-reliability reach effect.

(Development stage)
Next, an example of an effect operation when an extended effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 11 (A), when the extended effect is executed when the reach effect of Super Reach D is executed (the title notification of Super Reach D is executed), FIG. As shown, an effect is performed in which the reach effect is interrupted and the screen is torn. Thereafter, when the game reaches the super reach A, as shown in FIG. 11C, the title of the super reach A is announced, and the reach effect of the super reach A is executed. When developing to Super Reach B, as shown in FIG. 11 (D), the title of Super Reach B is announced, and Reach production of Super Reach is executed. As described above, when the development effect is executed, the title information of the reach of the development source is switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, so that it is easy to understand which reach has been developed. As shown in FIG. 11, when the reach of the development destination is a reach that performs title notification by display and voice, title notification by display and voice is executed again.

  It should be noted that the development effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 11B, but may be an effect in which the screen is gradually cracked and cracked, or a sand storm (display indicating failure) is displayed. You may do so. With such an effect, an unexpected effect can be performed. It should be noted that there may be a development effect of gasses, such as an effect in which the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion)
In the effect operation example shown in FIG. 9H, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 is configured to display a black star indicating the expectation degree from the beginning. An expectation suggestion effect that suggests an expectation by becoming a black star may be executed.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 12 (A), when announcing the title of Super Reach D, an expectation indicator 31AK021 of five white stars is first displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 12B, a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expectation indicator 31AK021 is displayed. As shown in FIG. 12C, the black star 31AK022 moves and the expectation indicator 31AK021 moves. An effect that fits into one of the white stars is performed. At this time, a sound of “pin” indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased is output from the speaker 8. As shown in FIGS. 12D and 12E, the same effect is repeated the number of times corresponding to the degree of expectation of the reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) output from the speaker 8 may be changed in a stepwise manner each time it is repeated (for each number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the degree of expectation falls in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK021, the black star is highlighted, as shown in FIG. By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation degree suggestion effect has ended.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 12A to 12F, the black stars are displayed one by one and the expectation indicated by the expectation suggestion display is increased by one step. However, two or more black stars are displayed. It may be displayed so that the degree of expectation increases by two or more levels. Alternatively, half the black stars may be displayed, and the degree of expectation may be increased by half a step. In this case, different sounds may be output or the same sound may be output according to the number of displayed stars (the number of stages of the rising expectation). For example, the same sound may be output when half a black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three black stars are displayed. Further, there may be a case where no sound is output. By doing so, the effect indicating the degree of expectation is diversified, and the effect of the effect is improved. Regardless of the number of steps of the degree of expectation that increases at one time, the same black star image is displayed and fits in the white star of the indication of expectation, and the number of black stars according to the number of steps of the degree of expectation that increases Such an effect may be performed.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In different effect modes, even if the same command (for example, a command specifying a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main board 11, effects based on the command are executed in different effect modes. In each effect mode, the background, the character, the motif displayed on the image display device 5, the sound output from the speaker 8, and the like need only be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of times of variable display or the game state, or may be changeable by a player's operation.

  FIGS. 12 (G) to 12 (L) are examples of the production operation of the title notification and expectation degree suggestion production when the special mode is set when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the production mode. In the normal mode, as shown in FIGS. 12 (A) to 12 (F), title notification and expectation degree suggestion effect are executed. In the special mode, the reach effect based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is a reach effect of the super reach D2 having a different effect form from the reach effect of the super reach D. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is designated, the title 31AK023 of the super reach D2 is displayed as shown in FIG. At this time, a voice corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, but a voice different from the normal mode (for example, a voice having a different voice color) is output. The expectation degree indication 31AK024 in the super reach D2 is not a star but a diamond.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 12 (H), a black diamond 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation indicator 31AK024 is displayed. As shown in FIG. 12 (I), the black diamond 31AK025 moves to display the expectation indicator 31AK024. An effect that fits into one of the white diamonds is performed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a sound of “pong” indicating that the black diamond indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 12 (J) and (K), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the degree of expectation of the reach. When the number of black diamonds corresponding to the degree of expectation falls in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024, as shown in FIG. 12 (L), the black diamond is highlighted as if it glows. In this way, by making the notification mode of the title different depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed) determined according to the selection of the player, the game state, and the like, the effect is diversified, and the effect of the effect is enhanced. improves.

  FIG. 12 shows an example of the production operation when the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach D is designated. However, depending on the production mode (the state when the reach production is executed), other reach productions (title notification, expected degree suggestion production) May be made different. Depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed), whether to notify the title of the reach or the execution ratio of the title notification may be different. For example, when a predetermined effect mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing in this way, it is possible to execute the effect according to the preference of the player, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the degree of expectation is suggested by the number of black stars in the degree of expectation suggestion display, and an expectation suggestion effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is performed. May be executed to gradually reduce the number of displays that indicate the degree of expectation. Such an expectation suggestion effect may be executed in addition to or in place of the expectation effect effect of this embodiment.

(Other examples of development effects)
In the case of executing the expectation suggestion effect of gradually increasing the display indicating the expectation of the expectation suggestion display, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display indicating the expectation. In this case, when the display indicating the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed at once instead of stepwise. For example, as shown in FIG. 13A, after the title of Super Reach D is announced and the effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is completed, a button is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. An extended effect in which the image 31AK031 is displayed is executed. Here, when an operation on the push button 31B is detected, as shown in FIG. 13C, the title 31AK032 of super reach C (here, the character of “SP reach C”) is displayed, and The title of Reach C is announced. As described above, when the development effect is executed, the title information of the reach of the development source is switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination, so that it is easy to understand which reach has been developed. Under the title 31AK032, an expectation degree suggestion display 31AK033 having three black stars is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by two or more, they are displayed at once. Note that, after the movable body 32 operates, a development effect in which the title and the expected degree suggestion display change may be executed.

(Preliminary production)
In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a title notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed according to the title notification mode (for example, the display color of the title). For example, as shown in FIG. 14A, the title 31AK036 of Super Reach A is displayed in black, and a sound corresponding to the title name of Reach is output from the speaker 8 to notify the title of Super Reach A. After that, as shown in FIG. 14B, a title notice in which the display color of the title 31AK036 changes to red is executed. As described above, when the title notice is not executed, the title is displayed in black, and when the title notice is executed, the title is displayed in a color other than black. In the title announcement shown in FIG. 14, the title display mode (display color) may change after the reach title is announced by voice. By doing so, the effect of the notice effect can be enhanced. The timing at which the title is displayed in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of the display of the title.

  When a title notice in which the title display mode (display color) changes is executed, a sound corresponding to the changed display mode may be output after the title display mode has changed. By doing so, the effect of the notice effect can be enhanced. The title notification by voice may be executed after the title display mode (display color) changes. In this case, a sound corresponding to the display mode (display color) of the title after the change may be output.

(Timing notification execution timing)
It is preferable that the notification of the title during the reach is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of an effect (specific effect), such as a notice effect or an advanced effect, in which the degree of expectation controlled in the jackpot advantageous state is improved. By doing in this way, once the title is announced, an effect of improving the degree of expectation can be executed, so that the player's expectation can be maintained.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an announcement effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute an announcement effect and an effect mode. The announcement effect determination process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process of step S171 in FIG. In the announcement effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern specified from the command transmitted from the main board 11 is a super-reach fluctuation pattern (step 31AKS001).

  If it is a super-reach variation pattern (step 31AKS001; Yes), the display color of the title of the super-reach (whether or not to execute the title notice) is determined (step 31AKS002).

  In step 31AKS002, the display color of the title of the super reach is determined in accordance with the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16A, for example, according to whether the display result is "big hit" or "losing". As shown in FIG. 16A, the display color of the super reach title changes from “black”, “red”, “black” to “red”, and changes from “black” to “fruit pattern”. There are also items that change from "red" to "fruit pattern", and the big hit reliability increases in this order (ascending order). That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the timing of change of the title display color. By doing so, the player pays attention to the timing of the change of the display color of the title, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  Note that the “fruit pattern” may be such that the title character is displayed in bold and the character itself is a “fruit pattern”, or the background portion of the title display area may be a “fruit pattern” . There may be a pattern displayed as a “fruit pattern” from the beginning. For the display color change, the display color may be changed after the title notification is executed, as shown in FIG. As for the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be changed according to the timing at which the display color changes. Further, since the title display period varies depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes depending on the type of super reach may be different. In the case of a super reach having a long title display period (for example, super reach D or super reach E), a plurality of changing timings may be provided, and the changing timing may be determined to any one. In the case of a super reach having a short title display period (for example, super reach A or super reach B), the number of changing timings may be one or a smaller number than a super reach having a long title display period.

  When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the title is determined in the normal mode at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16A, and the normal mode as shown in FIG. Determine the title display color at different rates. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. As described above, by making the execution mode (display color and display color change timing) of the title notice different depending on the effect mode, the effect is diversified and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a line notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed according to the character display mode (for example, the display color of the line) in the super reach reach effect.

  After the display color of the title of the super reach is determined, the display color of the words of the character in the reach attainment of the super reach (whether or not to execute a speech notice) is determined (step 31AKS003).

  In step 31AKS003, the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined according to whether the display result is "big hit" or "losing", for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 16 (C), the display colors of the lines in the reach effect are changed from “white”, “red”, and “white” to “red”, and in this order (ascending order). The jackpot reliability is high. In other words, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the timing at which the display color of the dialogue changes. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the dialogue, and the effect of the effect is improved. In the case where the display color changes, the display color may be changed after the words are displayed. As for the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be changed according to the timing at which the display color changes.

  The big hit reliability may be different depending on the combination of the presentation modes of the title notice and the speech notice. For example, in the case where the same announcement mode (display color) is included in the title announcement and the dialogue announcement, the big hit reliability may be increased when the same announcement mode is achieved. In addition, the big hit reliability may be made different by a combination of the timing of change of the presentation mode between the title notice and the speech notice. For example, when the change timing is the same, the jackpot reliability may be higher than when the change timings are different, or the jackpot reliability may be different depending on which change occurs first. By doing so, it is possible to pay attention to the respective change timings of the title notice and the dialogue notice.

  When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the dialogue may be determined at a different rate in the special mode from that in the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

  Note that, in place of the dialogue announcement, an announcement effect for notifying the jackpot reliability based on a change in the effect mode of the reach effect may be executed. In this case, in the notice effect, a plurality of change timings of the effect mode may be provided so that the big hit reliability differs according to the change timing.

  After the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined, or when it is determined that the pattern is not a variation pattern of the super reach (step AK31S001; No), the presence or absence of other notice effects and the effect form are determined (step AK31S004). After that, the determination results in the 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 are stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (Step AK31S005), and the announcement effect determination processing ends.

  Note that in this embodiment, a title advance notice and a dialogue advance notice can be executed in the case of super reach, but in the case of a specific super reach (for example, a super reach other than a low-reliability super reach), the title advance notice is provided. And at least one of the line announcement may be made executable. In addition, although the title announcement and the speech announcement have been described as being determined by the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16, the determination ratio is arbitrary, and the determination ratio may be different depending on, for example, the type of super reach. By doing so, a notice effect can be executed according to the type of the reach, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the number of executable effect modes (the number of display colors that can be displayed) differs between the title notice and the dialogue notice. By doing in this way, the effects can be varied and the effect of the effects can be enhanced. In the title notice and the dialogue notice, the number of executable effect modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and types of executable effect modes may be the same. By doing so, a notice effect with a sense of unity can be executed, and the player can easily grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Action effect)
When the presentation mode of the title notice and the dialogue of the dialogue change, an effect indicating that the presentation mode changes may be executed. For example, an action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5 and an effect effect in which the image acts on at least one of a title and a line may be executed. Then, after the action effect is executed, the effect mode (display color) of the title or the line may be changed. The effect mode of the action effect (action effect image and the like) may be common to both the title and the line. It should be noted that there may be a case where the effect mode of the title or the dialogue does not change despite the execution of the action effect. In the case of executing the action effect, the presence / absence of execution of the effect effect, the execution timing, and the effect mode may be determined based on the determination result of the title notice and the dialogue notice. Such a determination may be performed in the process of step AK31S004. For example, the ratio at which at least one of the title announcement and the speech announcement changes in the effect mode (the rate at which the effect mode changes due to the action effect) may be different depending on the effect mode of the action effect. The ratio of the effect of the speech notice and that of which effect mode changes (the ratio of acting on which effect) may be different, or the ratio of the color (how many steps) it changes may be different. . By executing such an action effect, when the action effect image is displayed, the player pays attention to which of the title and the line is to be applied, and the effect is improved. When there are a plurality of effect modes, the presence or absence of the effect effect and the effect mode may be determined at different rates depending on the effect mode. By doing in this way, an action effect corresponding to the effect mode can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  As another example of such an action effect, at least one effect mode (display color) of any of the title and the dialogue according to the effect content of the reach effect (for example, the effect content of the character motion or the battle effect). May be changed. In this way, the player pays attention to the content of the reach effect.

  The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the feature section 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, all of the features described in the above embodiments are not essential components, and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub LCD)
As a sub display device different from the image display device 5, a sub liquid crystal may be provided on the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3. Here, it is referred to as a sub liquid crystal, but the sub display device may be configured by an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed, for example, in the vicinity of the image display device 5, or may be movable or housed. In the sub liquid crystal, various effects such as a notice effect and a display of a hold display are executed. For example, title notification may be executed in the sub liquid crystal. As in the case of the super reach D and the super reach E of the above-described embodiment, when the title is displayed continuously after the notification of the title, the display of the title and the degree of expectation may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. In this case, the title and the degree of expectation suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal after the image display device 5 notifies the title. By doing so, it is possible to display the title and the degree of expectation suggestion display without obstructing the super reach effect on the image display device 5, and the title and the degree of expectation suggestion display are also easy to understand.

  In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to notification of a title of a reach effect as a suggestive effect has been described. However, the present invention is applied to title information (notice of mainly displaying characters) relating to other effects. You may. For example, as a notice effect (for example, a look-ahead notice effect), when performing a look-ahead zone effect of shifting to a plurality of zones (stage, effect mode, and the like) in which the background image and the effect mode on the image display device 5 are respectively different, the shifted zone The present invention may be applied to the title notification. When a mission (“Let's reach at 7”, “Use a stick controller to annihilate the enemy”, etc.) is presented, and a mission effect that is in a state advantageous to the player when the mission is completed is executed, The present invention may be applied to the notification of the title of a mission.

(Variation 1 of characteristic portion 31AK)
In the above embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, a determined effect for notifying whether or not the display result is a "big hit" is executed, and thereafter, the display result is shown ( (FIG. 10 (B)-(D)). Instead of such a determined effect, at a predetermined timing before deriving the display result, an operation effect prompting the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and when a predetermined operation is detected during the operation valid period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the winning or losing of the battle effect or temporarily stopping the display result. By doing so, the display result is shown according to the operation of the player, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, and the interest can be improved.

  FIGS. 17 and 18 are diagrams illustrating an example of a super-reach effect operation in a modification in which an operation effect is executed and a display result is displayed according to the operation. As shown in FIG. 17A, after the image display device 5 has reached the reach mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 17B, a character 31AK041 as a friend character and a character 31AK042 as an enemy character are displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 17 (C) to (F) and FIGS. 18 (G) to (I), a reach effect in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 confront each other is executed.

  With the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 17C, a small button image 31AK043 and a regulation line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5. Thereby, an operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, but it is suggested that the reception of the operation is currently restricted.

  In this modified example, a plurality of operation effect images indicating that an operation effect is to be executed are prepared. Then, the jackpot reliability differs depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. In addition, an image indicating that the operation effect is executed during the reach effect may change to a mode having higher reliability.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 17D, a praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 17E, the praying character 31AK045 changes to a happy character 31AK046, and the small button image 31AK043 becomes the large button image 31AK047. Changes to

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 18 (H), a cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 18 (I), an effect 31AK049 in which a bullet is fired from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and a bullet hits the large button image 31AK047. The effect 31AK050 to be displayed is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to the stick image 31AK051.

  As described above, in this modified example, when the operation effect image changes, the effect effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. The operation effect image may change without accompanying the effect effect. Further, there may be a case where the operation effect image does not change even though the effect effect is executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may vary depending on the type of the effect effect.

  Thereafter, a predetermined time before the display result is derived, the regulation line 31AK044 is erased as shown in FIG. 18J, and the stick image 31AK051 is enlarged and displayed in the center as shown in FIG. 18K. Is displayed to prompt the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A. At this time, the operation on the stick controller 31A is an effective operation valid period.

  Here, when the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, an image 31AK052 indicating that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 18 (L). Then, at the timing when the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. 18 (M), a fixed decoration symbol which is a big hit combination is derived. If no operation is detected within the predetermined operation validity period, the image shown in FIG. 18L is automatically displayed.

  In this modified example, there are a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image as operation effect images, and an operation effect using these images is performed in the order of small button image <large button image <stick image. The jackpot reliability is high. Even when an operation effect image with low reliability is displayed, the operation effect image may change to a reliable operation effect image during the reach effect, so that the effect of the effect is improved and the player's sense of expectation is improved. Can be maintained.

  Note that, in the effect operation example shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the notification of the title of the reach and the indication of the degree of expectation are omitted, but as appropriate, in parallel with the reach effect and the operation effect shown in FIGS. 17 and 18. It may be executed. The determination regarding the operation effect and the operation effect image (whether or not there is an operation effect, the operation effect image to be displayed, whether or not there is an effect effect, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS004 in FIG.

(Modification 2 of characteristic portion 31AK)
A suggestion indicating the degree of expectation of control to an advantageous state such as a big hit game state may be displayed. For example, a shutter effect for performing the first suggestion display and a reach title effect for performing the second suggestion display may be executed. In the shutter effect, an effect of covering the screen with a shutter display after the start of the variable display is executed. In the reach title effect, after the reach, an effect of displaying a reach title indicating a development destination of the reach effect is executed. When displaying either the shutter display or the reach title display, a specific image may be included and displayed. The reach title effect may be the same as the title announcement of the above embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

  The specific image is an image with a high jackpot reliability displayed including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The plural types of elements include a banana image of the element E1, a melon image of the element E2, an apple image of the element E3, a watermelon image of the element E4, and a strawberry image of the element E5. The fruit pattern image including these elements E1 to E5 is a specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. The display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 constituting the specific image are changed and displayed according to the difference in display size between the shutter display and the reach title display. In addition, all the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in the shutter display and the reach title display, respectively.

  When the shutter effect is executed after the start of the variable display, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the big hit reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. In addition, when a reach title is displayed during execution of the reach effect, when a fruit pattern image is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image that does not include the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Note that an image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image indicating the jackpot reliability when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. For example, a white image <a blue image <a red image <a fruit pattern image may be prepared in the order of the jackpot reliability (for example, a red shutter or a red title reach title). Then, one of the image patterns may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit.

  When performing the shutter display and the reach title display, even when a fruit pattern is displayed, the speaker 8 outputs a notification of outputting a common sound (melody) and also notifies the game effect lamp 9 of light emission. The common sound and the emission control of the game effect lamp 9 indicate to the player that the fruit pattern is a special image. When such a shutter display and a reach title display are performed, common notification for the fruit pattern is executed. In the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. Note that the output period of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

  FIG. 19 is a display screen diagram when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 19A, when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed on the image display device 5 at the start of the variable display. On the shutter image 31AK061, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. In addition, when the shutter effect is performed, the notification that the common sound (melody) is output by the speaker 8 is performed and the notification by the emission of the game effect lamp 9 is performed. When the closed shutter is opened, as shown in FIG. 19B, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Downward arrows indicate variable display of left, middle, and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 19D, a super reach effect is started. The variable display is, for example, displayed small in the upper right of the screen, and a character is displayed on the left side of the screen. At the lower right of the screen, a reach title image 31AK062 is displayed, and the contents of the super reach to be executed are shown as reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, a fruit pattern image including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. In the reach title image 31AK062, the characters "Battle Reach" indicating that a reach effect accompanied by a battle effect is executed are displayed.

  In addition, when the reach title effect is executed, the notification that the common sound (melody) is output by the speaker 8 is executed and the notification by the emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. Further, after outputting the common sound, an effect is executed in which the character emits a specific sound (voice) indicating that the hit reliability is high, such as "hot hot". Here, in the reach title effect, the size of the suggestion display to be displayed is smaller than in the shutter effect. However, as described above, in the reach title effect, by outputting the specific sound, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the fruit pattern image is displayed. Although the case where the common sound and the specific sound have completely separated output periods has been described, the output periods may partially overlap.

  Thereafter, a battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 19 (e) is executed. An enemy character is displayed on the left side of the screen, and an ally character is displayed on the right side of the screen. When the ally character wins the battle with the enemy character, the character "BATTLE WIN!" Is displayed at the upper left of the screen. It is announced that the jackpot has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle effect ends, the display returns to the variable display screen using the original numeric symbols. As shown in FIG. 19 (f), all the symbols are stopped and the big hit symbol of “777” is displayed.

  As shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D, both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 are displayed including all the elements E1 to E5 constituting the fruit pattern image. In this way, the fruit pattern image can be suitably displayed in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 having different display sizes. Thereby, it is possible to accurately convey that the fruit pattern image with a high jackpot reliability is displayed.

  The display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 19A is larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 19D. Therefore, the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 can be noticed.

  The shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 19A and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 19D are displayed at different timings. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the fruit pattern image, which is the specific image, from being difficult to see due to the overlapping of the execution timings.

  The determination regarding the shutter effect (the presence or absence of the shutter effect and the effect mode) may be executed in step 31AKS004 in FIG. In this case, the determination regarding the shutter effect may be performed based on the determination result of the display color of the title in step 31AKS002 in FIG. For example, when it is determined that the display color of the title is a fruit pattern, the shutter effect of the fruit pattern may be easily executed. Further, the determination regarding the reach title effect may be executed in step 31AKS004 in FIG. 15 together with the determination regarding the shutter effect.

(Additional note on the characteristic part 31AK)
(1) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player. A suggestion effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect) suggesting that the state is controlled, and a title notification means (for example, an effect) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestion effect. The control CPU 120), and the title notifying unit can notify a title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect (for example, FIGS. 9D and 9F). ).

  According to such a configuration, the effect can be enhanced.

  (2) In the gaming machine of (1), the suggestion effect execution means can execute a plurality of types of the suggestion effects, and at least a part of the effect within the predetermined period in the plurality of types of the suggestion effects. May be executed in a common mode (for example, FIG. 9C).

  According to such a configuration, it can be noticed which of the suggestion effects is executed, and the interest is improved.

  (3) In the gaming machine according to the above (1) or (2), at a plurality of execution timings during the execution of the suggested effect, a specific effect (for example, an advanced effect or a notice effect) indicating that the game is controlled to the advantageous state is performed. The specific effect may be executed, and the execution timing of the specific effect may not be provided during the predetermined period.

  According to such a configuration, the player's expectation can be maintained even after the title is announced.

  (4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3), the suggestion effect execution means includes at least a first suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of super reach A or a super reach B) as the suggestion effect. And a suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of Super Reach D or Super Reach E) can be executed. In the second suggestion effect, the title suggestion effect starts from the start of the second suggestion effect. May be notified.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute the notification of the title according to the suggestion effect, so that the effect of the effect is improved.

  (5) In the gaming machine according to (4), the ratio of controlling to the advantageous state is higher when the first suggestion effect is executed than when the second suggestion effect is executed. Is also good.

  According to such a configuration, the rendering effect is improved.

  (6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5), the suggestion effect execution unit may execute the suggestion effect in an effect mode related to a title reported in the predetermined period. You may.

  According to such a configuration, the rendering effect is improved.

  (7) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (6), a detecting means (for example, a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B) capable of detecting an operation of the player, and a specific display corresponding to the detecting means ( For example, it further includes a specific display execution unit (for example, effect control CPU 120) that performs a small button image 31AK043, a large button image 31AK047, and a stick image 31AK051. The specific display execution unit performs the first specific display as the specific display. (For example, a small button image 31AK043) and a second specific display (for example, a large button image 31AK047, a stick image 31AK051) which is more advantageous to the player than the first specific display, and can be detected by the detection means. In the non-effective period of the above, after displaying the first specific display, The first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, FIG. 17 (E), FIG. 18 (I)), and the operation effect using the changed second specific display in the valid period of the detection by the detecting means. May be executed (for example, FIGS. 18J and 18K).

  According to such a configuration, the rendering effect is improved.

  (8) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (7), a first suggestion display whose display size is the first size (FIG. 19) as a suggestion display indicating the degree of expectation of control to the advantageous state. A first size shutter image 31AK061 displayed at the time of the shutter effect shown in FIG. 19A and a second suggestion display whose display size is the second size (a second image displayed at the time of the reach title effect shown in FIG. 19D). A display means (for example, the image display device 5, the effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying the two-size reach title image 31AK062 or the like is further provided, and the display means includes a plurality of types of elements having different aspects (FIG. 19A). , (D), an element E1 (banana), an element E2 (melon), an element E3 (apple), an element E4 (watermelon), an element E5 (strawberry), and the like. Images (such as the fruit patterns shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D) can be displayed, and when displaying either the first suggestion display or the second suggestion display in a pattern including the specific image. , A plurality of types of elements are displayed so as to be included in both the first suggestion display and the second suggestion display (in any of the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D). May be displayed so as to include the elements E1 to E5).

  According to such a configuration, the specific image can be suitably displayed regardless of the display size of the suggestion display. Thereby, it is possible to accurately convey that the specific image is displayed.

(Explanation of the characteristic parts 64SH and 65SH)
Next, the characteristic portions 64SH and 65SH of the present embodiment will be described. The gaming machine having the characteristic portion 64SH is a gaming machine having a display means capable of performing a game and displaying an effect display relating to the game, wherein the detecting means for detecting the operation of the player and the detecting of the operation by the detecting means Effective display means for displaying an effective display indicating that the display is effective on the display means, and difficulty in visually recognizing performing at least part of the effect display including the effective display displayed by the effective display means. A first effect capable of performing a first effect for displaying a first effect display when an operation is detected by the detection device in a state where the effect device and a first effective display are displayed as the effective display; An operation is detected by the detection means in a state where the effect means and a second effective display indicating that an operation of selecting one option from a plurality of options is effective as the effective display are displayed. A second production means capable of performing a second production display for displaying a second production display capable of specifying the result of the selection in response to the detection of the operation, The first effective display is displayed, and when the first effect is performed by the first effect means, it is possible to perform an effect that is difficult to see, and the second effective display is displayed, and the second effect means is displayed. Is a gaming machine that does not perform an effect that is difficult to see when the second effect is performed.

  The gaming machine having the characteristic portion 65SH is a gaming machine that performs a game and includes a display unit capable of displaying an effect display related to the game. The detection unit detects the operation of the player, and the detection of the operation by the detection unit is performed. Effective display means for displaying an effective display indicating that the display is effective on the display means, and difficulty in visually recognizing performing at least part of the effect display including the effective display displayed by the effective display means. In the state where the effect means is displayed, the first effect means capable of performing a first effect when the operation is detected by the detection means in a state where the effective display is displayed, and the effective display is displayed. A second production means capable of performing a second production with an expected degree of an advantageous state larger than the first production when the operation is detected by the detection means in the state, The stage is capable of performing an effect that is difficult to see when the first effect is performed by the first effect means, and does not perform an effect that is difficult to see when the second effect is performed by the second effect means. Gaming machine.

  The feature portions 64SH and 65SH are characterized by the effect using the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. The operation of the player with respect to the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A as described above. The player's operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B. In the following description, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B may be collectively expressed as an operation unit.

  In the characteristic portions 64SH and 65SH, three types of effects are performed by the effect control CPU 120 as a reach effect using the operation unit. FIG. 20A is a diagram illustrating three types of effects. FIGS. 20-1 (A1) and (A2) are diagrams showing button effects. FIG. 20-1 (B1) and (B2) are diagrams showing the selection effect. 20-1 (C1) and (C2) are diagrams illustrating character appearance effects.

  The button effect is an effect in which when a button is pressed, a treasure box opens and a character string such as “Chance!” Is displayed. The selection effect is a story effect of the character selected by the stick controller 31A. The character appearance effect is an effect in which a character appears when a button is pressed, and FIG. 20C illustrates an aspect in which the character A appears as the character 064SH007. A character string displayed other than "Chance!" In the button effect and a character appearing other than character A in the character appearance effect will be described later, but the fixed effect indicating a big hit is a character appearance effect. Only provided. In the character appearance effect, the effect in which the character A shown in FIG. 20-1 (C2) appears is a determined effect. In the following description, the effect in which character A appears will be simply referred to as “character A effect”. In this manner, when the push sensor 35B detects an operation in the state where the validity display 64SH005 is displayed, it is possible to perform a character A effect in which the degree of expectation of an advantageous state is greater than the button effect.

  The operation performed by the player in the button effect and the character appearance effect is an operation of pressing the push button 31B. As described above, in the button effect and the character appearance effect, when the operation is detected by the push sensor 35B in a state where the effective display 64SH001 is displayed as the effective display, a corresponding effect of displaying a character string or a character is performed. Is a possible production.

  The selection effect is to select one character from three characters, and the operation performed by the player is an operation of tilting the stick controller 31A left and right. When the stick controller 31A is tilted to the left, the character on the left moves to the center. When the stick controller 31A is tilted to the right, the character on the right moves to the center, and the character at the center is selected. As described above, in the selection effect, the operation is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A in a state where the validity display 64SH003 indicating that the operation of selecting one option from the plurality of options is valid as the validity display is displayed. In this case, it is an effect of displaying a character capable of specifying the result of the selection in accordance with the detection of the motion.

  What is common to the three types of effects is an effect that is performed in two stages, the first stage is an effect that prompts the player to perform an action (hereinafter, also referred to as a “promoted effect”), and the second stage is detection. (Hereinafter, also referred to as “corresponding effect”). FIGS. 20-1 (A1), (B1), and (C1) are diagrams illustrating aspects in a promotion effect, and FIGS. 20-1 (A2), (B2), and (C2) illustrate aspects in a corresponding effect. FIG. In addition, a small symbol 64SH001 is displayed for both the promotion effect and the corresponding effect. The small symbol is identification information different from the special symbol and the decorative symbol (a plurality of types of reduced identification information capable of identifying each symbol).

  In the promotion effect, valid displays 64SH003 and 64SH005 indicating that the detection of the operation is valid are displayed on the image display device 5. The valid display 64SH003 in the selection effect indicates that the detection of the operation for the stick controller 31A is valid. The effective display 64SH005 in the button effect and the character appearance effect indicates that the operation detection for the push button 31B is effective.

  Each of the validity indications 64SH003 and 64SH005 in the present embodiment includes a detection target (the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B) and a detection validity period (a bar in the present embodiment). In the promotion effect in the button effect and the character appearance effect, the corresponding effect is performed immediately after the action is detected. In the selection effect, when the detection validity period expires, a corresponding effect is performed. That is, in the selected effect, the character in the center at the end of the detection period is selected, and a corresponding effect corresponding to the selected character is performed. In addition, in the button effect and the character appearance effect, when the detection valid period expires without pressing the push button 31B, the corresponding effect is performed as if the push button 31B was pressed at the time of expiration.

  In the present embodiment, an effect that is difficult to view is performed by the effect control CPU 120. The visual recognition effect is an effect that makes at least a part of the effect display including the effective display difficult to view, and the big hit expectation will be described later. This effect of difficulty in visual recognition is not performed in the character A effect and the selection effect. Also, an effect that is difficult to visually recognize is not performed on the small symbol 64SH001.

  FIG. 20B is a diagram illustrating an aspect of a presentation effect that is difficult to see. FIG. 20B also shows the character A effect in which the visual difficulty effect is not performed in the present embodiment, and the mode of the visual difficulty effect in the selection effect, in order to actually introduce the fact that the visual recognition is difficult. Further, in the below-described visual recognition difficulties, a spiral image processing is used as an example of image processing for making an image difficult to view.

  FIG. 20-2 (A1) is a diagram showing a mode of the effect of difficulty in visual recognition in FIG. 20-1 (A1). FIG. 20-2 (A2) is a diagram showing the mode of the visual difficulty production in FIG. 20-1 (A2). FIG. 20-2 (B1) is a diagram showing a mode of the effect of difficulty in visual recognition in FIG. 20-1 (B1). FIG. 20-2 (B2) is a diagram showing a mode of the visual difficulty production in FIG. 20-1 (B2). FIG. 20-2 (C1) is a diagram showing the mode of the effect of difficulty in visual recognition in FIG. 20-1 (C1). FIG. 20-2 (C2) is a diagram showing the aspect of the visual difficulty production in FIG. 20-1 (C2).

  As shown in FIG. 20B, it is not possible to recognize what is displayed in any of the modes. Therefore, if an effect that is difficult to see is performed in the promotion effect in the selection effect, the player does not know what he / she is selecting, and the interest is reduced. In addition, if an effect that is difficult to see in the character A effect is performed, the player cannot recognize a finalized effect that immediately enhances the interest of the player, so that the interest of the player is not improved. In other words, the effect of the character A effect makes it difficult to visually recognize the effect. Due to such circumstances, the character A effect and the selection effect are not subjected to the visually difficult effect.

  As described above, the effect control CPU 120 displays the validity display 64SH005, and can perform a visual difficulty when the button effect is performed. When the validity display 64SH003 is displayed and the selected effect is performed, the effect display 64SH005 is displayed. Does not perform difficult-to-visual effects. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can perform an effect that is difficult to see when a button effect is performed, and does not perform an effect that is difficult to see when a character A effect is performed.

  FIG. 20C is a diagram for explaining each effect. FIG. 20-3 (A) is a diagram showing reach types and effects. In Super Reach A, a selection effect is performed. In super reach B, a selection effect or a button effect is performed. In Super Reach C, a character appearance effect is performed. Although only three types of reach are shown in FIG. 20-3 (A), a notice effect may be executed in any of the reach. The announcement effect here refers to an announcement effect for announcing the jackpot reliability in the above-described variable display during execution, or a look-ahead announcement for announcing the reliability of the jackpot in the variable display before execution (variable display with execution suspended). There is a production. Examples of the pre-reading notice effect include an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode.

  FIG. 20B is a diagram illustrating a character string that appears in the button effect. There are three types of character strings that appear: “hot!”, “Great chance!”, And “chance!”. Among these character strings, “super heat!” Has the highest expectation of big hits, and “large chance!” Has a higher expectation of big hits than “super heat!”, Higher than “chance!”, And “chance!” Has the lowest expectation of big hits. In the button effect, the contents of the treasure box differ depending on the character string that appears.

  FIG. 20C is a diagram illustrating characters appearing in a character appearance effect. There are three types of characters that appear: “character A”, “character B”, and “character C”. Of these characters, "Character A" is a jackpot determined as described above, and "Character B" is not a jackpot determined, but the jackpot expectation is higher than "Character C" and "Character C" is The jackpot expectation is the lowest.

  Comparing the big hit expectation of the appearance character string in the button effect and the big hit expectation of the hard-to-view effect, the big-hit expectation of the hard-to-view effect is almost the same as “hot heat!”. Comparing the big hit expectation of the appearing character in the character appearance effect with the big hit expectation of the hard-to-view effect, the big hit expectation of the hard-to-view effect is lower than that of the character A and higher than that of the character B.

  FIG. 20D is a diagram illustrating an effect timing chart of each effect. The effect timing chart shows the timings of the difficult-to-view effect, the character appearance effect, the button effect, and the selection effect in the period from the start to the end of the change of the special symbol. In addition, for the character appearance effect, the button effect, and the selection effect, the detection validity period is indicated. Note that the button effect and the selection effect are expressed as one because the effect period and the detection validity period are the same.

  The period during which the effect of difficulty in visual recognition is performed is a period from the timing 64SHT2 to the timing 64SHT6. The period during which the button effect and the selection effect are performed is a period from the timing 64SHT1 to the timing 64SHT7. The detection effective period in the button effect and the selection effect is a period from the timing 64SHT1 to the timing 64SHT5. The period during which the character appearance effect is performed is a period from the timing 64SHT3 to the timing 64SHT6. The detection valid period in the character appearance effect is a period from timing 64SHT3 to timing 64SHT4. Note that the detection valid period and the promotion effect period do not always match. This is because, as described above, in the button effect and the character effect, the promotion effect ends when the push button 31B is pressed, and the corresponding effect is performed.

  The period in which the detection effective period in the button effect and the selected effect overlaps with the invisible effect is a period from the timing 64SHT2 to the timing 64SHT5. Therefore, the state in which it is difficult to visually recognize continues except for the period from timing 64SHT1 to 64SHT2. Even if it becomes difficult to visually recognize the button effect, the player may press the push button 31B. However, if it becomes difficult to visually recognize the selected effect, it is difficult for the player to select a character. Therefore, the corresponding effect is started without the player knowing which character has been selected.

  The period in which the corresponding effect period in the button effect and the invisibility effect are overlapped is a period from the timing when the push button 31B is pressed to the timing 64SHT6. On the other hand, the period in which the corresponding effect period in the selected effect and the invisible effect are overlapped is a period from timing 64SHT5 to timing 64SHT6. Therefore, the state in which it is difficult to visually recognize continues except for the period from the timing 64SHT6 to the timing 64SHT7.

  If it becomes difficult to visually recognize the button effect, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the character string, but can recognize the character string during the period from timing 64SHT6 to timing 64SHT7.

  If it becomes difficult to visually recognize the selected effect, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the character and to visually recognize the content of the effect. The corresponding effect can be visually recognized in the period from the timing 64SHT6 to the timing 64SHT7, but since the first story is unknown, the meaning of the story effect is lost and the interest is reduced.

  As described above, the visual effect that is difficult to visually recognize does not have a significant effect on the button effect, but has an effect that the selected effect itself is spoiled in the selective effect. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to perform a difficult-to-visual effect at the time of the selection effect, and to perform a difficult-to-visual effect at the time of the button appearance effect, thereby facilitating the action of the player. Prevents decline.

  Next, character appearance effects will be described. As shown in FIG. 20-3 (D), an effect that is difficult to see is performed during the entire period of the character appearance effect. In other words, the period during which the effect of making visual recognition difficult is performed is longer than the period during which the character appearance effect including the character A effect is performed. Therefore, since it is difficult for the player to recognize that the character appearance effect is being performed, the invisible visual effect has such an effect that the character appearance effect itself is spoiled. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the character A effect has a higher jackpot expectation degree than the hardly visible effect, the difficulty in visual recognition is not performed, and in the case of a character appearance effect other than the character A effect with a lower jackpot expectation degree than the hardly visible effect. Makes it possible to perform an effect that is difficult to see, thereby maintaining the balance between the effects and preventing a decrease in the interest of the player in the effect that prompts the player's movement.

  Next, a process of determining an effect according to the type of the reach will be described. FIG. 20D is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process performed in the variable display setting process illustrated in FIG. 7. This flowchart shows a process performed when the content of the variation pattern is the super reach A, B, and C, and a process with the content of the other variation pattern is omitted.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the content of the variation pattern is Super Reach A (64SHS101). When the content of the fluctuation pattern is Super Reach A (64SHS101: YES), the effect of Super Reach A is a selection effect, as shown in FIG. The selected effect is determined as the effect performed by the fluctuation (64SHS102), and the process ends.

  If the content of the fluctuation pattern is not Super Reach A (64SHS101: NO), the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to perform an effect that is difficult to view (64SH103). In the case of the super reach A at the time of the big hit, as shown in FIG. 20-5 (A), the effect control CPU 120 performs the visual difficulty production at a rate of 90%, and performs the visual difficulty production at a rate of 10%. Not performed. On the other hand, in the case of the super reach A at the time of losing, as shown in FIG. 20-5 (B), an effect of difficulty in visual recognition is performed at a rate of 30%, and an effect of difficulty in visual recognition is not performed at a rate of 70%. These determined ratios are stored in the ROM 121 as a table.

  The production control CPU 120 determines whether or not the visual recognition effect has been won (the visual recognition effect is performed) (64SH104). When the visual recognition difficulties are won (64SH104: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the content of the variation pattern is Super Reach B (64SHS105). When the content of the fluctuation pattern is Super Reach B (64SHS105: YES), as shown in FIG. 20-3 (A), the super Reach B effect is a selection effect or a button effect, and performs a visual recognition effect. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 determines the button effect as the effect to be performed with the fluctuation (64SHS106), and ends this processing.

  When the content of the variation pattern is not Super Reach B (64SHS105: NO), the content of the variation pattern is Super Reach C, and as shown in FIG. Since it is an appearance effect, the effect control CPU 120 determines a character appearance effect as an effect to be performed with the fluctuation and performs a character lottery (64SHS107).

  In the case of the character appearance effect at the time of the big hit, the effect control CPU 120 wins the character A at a rate of 10% and the character B at a rate of 60% as shown in FIG. 20-5 (C). Then, character C wins at a rate of 30%. On the other hand, in the case of a character appearance at the time of loss, as shown in FIG. 20-5 (C), character A wins at a rate of 0%, character B wins at a rate of 20%, and 80% Character C wins at the ratio of These determined ratios are stored in the ROM 121 as a table.

  The production control CPU 120 determines whether or not the character A is drawn by lot (64SH108). When the character A is selected by lottery (64SH108: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines not to perform the effect of making it difficult to visually recognize (64SHS109), and ends this processing. On the other hand, when the lottery other than the character A is selected (64SH108: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends this processing.

  In the case of the above-described 64SH104, when the effect of difficulty in visual recognition is not won (64SH104: NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the content of the variation pattern is the super reach B (64SHS110). When the content of the variation pattern is Super Reach B (64SHS110: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines a selected effect as an effect to be performed with the variation (64SHS111), and ends this processing.

  If the content of the variation pattern is not Super Reach B (64SHS110: NO), the content of the variation pattern is Super Reach C, and the effect of Super Reach C is the character as shown in FIG. Since it is an appearance effect, the effect control CPU 120 determines a character appearance effect as an effect to be performed with the fluctuation, performs a character lottery (64SHS112), and ends this processing.

  Next, a description will be given of outputting a common sound according to the mode of the effect regardless of whether or not the effect of making the visual recognition difficult is performed. As an example of the effect, a description will be given using a notice effect of a reach title (super reach A, B, C) of a notice effect (line notice, step-up, change of hold display mode, reach title, cut-in during reach). . Whether or not the notice effect is to be performed and the mode of the notice effect (the color and background of the character of the reach title) are determined by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process of step S171 in FIG. You. Specifically, instead of the announcement effect determination process of FIG. 15, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern is a variation pattern of super reachs A, B, and C. If an affirmative determination is made, , A process of determining the character color and background of the reach title in accordance with the degree of expectation. The effect control CPU 120 stores the result of the determination in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, so that a notice effect is performed in the effect processing during variable display.

  FIG. 20-6 is a diagram illustrating an output example of a sound according to a mode of a notice effect during a visual difficulty effect. FIG. 20-6 (A1) is a diagram showing a notice effect mode of Super Reach A. At this time, a sound of super reach A is output. FIG. 20-6 (A2) is a diagram showing a mode of the visual difficulty production in FIG. 20-6 (A1). Also at this time, a sound of super reach A is output. FIG. 20-6 (B1) is a diagram illustrating a notice effect mode of Super Reach B. At this time, a sound called super reach B is output. FIG. 20-6 (B2) is a diagram showing a mode of the visual recognition effect in FIG. 20-6 (B1). Also at this time, a sound of super reach B is output. FIG. 20-6 (C1) is a diagram illustrating a notice effect mode of Super Reach C. At this time, a sound called super reach C is output. FIG. 20-6 (C2) is a diagram showing a mode of the visual recognition effect in FIG. 20-6 (C1). Also at this time, a sound of super reach C is output.

  As shown in FIGS. 20-6 (A2), (B2), and (C2), when an effect that is difficult to see is performed, it is not possible to recognize what is displayed in any of the modes, and the three modes are in the same mode. Because they are visible, they cannot be distinguished. Therefore, when performing a notice effect during an effect of difficulty in visual recognition, a sound corresponding to the mode of the notice effect is output. In other words, in the present embodiment, regardless of whether or not a production with difficulty in visual recognition is performed, by outputting a common sound in accordance with the mode of the production, the player can perform the production of the production with difficulty even in the production with difficulty in visual recognition. Can be recognized and interest can be improved.

  In some cases, the effect may indicate the degree of expectation in the background. For example, it is assumed that a red background has a higher degree of expectation than a blue background, and that some pattern has a higher degree of expectation. Even when such a background is displayed, a sound may be prepared according to the aspect of each background, and the sound may be output irrespective of whether or not a visually difficult presentation effect is performed. For example, the red background may be an electronic sound such as “Pillon!”, The gold background may be “Kiran!”, And the pattern background may be “pyropyroline!”.

  In the above-mentioned announcement production, the announcement production of Super Reach A, B, C was explained, but all the announcements are drawn by lot, and the appearance ratio of the announcement and the announcement with a high jackpot reliability for each reach type The selection frequency may be different. Further, as described with reference to FIG. 15, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes for a part of or all display colors of the notice effect. Then, the jackpot reliability may be changed according to the timing at which the display color changes. Further, the big hit reliability may be changed according to the start timing of the notice effect.

  Next, a modified example will be described. FIGS. 20-7 (A) and (B) are diagrams showing modified examples of the effect timing chart.

  In the effect timing charts shown in FIGS. 20-7 (A) and (B), similarly to FIG. 20-3 (D), in the period from the start of the change of the special symbol to the end of the change, it is difficult to visually recognize the effect, the character appearance effect, The timings of the button effect and the selection effect are shown. In addition, for the character appearance effect, the button effect, and the selection effect, the detection validity period is indicated. The button effect and the selection effect are expressed as one because the effect period and the detection effective period are the same.

  In FIG. 20-7 (A), the period during which the effect of making the visual recognition difficult is performed is a period from timing 64SHT1 to timing 64SHT7. The period during which the button effect and the selection effect are performed is a period from the timing 64SHT2 to the timing 64SHT8. In the button effect and the selected effect, an effect that is difficult to visually recognize is performed in the entire detection effective period. In other words, the period during which the effect of making it difficult to view is performed is a period longer than the period during which the effective displays 64SH003 and 64SH005 are displayed. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the button effect and the selection effect are being performed, and the player cannot operate the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. Therefore, the corresponding effect is started while the player cannot do anything. As described above, in the button effect, if the detection valid period has expired without the push button 31B being pressed, the corresponding effect is performed as if the push button 31B was pressed at the time of expiration.

  The period in which the corresponding effect period in the button effect and the invisibility effect are overlapped is a period from the timing when the push button 31B is pressed to the timing 64SHT7. On the other hand, the period in which the corresponding effect period in the selected effect and the invisible effect are overlapped is a period from timing 64SHT5 to timing 64SHT7. Therefore, the state in which the visual recognition is difficult continues except for the period from the timing 64SHT7 to the timing 64SHT8.

  If it becomes difficult to visually recognize the button effect, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the character string, but can recognize the character string during the period from timing 64SHT7 to timing 64SHT8.

  If it becomes difficult to visually recognize the selected effect, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the character and to visually recognize the content of the effect. The corresponding effect can be visually recognized in the period from the timing 64SHT7 to the timing 64SHT8, but since the first story is unknown, the meaning of the story effect is lost and the interest is reduced.

  As described above, when an effect that is difficult to view is performed in the entire period of the detection effective period in the button effect and the selected effect, the player cannot recognize that the effect has started, and starts the corresponding effect without being able to do anything. Furthermore, in the case of FIG. 20-7 (A), the corresponding effect starts immediately at the timing 64SHT6 at which the effect of difficulty in visually recognizing ends, so that the player is confused. In the case of the button effect, similar to the case where the push button 31B is pressed, the character string is displayed suddenly, but there is not much effect, but in the case of the selected effect, the selected effect itself is spoiled. Affect. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to perform a difficult-to-visual effect in the case of a button effect and not to perform a difficult-to-view effect in the case of the selection effect, thereby reducing the interest of the player in the effect that prompts the action of the player. Has been prevented. By doing so, the interest can be improved without giving the player a misunderstanding.

  Next, character appearance effects will be described. As shown in FIG. 20-7 (A), an effect that is difficult to see is performed during the entire period of the character appearance effect. Therefore, since it is difficult for the player to recognize that the character appearance effect is being performed, the invisible visual effect has such an effect that the character appearance effect itself is spoiled. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the character A effect has a higher jackpot expectation degree than the hardly visible effect, the difficulty in visual recognition is not performed, and in the case of a character appearance effect other than the character A effect with a lower jackpot expectation degree than the hardly visible effect. Makes it possible to perform an effect that is difficult to see, thereby maintaining the balance between the effects and preventing a decrease in the interest of the player in the effect that prompts the player's movement.

  In FIG. 20-7 (B), the period during which the effect of making the visual recognition difficult is performed is a period from timing 64SHT4 to timing 64SHT6. The period in which the button effect and the selection effect are performed is a period from the timing 64SHT1 to the timing 64SHT6. During the detection effective period in the button effect and the selected effect, the effect that is difficult to see is not performed. Therefore, the player can perform an operation on the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B.

  The period in which the corresponding effect period in the button effect and the selection effect overlaps with the invisibly difficult effect is a period from timing 64SHT4 to timing 64SHT7. Therefore, an effect that is difficult to visually recognize is performed in the entire period of the corresponding effect period in the button effect and the selected effect. Therefore, in the case of the selection effect, the player may not know which character has been selected.

  If it is difficult to visually recognize the button effect, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the character string. However, in the case of the button effect, the corresponding effect starts when the push button 31B is pressed, so that the player can perform the timing 64SHT1. When the push button 31B is depressed in a period from to a timing slightly before the timing 64SHT4, the character string can be recognized.

  On the other hand, since the timing at which the corresponding effect is started in the selected effect is the timing 64SHT4, it is very stressful for the player to be unable to see the corresponding effect at all even though the player has selected the character with great effort. It is a collective development.

  As described above, even if an effect that is difficult to view is performed in all periods other than the detection validity period in the button effect, the player can check the character string, so there is no significant effect. On the other hand, if an effect that is difficult to view is performed in all periods other than the detection effective period in the selected effect, the corresponding effect cannot be seen at all, and the effect is such that the selected effect itself is spoiled. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to perform a difficult-to-visual effect at the time of the selection effect, and to perform a difficult-to-visual effect at the time of the button appearance effect, thereby facilitating the action of the player. Prevents decline.

  Next, character appearance effects will be described. The period during which the effective operation period and the difficult-to-view effect in the character appearance effect overlap is the period from timing 64SHT4 to timing 64SHT5. An effect that is difficult to see is not performed during the operation valid period in the character appearance effect. Therefore, the player can perform an operation on the push button 31B.

  In the case of a character appearance effect, the corresponding effect is started when the push button 31B is pressed, so that the character appearing can be recognized when the push button 31B is pressed during the operation effective period, but when the push button 31B is not pressed, Since the effect of difficulty in visual recognition starts at timing 64SHT4 immediately after the character appears at timing 64SHT3, the character may not be visually recognized. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the character A effect has a higher jackpot expectation degree than the hardly visible effect, the difficulty in visual recognition is not performed, and in the case of a character appearance effect other than the character A effect with a lower jackpot expectation degree than the hardly visible effect. Makes it possible to perform an effect that is difficult to see, thereby maintaining the balance between the effects and preventing a decrease in the interest of the player in the effect that prompts the player's movement.

  In the above-described embodiment, it has been described that the visual difficulty effect is not performed on the small symbol during the visual difficulty effect, but the game display information indicating the game-related information is displayed on the image display device 5. The game-related information includes, for example, a hold display, an active display, a fourth symbol, and a right-handed display in addition to the small symbol. FIG. 20-7 (C) is a diagram showing that a display effect that is difficult to see is not performed for the hold display and the right-handed display in addition to the small symbol.

  In FIG. 20-7 (C), in the image display device 5, small symbols 64SH001, hold display 64SH017, and right-handed display 64SH019 are displayed. Further, outside the image display device 5, six LEDs are provided. The special 1 reservation 64SH009 is two LEDs indicating the number of reservations in the special figure 1. The special 2 reservation 64SH009 is two LEDs indicating the number of reservations in the special figure 2. The special 1 fourth design 64SH013 is one LED indicating the fourth design of the special feature 1. The special 2 fourth design 64SH015 is one LED indicating the fourth design of the special map 2.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine may display the game-related information on the image display device 5 or on a display device other than the image display device 5 (such as an LED, a sub liquid crystal, or a dot). As described above, when the game-related information is displayed on another display device or is displayed on both the image display device 5 and the other display device, the image display device 5 performs an effect that is difficult to view. Is also good.

  The game-related information is displayed in various display methods depending on the gaming machine. For example, one in which all of the game-related information is displayed on the image display device 5, one in which only a part of the game-related information is displayed on another display device, and one in which all of the game-related information is displayed on the image display device 5 and other display devices What is displayed on both display devices, a portion of game-related information is displayed on both the image display device 5 and another display device, and a portion of game-related information is displayed on the image display device 5 and other display devices And a part of which is displayed on another display device. Regardless of the display method, a display effect that is difficult to see is not performed on the game-related information displayed only on the image display device 5.

  This is because the game-related information indicates information related to the game, and if it is difficult to view the information, the information related to the game may be difficult to view or may be misidentified. In this way, even during the production of difficult-to-view effects, the displayed game-related information is not made difficult to view, so that the interest can be improved without giving the player a misunderstanding.

  Next, a description will be given of the fact that an effect that is difficult to view may be performed for a pre-reading effect. Note that the look-ahead notice effect can be executed based on the hold information of the special figure game, etc., before starting the variable display for which the possibility of the variable display result being “big hit” is announced. It is a notice production. In particular, over the variable display of the decorative symbol that is executed multiple times in response to multiple special figure games, the look-ahead preview effect that continuously gives a preview of the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" is a continuous preview effect Also called.

  FIG. 20-8 is a diagram illustrating an example of a prefetch effect. FIG. 20-8 shows a hold display 64SH021 and a small symbol 64SH023. The look-ahead effect shown in FIG. 20-8 is an effect in which the fighter makes a missile attack on the hold display and changes the display mode of the hold display. And FIG.20-8 (A) shows the look-ahead effect in which the visual recognition effect is not performed, and FIG.20-8 (A) shows the look-ahead effect in which the visual recognition effect is not performed.

  Whether or not to perform such a prefetch notice effect is often determined at the time of the start winning corresponding to the hold display. In particular, in the continuous announcement effect described above, a scenario of a change mode of the hold display is often determined at the time of starting winning corresponding to the hold display. On the other hand, whether or not to perform the visual recognition difficulty determination is determined at the start of the variable display as shown in the flowchart of FIG. As described above, since the timing for determining whether or not to perform a production is different, it is not necessary to determine whether to perform the production independently of each other. Instead, an effect that is difficult to see may be performed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 20-8 (B), since an effect that is difficult to visually recognize is not performed on the hold display, the player can confirm that the display mode of the important hold display has changed in the look-ahead notice effect. That's why.

  In the above-described embodiment, the image processing for making it difficult to view is an image processing for deforming in a spiral shape, but is not limited to this. FIG. 20-9 is a diagram illustrating an example of an image obtained by performing another image processing for making it difficult to visually recognize the image. FIG. 20A is an example of an image that is difficult to view when an image is processed by applying a wave-shaped filter. FIG. 20-9 (B) is an example of an image that is difficult to view, in which the image has been processed by applying a fuzzy filter. FIG. 20C is an example of an image that is difficult to view, in which the image is horizontally inverted. FIG. 20D is an example of an image that is difficult to view when a process of inverting the image is performed. FIG. 20E is an example of an image that is difficult to view, in which the image is stretched with unevenness up and down. FIG. 20F is an example of an image that is difficult to view, in which the image is stretched with unevenness in the left and right directions.

  As described above, the following effects can be obtained by preparing a plurality of different image processes for making viewing difficult. First, a variety of difficult-to-view images can be provided to a player by image processing with different distortion methods, so that the interest of the player can be improved. In addition, by setting a degree of reliability for each image that is difficult to view, it is possible to make the player notice what kind of image that is difficult to view is displayed, so that the interest of the player can be improved. Furthermore, since image processing for making it difficult to view the image suitable for the image displayed in the effect can be appropriately selected, the degree of freedom in designing the effect can be increased.

  The rendering time may be changed for each of the visually recognizable images that are distorted differently. By changing the production time, so-called “reservation” is generated as the production becomes longer, so that the interest of the player can be improved. In addition, a player who has played several times can predict the length of the production time, so that the player's expectation can be appropriately increased.

  Depending on the type of effect such as a notice effect, a visually obstructive image with different distortion may be used, or depending on the type of effect such as a notice effect, the selection ratio of the obscure image with different distortion may be changed. By doing so, it is possible to set the degree of reliability for each image that is difficult to view, and it is also possible to provide a number of variations in the entire effect, such as a fixed effect that can be provided by a combination of the effect and the image that is difficult to view. Since the player pays attention to which combination the effect is produced, the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the above-described embodiment, an example was described in which an image other than the game-related information is set as an image that is difficult to view. For example, in the announcement effect shown in FIG. 20-6, a pattern that makes it difficult to see only the title such as “SP Reach A” and a pattern that makes the title and background difficult to see are provided. Set the degree higher. By doing so, the player can appropriately increase the expectation by confirming the two patterns.

  The degree of distortion may be made different in an image that is difficult to view with the same distortion. For example, the higher the distortion, the higher the reliability is set. By doing so, the player pays attention to the degree of distortion, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  Furthermore, you may make it cooperate with another effect element, such as a sound and vibration by the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. As an example of the sound, together with the display of the image that is difficult to view, the sound effect may be changed according to the manner of distortion, or the sound output in the effect may be changed. By doing so, for example, it is possible to make the reliability different depending on the combination of the image that is difficult to view and the change of the sound, and it is possible to effectively perform the visual and auditory effects of the player. Interest can be improved.

  As an example of the vibration by the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, the vibration may be generated or the trembling degree in the vibration may be changed together with the display of the image that is difficult to view. By doing so, it becomes possible to make the reliability different, for example, due to the change of the difficult-to-view image and the vibration, and it is possible to effectively perform the visual and tactile sensations of the player. Can be improved.

  Further, an image in which part or all of the image rotates or an image in which the entire image fluctuates may be used as the image that is difficult to view. Examples of the rotating image include an image rotating around a certain point on the image, and an image rotating three-dimensionally in the depth direction and in front of the gaming machine around a line segment in a predetermined direction on the image. Further, the image may be rotated or shaken in accordance with the effect contents such as the movement of the character displayed in the image.

  The image processing for making viewing difficult is not limited to image distortion and inversion shown in FIG. 20-9, but also image processing such as rotation, enlargement / reduction, color correction, and change in transmittance, and darkening the screen. Blackout, and whiteout to make the screen white. In addition to these, any image processing may be used as long as the processing makes the viewing difficult. Note that the “color correction” may be correction for changing the shade of a color, changing to a different color, or changing the color over time. Further, the “change in transmittance” means that, when an image is expressed by superimposing several layers, the transmittance of one of the layers is changed, and the depth value is changed more than the layer in which the transmittance is changed. This is to make it difficult to view an image of a large layer.

  The following two methods may be used as a method of expressing such an image that is difficult to view. The first method is a method in which effect display is made difficult to visually recognize by performing image processing on the effect display. In this method, an image that is difficult to view is displayed by performing at least one image processing shown in FIG. As described above, this method is a method of generating an image that is difficult to view by performing image processing at the time of displaying an effect, and displaying the generated image that is difficult to view. Therefore, since it is possible to perform a difficult-to-view effect by image processing even when any image is displayed, it is possible to perform a difficult-to-view effect according to the situation, thereby improving the interest of the player. Can be. Further, compared with the second method described below, there is no need to store moving images, so that the capacity of the storage device can be reduced.

  In the first method, image processing may be performed only on the effect display displayed on the layer that is difficult to view. For example, by preparing a layer for displaying the small design and the hold display, and a layer for performing the effect display on a layer having a depth value larger than the layer, and performing image processing only on the layer for performing the effect display, An effect that is difficult to see can be performed without making the design or the hold display difficult to see.

  The second method is a method in which a moving image indicating an effect display that is difficult to view is prepared in advance, and the moving image is displayed as a difficult-to-view effect. The second method can reduce the processing load by not performing the image processing in real time as compared with the first method. On the other hand, when displaying a video with an effect that is difficult to see, a display similar to the first image displayed in the video is performed to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable or guessing the content of the effect. Since images must be displayed, the timing for displaying moving images is limited.

  By preparing in advance a moving image having an image similar to the image displayed in the effect display as an image to be displayed first, various difficult-to-view effects can be performed, but the moving image is stored. The storage capacity of the storage device is reduced.

  What is difficult to view can be made difficult not only by image processing but also by providing an image display device 5 and a player that can shield the player. As an object that can be shielded, an effect such as an actor or the like (eg, a shutter), a light guide plate provided on the glass surface of the image display device 5, a transmissive liquid crystal, a versal lighter, or the like may be used to perform an effect that is difficult to see. Good.

Next, main effects obtained by the above-described embodiment will be described.
(1) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention performs a game and includes a display unit (eg, an image display device 5 or the like) capable of displaying an effect display related to the game (eg, a pachinko game). Machine 1 etc.), detecting means (for example, controller sensor unit 35A, push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting the player's movement, and an effective display (for example, indicating that the detection of the movement by the detecting means is effective) , Effective display means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) for displaying the effective display 64SH003, 64SH005, etc. on the display means, and effect display including the effective display displayed by the effective display means (for example, display in the promotion effect). And the like (eg, CPU 120 for effect control). In the state where the first valid display (for example, the valid display 64SH005 or the like) is displayed as the valid display, when an operation is detected by the detection means, the first effect display (for example, a treasure box and a character string) is displayed. (For example, effect control CPU 120, etc.) capable of performing a first effect (e.g., a corresponding effect in a button effect) for displaying a character, and an operation of selecting one option from a plurality of options as the effective display. When an operation is detected by the detection means in a state where a second validity display (for example, a validity display 64SH003 or the like) indicating that the operation is valid is selected according to the detection of the operation ( For example, a second effect (for example, a corresponding effect in the selected effect) that displays a second effect display capable of specifying the selection result (the selected character or the like) shown in FIG. ), And a second effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120 or the like) capable of performing the first effect display. Is performed, it is possible to perform a visual effect that is difficult to see (for example, when a positive determination is made in 64SH104 and 64SH105 in FIG. 20-4, a button effect and a visual effect that is difficult to see) are performed, and the second valid display is performed. Is displayed, and in the case where the second effect is performed by the second effect means, an effect that is difficult to view is not performed (for example, when a positive determination is made in 64SH101 of FIG. 20-4, or a negative determination is made in 64SH104, and a negative determination is made in 64SH110). If the determination is affirmative, the selection effect is performed, and the effect of difficulty in visual recognition is not performed.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the interest of the player from being reduced.

  (2) The gaming machine according to (1), wherein the second validity display is displayed during a period in which the effect of making visual recognition difficult is performed (for example, a period from timing 64SHT1 to timing 64SHT7 in FIG. 20-7). (For example, a period from the timing 64SHT2 to the timing 64SHT5).

  According to such a configuration, the interest can be improved without giving a misunderstanding to the player.

  (3) The gaming machine according to (1) or (2), wherein game-related information indicating information related to the game (for example, small design, hold display, active display, fourth design, right-hand display, etc.) is displayed. A possible game-related information display means (for example, effect control CPU 120, etc.) is provided, and the difficult-to-visual effect means visually recognizes the game-related information displayed by the game-related information display means even during a difficult-to-visual effect. It is not difficult (for example, FIG. 20-7 (C)).

  According to such a configuration, the interest can be improved without giving the player a misunderstanding.

  (4) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3), which can perform a notice effect (for example, a notice effect of super reach A, B, and C in FIG. 20-6). When a notice effect is provided during the difficult-to-view effect by the difficult-to-view effect means, the notice effect means includes, for example, a sound (for example, CPU 120 for effect control). , Super reach A, B, C, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, the player can recognize the mode of the notice effect even during the effect of making the visual recognition difficult, and can improve the interest.

  (5) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4), wherein the visual difficulty presentation unit performs image processing on the production display to make the production display difficult to view.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform an effect that is difficult to see in accordance with the state of the effect display, and it is possible to improve interest.

  (5) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4), wherein the invisibly difficult presentation means prepares in advance a moving image indicating an effect display that is difficult to view, and sets the moving image as an invisibly difficult presentation. Display a movie (for example).

  According to such a configuration, according to such a configuration, the processing load can be suppressed as compared with the case where image processing is performed on the effect display.

(Example of application to slot machine)
The slot machine is generally provided with a display device, buttons for effects, and a cross key, and the button effects, character appearance effects, and selection effects shown in FIG. 20A are also common. In the screen shown in FIG. 20A, a small symbol is not displayed in the case of a slot machine. In addition, the slot machine can also perform an effect that is difficult to see. Therefore, the present embodiment is applicable to a slot machine. The configuration applied to the slot machine is as follows.

  A gaming machine (slot machine) provided with display means (for example, a display device of a slot machine, etc.) capable of playing a game and displaying an effect display related to the game, and detecting means (sub-slot of the slot machine) A button sensor provided on the substrate, a cross key sensor, and the like) and an effective display (for example, an effective display 64SH003, 64SH005, etc. on a screen excluding small symbols) indicating that the detection of the operation by the detection means is effective. At least a part of the effective display means (for example, a sub CPU of a slot machine) displayed on the display means and at least a part of the effect display (for example, the display in the promotion effect) including the effective display displayed by the effective display means are visually recognized. A difficult-to-visual effect means (for example, a sub-CPU of a slot machine, etc.) for performing a difficult-to-visual effect, and the effective display Then, in a state where the first validity display (for example, the validity display 64SH005 or the like) is displayed, when an operation is detected by the detection means, the first effect display (for example, a treasure chest and a character string) is displayed. A first effect means (for example, a sub CPU of a slot machine) capable of performing a first effect (for example, a corresponding effect in a button effect), and an operation of selecting one option from a plurality of options as the effective display When an operation is detected by the detection means in a state where a second validity display (for example, a validity display 64SH003 or the like) indicating that the operation is valid is selected according to the detection of the operation ( For example, a second effect (for example, a pair in the selected effect) that displays a second effect display capable of specifying the selection result (for example, the selected character) shown in FIG. (A sub-CPU or the like of a slot machine), and the first visual display is displayed on the difficult-to-view effect unit. When one effect is performed, it is possible to perform an effect that is difficult to see (for example, when a positive determination is made in 64SH104 and 64SH105 in FIG. 20-4, a button effect and an effect that is difficult to see) are performed. An effective display is displayed, and in the case where the second effect is performed by the second effect means, the effect that is difficult to view is not performed (for example, when a positive determination is made in 64SH101 of FIG. 20-4 or a negative determination is made in 64SH104, If the affirmative determination is made in 64SH110, the selection effect is performed, and the effect of difficulty in visual recognition is not performed.

(Description about the characteristic portion 64SH and the characteristic portion 31AK)
Next, the characteristic portion 64SH and the characteristic portion 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. A gaming machine having both the characteristic portion 64SH and the characteristic portion 31AK is provided with display means (for example, the image display device 5 or the like) capable of performing a game and displaying an effect display related to the game, and has an advantageous state (big hit game) advantageous to the player. State, etc.) (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.)
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 or the like) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect or the like) indicating that the condition is controlled to the advantageous state;
Title notifying means capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggested effect (for example, effect control CPU 120 or the like);
Detecting means (for example, a controller sensor unit 35A, a push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting a player's movement;
Valid display means (for example, effect control CPU 120, etc.) for displaying on the display means a valid display (for example, valid display 64SH003, 64SH005, etc.) indicating that the detection of the operation by the detection means is valid;
Difficult-to-visual effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120, etc.) for performing a difficult-to-visual effect that makes at least a part of an effect display (for example, a display in a promotion effect) including the effective display displayed by the effective display means difficult to visually recognize. When,
When an operation is detected by the detection means in a state where a first validity display (for example, a validity display 64SH005 or the like) is displayed as the validity display, a first effect display (for example, a treasure chest and a character string) is displayed. A first effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120 or the like) capable of performing a first effect to be displayed (for example, a corresponding effect in a button effect);
The operation is detected by the detection unit in a state where a second valid display (for example, a valid display 64SH003 or the like) indicating that an operation of selecting one option from a plurality of options is valid as the valid display. In this case, a second effect display for displaying a second effect display capable of specifying a selection result (for example, a selection result (selected character) shown in FIG. 20-1 (B2)) in response to the detection of the motion A second effect means capable of performing an effect (for example, a corresponding effect in a selection effect) (for example, an effect control CPU 120 or the like);
With
The title notifying means can notify a title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 9 (D) or FIG. 9 (F)). Etc.)
The difficult-to-visual effect means displays the first effective display, and can perform a poor-visibility effect when the first effect is performed by the first effect means (for example, 64SH104 in FIG. 20-4). When the affirmative determination is made in 64SH105, a button effect and a visual difficulty effect are performed, etc.), the second effective display is displayed, and when the second effect is performed by the second performance means, the visual effect is not performed. (For example, when the affirmative determination is made at 64SH101 in FIG. 20-4, or when the negative determination is made at 64SH104 and the affirmative determination is made at 64SH110, the selection effect is performed, and the effect of difficulty in visual recognition is not performed.) Gaming machine.

(Description about the characteristic portion 65SH and the characteristic portion 31AK)
Next, the characteristic portion 65SH and the characteristic portion 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. A gaming machine having both the characteristic portion 64SH and the characteristic portion 31AK is provided with display means (for example, the image display device 5 or the like) capable of performing a game and displaying an effect display related to the game, and has an advantageous state (big hit game) advantageous to the player. State, etc.) (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.)
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 or the like) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect or the like) indicating that the condition is controlled to the advantageous state;
Title notifying means capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggested effect (for example, effect control CPU 120 or the like);
Detecting means (for example, a controller sensor unit 35A, a push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting a player's movement;
Valid display means (for example, effect control CPU 120, etc.) for displaying on the display means a valid display (for example, valid display 64SH003, 64SH005, etc.) indicating that the detection of the operation by the detection means is valid;
Difficult-to-visual effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120, etc.) for performing a difficult-to-visual effect that makes at least a part of an effect display (for example, a display in a promotion effect) including the effective display displayed by the effective display means difficult to visually recognize. When,
In the state where the valid display is displayed, when an operation is detected by the detecting unit, a first effect unit (for example, an effect display in a button effect) capable of performing a first effect (for example, an effect) The control CPU 120).
When an operation is detected by the detection unit in a state where the valid display is displayed, a second effect (for example, a character A effect or the like) in which the degree of expectation to be in an advantageous state is larger than the first effect is performed. Possible second rendering means (for example, rendering control CPU 120);
With
The title notifying means can notify a title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 9 (D) or FIG. 9 (F)). Etc.)
The difficult-to-visual effect means can perform a difficult-to-visual effect when the first effect is performed by the first effect means (for example, when a positive determination is made in 64SH104 and 64SH105 in FIG. In the case where the second effect is performed by the second effect means, the effect that is difficult to visually recognize is not performed (for example, an affirmative determination is made in 64SH104 of FIG. 20-4 and an affirmative determination is made in 64SH108). If it is done, a production that is difficult to see is not performed, etc.).

(Description of the characteristic portion 64SH and the characteristic portion 3)
Next, the characteristic portion 64SH and the characteristic portion 3 of the present embodiment will be described. The gaming machine having both the characteristic portion 64SH and the characteristic portion 3 is provided with a display means (for example, the image display device 5 or the like) capable of displaying an effect display relating to the game, and has an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) which is advantageous for the player. Gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
A suggestion effect execution means (eg, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (e.g., a reach effect) indicating that the control is performed in the advantageous state;
Title notifying means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggested effect,
Detecting means (for example, a controller sensor unit 35A, a push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting a player's movement;
Valid display means (for example, effect control CPU 120, etc.) for displaying on the display means a valid display (for example, valid display 64SH003, 64SH005, etc.) indicating that the detection of the operation by the detection means is valid;
Difficult-to-visual effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120, etc.) for performing a difficult-to-visual effect that makes at least a part of an effect display (for example, a display in a promotion effect) including the effective display displayed by the effective display means difficult to visually recognize. When,
When an operation is detected by the detection means in a state where a first validity display (for example, a validity display 64SH005 or the like) is displayed as the validity display, a first effect display (for example, a treasure chest and a character string) is displayed. A first effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120 or the like) capable of performing a first effect to be displayed (for example, a corresponding effect in a button effect);
The operation is detected by the detection unit in a state where a second valid display (for example, a valid display 64SH003 or the like) indicating that an operation of selecting one option from a plurality of options is valid as the valid display. In this case, a second effect display for displaying a second effect display capable of specifying a selection result (for example, a selection result (selected character) shown in FIG. 20-1 (B2)) in response to the detection of the motion A second effect means capable of performing an effect (for example, a corresponding effect in a selection effect) (for example, an effect control CPU 120 or the like);
With
The title notifying means can notify a title corresponding to the suggestion effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 9 (D) or FIG. 9 (F)). Title display),
The suggestion effect execution means executes at least a first suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of super reach A or super reach B) and a second suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of super reach D or super reach E) as the suggestion effect. Is possible,
In the second suggestion effect, the title notifying unit notifies the title corresponding to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. From the start of the reach production of the super reach D to display the title 31AK008 corresponding to the reach production)
The difficult-to-visual effect means displays the first effective display, and can perform a poor-visibility effect when the first effect is performed by the first effect means (for example, 64SH104 in FIG. 20-4). When the affirmative determination is made in 64SH105, a button effect and a visual difficulty effect are performed, etc.), the second effective display is displayed, and when the second effect is performed by the second performance means, the visual effect is not performed. (For example, when the affirmative determination is made at 64SH101 in FIG. 20-4, or when the negative determination is made at 64SH104 and the affirmative determination is made at 64SH110, the selection effect is performed, and the effect of difficulty in visual recognition is not performed.) Gaming machine.

(Description about the characteristic portion 65SH and the characteristic portion 3)
Next, the characteristic portion 65SH and the characteristic portion 3 of the present embodiment will be described. The gaming machine having both the characteristic portion 65SH and the characteristic portion 3 is provided with a display means (for example, the image display device 5 or the like) capable of displaying an effect display related to the game, and has an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) which is advantageous for the player. Gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
A suggestion effect execution means (eg, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (e.g., a reach effect) indicating that the control is performed in the advantageous state;
Title notifying means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggested effect,
Detecting means (for example, a controller sensor unit 35A, a push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting a player's movement;
Valid display means (for example, effect control CPU 120, etc.) for displaying on the display means a valid display (for example, valid display 64SH003, 64SH005, etc.) indicating that the detection of the operation by the detection means is valid;
Difficult-to-visual effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120, etc.) for performing a difficult-to-visual effect that makes at least a part of an effect display (for example, a display in a promotion effect) including the effective display displayed by the effective display means difficult to visually recognize. When,
In the state where the valid display is displayed, when an operation is detected by the detecting unit, a first effect unit (for example, an effect display in a button effect) capable of performing a first effect (for example, an effect) The control CPU 120).
When an operation is detected by the detection unit in a state where the valid display is displayed, a second effect (for example, a character A effect or the like) in which the degree of expectation to be in an advantageous state is larger than the first effect is performed. Possible second rendering means (for example, rendering control CPU 120);
With
The title notifying means can notify a title corresponding to the suggestion effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 9 (D) or FIG. 9 (F)). Title display),
The suggestion effect execution means executes at least a first suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of super reach A or super reach B) and a second suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of super reach D or super reach E) as the suggestion effect. Is possible,
In the second suggestion effect, the title notifying unit notifies the title corresponding to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. From the start of the reach production of the super reach D to display the title 31AK008 corresponding to the reach production)
The difficult-to-visual effect means can perform a difficult-to-visual effect when the first effect is performed by the first effect means (for example, when a positive determination is made in 64SH104 and 64SH105 in FIG. In the case where the second effect is performed by the second effect means, the effect that is difficult to visually recognize is not performed (for example, an affirmative determination is made in 64SH104 of FIG. 20-4 and an affirmative determination is made in 64SH108). If it is done, a production that is difficult to see is not performed, etc.).

(Explanation about the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment)
Next, the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment will be described. In addition, the front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 3 of the present embodiment is the same as the above-described characteristic portion 31AK, and thus the description is omitted. As shown in FIGS. 21A and 21B, the main substrate 11 in the characteristic portion 3 of the present embodiment is housed in a substrate case 122SG201 configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. It is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state. In addition, the main board 11 has a lock switch 122SG051 for switching between a setting change state in which the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed and a setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be checked. And a setting changeover switch 122SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing a set value such as a jackpot winning probability (a payout rate) described later in the setting change state.

  The setting switch main body provided with an operation unit that can be operated by the player, such as the lock switch 122SG051 and the setting switch 122SG052, is housed in the board case 122SG201 together with the main board 11, and the lock switch 122SG051 and the setting switch 122SG052. Is exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear left portion of the substrate case 122SG201 so that operation is possible without opening the substrate case 122SG201.

  Since the board case 122SG201 having the lock switch 122SG051 and the setting changeover switch 122SG052 is provided on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate the gaming machine frame 3 in the closed state, and the predetermined door key is The operation can be performed by opening the gaming machine frame 3 using the game machine. Further, since the lock switch 122SG051 requires the operation of a setting key owned by a store clerk or the like at a game arcade, only a store clerk having the setting key can operate the lock switch 122SG051. The lock switch 122SG051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later and an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pressing operation) by using a setting key. In the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, the door key and the setting key are exemplified as separate keys, but these keys may be shared by one key.

  Since the main board 11 cannot be viewed in a state where the gaming machine frame 122SG003 is not opened, the front face when viewing the main board 11 is the back side of the gaming board 2 in a state where the gaming machine frame 122SG003 is opened. This is the front when viewing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

  The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, an audio control command used to control audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of the decoration LED and the like.

  FIG. 21-3 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the characteristic portion 3 in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is "0". Note that the command form shown in FIG. 21-3 (A) is an example, and another command form may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 21A, the command 8001H is a first change start command for designating a start of a change in a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating a variation start in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special figure game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern (variation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is arbitrarily set according to the instruction content of the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command for specifying a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 21-3 (B), a result of determining whether the variable display result is “losing”, “big hit”, or “small hit” (predetermined result) ), And different EXT data are set according to the result of determining which of the plurality of types is the big hit type when the fluctuation display result is “big hit” (big hit type determination result).

  In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 21-3 (B), the command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “losing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit A" and a big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result indicating that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “big hit B” and a big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C" and a big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “small hit”.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the stop (decision) of the decoration symbol in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set according to the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time reduction control is not performed (low base state, normal state), and the command 9501H is a game state (high base state) in which time reduction control is performed. , Time-saving state).

  The command 96XXH is an error (abnormal) designation command for specifying the occurrence of an error (abnormal) and the type of the generated error (abnormal) in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the error (abnormal) designation command, for example, the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormal) is set, thereby specifying which error (abnormal) has been determined to have occurred on the production control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by an error notification process described later.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fan fare command”) for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a special winning opening opening notification command for notifying that the special winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after the opening of the special winning opening that notifies that the special winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, for example, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the big hit type determined result by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big hit type decision result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during opening of the special winning opening or the notification command after opening the special winning opening, different EXT data is set in accordance with the number of rounds executed in the big hit game state or the small hit game state (for example, “1” to “15”). Is done.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A has been detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) has occurred. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that a game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B, and a starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred. This is a second starting port winning designation command for notifying that the second starting condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number so that the special figure reserved storage number can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number so that the special figure reserved storage number can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. The first reserved storage number notification command is, for example, when the first starting port winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball has passed (entered) the first starting winning port and the first starting condition has been satisfied. Are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second reserved storage number notification command is, for example, when the second starting port winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting winning port and the second starting condition has been satisfied. Are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In addition, the first reservation storage number notification command and the second reservation storage number notification command are used when the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of storage reservations decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of the execution.

  Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying an increase (or decrease) of the total reserved storage number may be used.

  The command D0XXH is a set value designation command for designating a newly set value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (restoration of power interruption, also called hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started up by clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (cold start). The command E103H is a setting value change start notification command for notifying that the operation of changing the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started (that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started in the setting changing state). The command E104H is a setting value change end notification command for notifying that the setting value change operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has ended. The command E105H is a setting value confirmation start notification command for wp notification that the operation of confirming the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started (the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started in a setting change state). The command E106H is a setting value confirmation end notification command for notifying that the setting value confirmation operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been completed.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 that stores a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a game control program to perform a control operation, and updates numerical data indicating a random value independently of the CPU 103. It comprises a random number circuit 104 for performing, an input / output port (I / O) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 to execute a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. At this time, a fixed data reading operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data in the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the same, and a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 temporarily stores various variable data in the RAM 102 Reading operation, CPU 103 receiving an input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and CPU 103 moving outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. And a transmission operation for outputting various signals.

  FIG. 21D is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 21-4, in the characteristic part 3 of this embodiment, on the main substrate 11 side, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the variation pattern Numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR3 for determination, the random number value MR4 for general-purpose display result determination, and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled to be countable. It should be noted that other random numbers may be used to enhance the gaming effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by the CPU 103 by software update using different random counters, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers.

  Although the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which each of the random numbers MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 21-4, the present invention is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  FIG. 21-5 shows a fluctuation pattern in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the fluctuation display result is “losing”, the fluctuation display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” and “reach” respectively. A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the display result is "big hit". In addition, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variation display result is “small hit”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is “losing” and the fluctuation display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” is referred to as a non-reach fluctuation pattern (also referred to as a “non-reach loss fluctuation pattern”). A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the display result is “losing” and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as a “reach loss variation pattern”). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “loss”. A fluctuation pattern corresponding to a case where the fluctuation display result is “big hit” is referred to as a big hit fluctuation pattern. A fluctuation pattern corresponding to a case where the fluctuation display result is “small hit” is referred to as a small hit fluctuation pattern.

  The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like normal reach, normal reach α, normal reach β,. A plurality of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. Also, in the super reach variation pattern, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach γ, in addition to super reach α and super reach β, may be provided.

  As shown in FIG. 21-5, regarding the special figure variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is performed in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, the super reach variation patterns of super reach α and super reach β It is set shorter than. Further, regarding the special figure variation time of the super-reach variation pattern in which the super-reach effect such as super-reach α and super-reach β in the present embodiment is executed, the variation pattern in which the super-reach effect of super-reach β is executed is The special figure fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is performed.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the super reach β, the super reach α, and the normal reach are set so that the fluctuation display result becomes “big hit” so that the big hit expectation degree becomes higher. In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of the big hit.

  In the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, as described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into non-reach types, normal reach types, super-reach types, and the like. Rather than determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type after the determination beforehand, only the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random number value for determining the First, the type of the variation pattern is determined from the random number for pattern type determination, and then the actual variation pattern belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type is determined. It may be determined variation pattern.

  Further, in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21-5, an example is shown in which the variation content (effect content) is determined in advance for each variation pattern. The present invention is not limited to this, and the variation contents (effect contents) may be different depending on the set value, even if the variation patterns are the same. For example, in the case of the variation pattern PA2-1 of the normal reach loss, when the set value is 1, the variation pattern becomes the normal reach loss, and when the set value is 2, the pseudo continuous effect is performed. When the set value is 3 as the variation pattern that is executed twice and the non-reach is lost, the pseudo continuous effect may be executed three times and the variation pattern becomes the super reach loss.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing the random number generation program.

  The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 21-6 and 21-7 prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. The ROM 101 also includes table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11 and a variation mode of each symbol in a variable display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. And a variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 21-6 (A), a display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. 21-6 (B), and FIG. -6 (C), a display result determination table (set value 3), a big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 21-7 (A), and a big hit type determination shown in FIG. 21-7 (B). In addition to the table (for the second special symbol), a large hit variation pattern determination table, a small hit variation pattern determination table, a loss variation pattern determination table, a general figure display result determination table (not shown), and a general figure variation pattern determination table (not shown) ) Etc. are included.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment is configured so that the winning probability (winning rate) of the big hit and the small hit changes according to the set value. Specifically, in a special symbol normal process of a special symbol process process to be described later, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) corresponding to a set value, a winning probability (winning rate) of a big hit and a small hit is changed. Has become. The set value has three stages of 1 to 3, 1 is the highest payout rate, and the payout rate decreases as the value increases in the order of 1, 2, and 3. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is the highest for the player, and as the value increases in the order of 2, 3, the advantage gradually decreases. In other words, the set value 1 is the smallest value, which is the most disadvantageous value to the game arcade side, and the larger the value becomes in the order of 2, 3, the more advantageous the game value side is.

  FIGS. 21-6 (A) to 21-6 (C) are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a set of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, a common display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, separate display result determination tables may be used for the first and second special maps.

  As shown in FIGS. 21-6 (A) to 21-6, in each of the display result determination tables, when the gaming state is the probable change state (high accuracy state), the normal state or the time saving state (low accuracy state) Are assigned to the special map display result of "big hit". Thereby, in the probable change state (high-precision state) in which the probable change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the normal state or the time-saving state (low-probability state) is set, the special map display result is set to the "big hit" to control the big hit gaming state. Then, the determined probability (in the characteristic part 3 of this embodiment, 1/99 when the set value is 1, 1/150 when the set value is 2, and 1/200 when the set value is 3) In comparison, the probability that it is determined that the special map display result is controlled to the big hit game state as the “big hit” is increased (in the characteristic portion 3 of the present embodiment, when the set value is 1, 1/50, and the set value is (1/99 for 2 and 1/150 for 3). That is, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probable state (high accuracy state), the probability that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is determined to be controlled to the big hit gaming state as compared with the normal state or the time saving state. Is determined, the determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control to the big hit gaming state.

  In each of the display result determination tables, the special figure display result is set to “small hit” depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state (low-probability state) or the probable change state (high-precision state). The determination values are assigned so that the probability of being determined to control the small hit game is the same (for example, 1/50 when the set value is 1, 1/99 when the set value is 2, 1/99, the set value Is 1/200 if is 3.)

  Further, as described above, in each gaming state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the special figure display result is set to “big hit” or “small hit”, and the big hit gaming state or the small hit When the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a high probability of being determined to be controlled to the gaming state, and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the special map display result is set to "big hit" or "small hit". The judgment value is assigned so that the probability of being determined when the state is controlled is low (big hit probability and small hit probability: setting value 1> setting value 2> setting value 3).

  That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and determines that the value of MR1 corresponds to the big hit shown in FIGS. 21-6 (A) to 21-6 (C). If one of the hit determination values matches, the special symbol is determined to be a big hit (big hit A to big hit C). When MR1 matches one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. 21-6 (A) to 21-6 (C), it is determined that the special symbol is set to the small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is determined with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 21-6 (A) to 21-6 (C) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit and the probability (ratio) of a small hit. To determine whether or not to make a big hit means to determine whether or not to control to the big hit gaming state, but to stop the symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. It is also to decide whether to make a big hit symbol. Determining whether or not to make a small hit means to determine whether or not to control the small hitting game state. However, the stop in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is performed. That is, it is determined whether or not the symbol is a small hit symbol.

  Note that, in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, in each display result determination table shown in FIGS. 21-6 (A) to 21-6 (C), a mode in which the winning probability per small hit differs is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning probability per small hit is the same regardless of which display result determination table is used (regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1). It may be.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 3 of the present embodiment, the CPU 103 determines whether to make a big hit or a small hit using the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 21-6 (A) to 21-6 (C). However, a big hit determination table and a small hit determination table are separately provided for each set value, and it is individually determined whether or not the fluctuation display result is a big hit or a small hit. Is also good. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 21-6 (A) to 21-6 (C), a judgment value is assigned to each small hit in each display result judgment table, but as shown in FIG. 21-6 (C). In the display result determination table (display result determination table referred to when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3), the determination value may not be assigned to the small hit. That is, the fact that the ratio of the small hit probability differs depending on the set value includes that the small hit probability is 0%.

  In the present embodiment, a total of three setting values 1 to 3 are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be two or four or more.

  FIGS. 21-7 (A) and 21-7 (B) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. It is. Among these, FIG. 21-7 (A) determines the big hit type by using the hold memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening (that is, when the first special symbol change display is performed). It is a table in the case of doing. In addition, FIG. 21-7 (B) determines the big hit type by using the hold memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting winning opening (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). It is a case table.

  The big hit type determination table indicates that the big hit type is one of the big hit A to the big hit C based on the hit type determination random number (MR2) when the change display result is determined to be a big hit symbol. Is a table that is referred to in order to determine.

  Here, the big hit type in the characteristic portion 3 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the characteristic portion 3 of the present embodiment, as the big hit type, a big hit A (also referred to as a non-probable variable big hit) in which only the time saving control is executed after the big hit game state ends and the state shifts to the low-probability high base state, and the big hit game After the end, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed, and a big hit B or a big hit C (also referred to as a positive variable big hit) which shifts to the high-accuracy high-base state is set.

  The jackpot game state based on the "big hit A" is a normal open jackpot repeatedly executed five times (so-called five rounds) for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. The big hit game state by “B” is a normal open big hit that is repeatedly executed ten times (so-called ten rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. Further, the big hit game state by the "big hit C" is a normal open big hit that is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player.

  The time-saving control executed after the big hitting game state by the "big hit A" is executed by executing a special figure game a predetermined number of times (100 times in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment), or The game ends when the big hit game state is reached before the figure game is executed.

  On the other hand, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the big hit game state of the big hit B or the big hit C are continuously executed until the big hit occurs again after the big hit game state is ended. Therefore, when the jackpot that has recurred is the jackpot B or the jackpot C, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed again after the end of the jackpot gaming state, so that the jackpot gaming state is continuously performed without going through the normal state. , A so-called extended-villa state.

  In addition, in the characteristic part 3 of this embodiment, a mode in which three types of big hits A to big hit C are provided as big hit types is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. You may provide below kind, or four or more kinds.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 21-7 (A), in the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the set value is “1”, the determination value range of MR2 is 0 to 299. , 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 149 are assigned to jackpot B, and 150 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is “2”, in the range of 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 199 are assigned to the big hit B. , 200 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “3”, out of the determination value range 0 to 299 of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 249 are assigned to the big hit B. , 250 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C.

  As described above, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the first special symbol, the rate of determining the big hit A in which only the time saving control is executed after the big hit game is finished is the same, while the time saving control after the big hit game is finished. Among the big hits B and big hits C in which both the positive hit control and the positive change control are executed, the ratio for determining the big hit C decreases in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3. That is, when the fluctuation special figure is the first special symbol, the payout rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 Is 3 when the payout rate is the lowest.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 21-7 (B), in the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the set value is “1”, the determination value range of MR2 is 0 to 299. Among them, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C (the judgment value is not assigned to the big hit B). When the set value is “2”, out of the determination value range of MR2 0 to 299, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 149 are assigned to the big hit B. , 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “3”, out of the determination value range 0 to 299 of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 199 are assigned to the big hit B. , 200 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C.

  As described above, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the second special symbol, the rate of determining the big hit A in which only the time saving control is executed after the big hit game ends is the same, while the time saving control after the big hit game ends. Among the big hits B and big hits C in which both the positive hit control and the positive change control are executed, the ratio for determining the big hit C decreases in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3. That is, when the fluctuation special figure is the second special symbol, the payout rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 Is 3 when the payout rate is the lowest.

  In the characteristic portion 3 of the present embodiment, if the change special map is the second special map and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the big hit type is determined to be big hit B. In the case where the determination rate of the jackpot type is different depending on the set value, it means that one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination rate is 0%). Although it is included, even when the fluctuation special map is the second special map and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, a case where the big hit type is determined to be the big hit B may be provided. .

  As described above, in the characteristic portion 3 of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the big hit type when the variable display result is the big hit varies depending on the set value, so that the gaming interest can be improved. It has become.

  In the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, the big hit type is determined using the random number value MR2 for the big hit type determination. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The determination may be performed using MR1 which is a random value for determining the special figure display result.

  Also, in the characteristic portion 3 of the present embodiment, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is, the more advantageous to the player (the bigger hit probability and the smaller hit probability are increased, and the big hit C as the big hit type is determined. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be, the more advantageous the player is. .

  Further, in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, the big hit probability and the small hit probability change according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the gaming property itself does not change. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game characteristics may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability change state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called probability change loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the big hit probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball is set in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the big hit game. On the other hand, the game state after the end of the big hit game is controlled to be in a certain change state, while the ratio of the game balls passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the fluctuation special map (so-called V). If the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the big hit probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time saving control). Ball is specially variable A predetermined switch provided in the sphere device 7 may be a game of (so-called one two-kind mixed type) which controls the jackpot gaming state based on passing. Furthermore, although the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the same as 1 to 3, the gaming property is the same, but the big hit probability and the small hit probability are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be acquired during the big hit game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4).

  Further, when the game characteristics are changed according to the set value, the common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above-described example, when the set value is 1 or 4, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable prize ball device 7 is switched to the effect switch (every time the game ball passes the predetermined region, Used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect), and when the set value is 2 or 3, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (a game state is changed based on the fact that a game ball has passed the predetermined switch, It may be used as a switch for controlling to a big hit gaming state).

  The ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining a fluctuation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination. Is determined.

  Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, a variation pattern determination table for a big hit which is used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is “big hit”, and the variation display result is “small hit”. A variation pattern determination table for a big hit that is used when it is determined in advance, and a variation pattern determination table for a loss that is used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is “losed” is prepared in advance. ing.

  In the jackpot variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the variation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the variation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) On the other hand, a predetermined random number value within a range that the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take is assigned as a determination value.

  As shown in FIG. 21-9 (A) and FIG. 21-9 (B), the jackpot variation pattern determination table (the jackpot A ) And a jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C) used when the jackpot type is for jackpot B and jackpot C are prepared in advance. A) and the change pattern determination table for big hits (for big hit B and big hit C) include the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit, and the super reach β big hit For each variation pattern of the variation pattern (PB1-3), a predetermined value within a range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take A random value is assigned as a judgment value.

  As shown in FIG. 21-9 (A), in the change pattern determination table for big hits (for big hit A), when the set value is “1”, in the range 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, Up to 300 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, from 301 to 800 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot, and from 801 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β. It is assigned to the jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-3). When the set value is “2”, in the range of 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 0 to 350 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 351 to 825 are The fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot. When the set value is “3”, out of the range of 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 0 to 400 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 401 to 850 are The fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot is assigned, and 851 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3).

  As shown in FIG. 21-9 (B), in the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for the jackpot B and the jackpot C), when the set value is “1”, the determination value range of the MR3 is 0 to 997. , 0 to 100 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, 101 to 350 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot, and 351 to 997 are assigned to It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit. When the set value is “2”, in the range of 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 0 to 150 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 151 to 450 The fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit. Further, when the set value is “3”, in the range of 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 0 to 200 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 201 to 550 are assigned. The fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit.

  As described above, when the jackpot A is won in the special figure game, the rate of determining the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot is the rate of determining the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot. And lower in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3. Further, when the jackpot B or the jackpot C is won in the special map game, the rate of determining the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot determines the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the superreach α jackpot. It is higher than the ratio and lower in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, when the type of the big hit is “big hit B” or “big hit C”, the super reach β is easily determined, and the big hit type is “big hit A”. In this case, the super reach α is assigned so as to be easily determined, so that when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β is executed, the player may determine that “big hit B” or “big hit C” may be obtained. Expectations can be increased.

  In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for small hits, a predetermined random number value within a range that the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1) is the determination value. Assigned as. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 21C, even if the set value is any of “1”, “2”, and “3” in the small hit variation pattern determination table, MR3 Of the determination value range 0 to 997, 0 to 997 are assigned to the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). In addition, although only PC1-1 is provided as a small hit variation pattern in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as small hit variation patterns. With the setting values “1”, “2”, and “3”, the small hit variation pattern may be determined at a different rate from a plurality of variation patterns.

  Further, the loss variation pattern determination table includes a loss variation pattern determination table A that is used when the number of stored games is one or less in the low base state in which the game state is not subjected to the time saving control, and a low base. Loss variation pattern determination table B used when the total number of pending storages is 2 to 4 in the state, and variation for loss used when the total number of pending storages is 5 to 8 in the low base state A pattern determination table C and a loss variation pattern determination table D used when the game state is the high base state in which the time saving control is performed are prepared in advance.

  In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), the super reach A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in the range in which the random number value MR3 for determining a variation pattern can be taken for the variation pattern of β loss (PA2-3).

  As shown in FIG. 21-10 (A), when the set value is “1” in the variation pattern determination table for losing A (for one or less low base medium total pending storage), the determination value of MR3 is Of the range 0 to 997, the range from 0 to 350 is assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and the range from 351 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1). Up to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and up to 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, in the range of 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 0 to 400 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 401 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, in the range of 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 0 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3).

  Further, in the loss variation pattern determination table B, the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super-reach corresponding to the total number of stored storages of 2 to 4 are stored. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in a range where the random pattern value MR3 for determining a variation pattern can be taken for the variation pattern of α loss (PA2-2) and the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). ing.

  As shown in FIG. 21-10 (B), in the loss variation pattern determination table B (for 2 to 4 low-base medium total pending storages), when the set value is “1”, the determination value of MR3 Of the range 0 to 997, 0 to 400 are assigned to the variation pattern of non-reach loss (PA1-1), and 401 to 700 are assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, out of the determination value range 0 to 997 of MR3, 0 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, out of the determination value range of MR3 0 to 997, 0 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 501 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3).

  Further, in the loss variation pattern determination table C, the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super-reach corresponding to the total number of stored storages of 5 to 8 A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in a range where a random number value MR3 for determining a variation pattern can be taken for the variation pattern of α loss (PA2-2) and the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). ing.

  As shown in FIG. 21-10 (C), in the loss variation pattern determination table C (for five or more low base medium total pending storages), when the set value is “1”, the determination value of MR3 is Of the range 0 to 997, the range from 0 to 450 is assigned to the variation pattern of non-reach loss (PA1-1), and the range from 451 to 700 is assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1). Up to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and up to 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, out of the range of the determination value of MR3 0 to 997, 0 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 501 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, in the range of 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 0 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 551 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3).

  In addition, in the variation pattern determination table D for loss, the variation pattern of the shortened non-reach loss (PA1-4), the variation pattern of the normal reach loss (PA2-1), and the variation pattern of the super reach α loss corresponding to the time reduction control are shown. PA2-2) and a variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3), a predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in a range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take.

  As shown in FIG. 21-10 (D), in the loss variation pattern determination table D (for high-base medium use), when the set value is “1”, out of the determination value range of MR3 0 to 997, 0 to 450 are assigned to the variation pattern of non-reach loss (PA1-1), 451 to 700 are assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are assigned to super reach α. Loss variation patterns (PA2-2) are assigned, and 901 to 997 are assigned to super reach β loss variation patterns (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, out of the range of the determination value of MR3 0 to 997, 0 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 501 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, in the range of 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 0 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 551 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA 2-1). PA2-3).

  As described above, when the loss variation pattern determination tables A to D are used, the ratio of determining the non-reach variation pattern or the normal reach variation pattern is higher than that of determining the super reach variation pattern, and the set values 1, 2, and It becomes lower in the order of 3. Further, when using the variation pattern determination tables A to D for loss, the variation values of 701 to 900 among the determination values are the variation patterns of the super reach α loss, and the variation values of 901 to 997 are those of the super reach β loss regardless of the variation pattern determination table. If the fluctuation display result is lost, that is, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is determined by the common determination ratio regardless of the set value, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach It is possible to prevent the effect from being reduced due to the fact that the variable display is not executed.

  Note that the “common determination ratio” in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment means that the determination ratio is completely the same at different set values (this embodiment), and that the determination ratio is different at different set values. (E.g., the setting ratio of the super-reach variation pattern is different by about 1% between the set values 1 to 3).

  Note that, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is a loss, an example is described in which the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is the same regardless of the set value, but the present invention The present invention is not limited to this. If the fluctuation display result is a loss, the determination ratios of all fluctuation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value. Alternatively, only the determination ratio of the variation pattern of either non-reach or normal reach may be the same.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is a loss, both the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α loss and the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β loss, regardless of the set value. Exemplifies the same form regardless of the set value that is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. If the fluctuation display result is a loss, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α loss May be the same irrespective of the set value in which only one of the determination ratio of the change pattern and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach β loss is set.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is a loss, both the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α loss and the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β loss, regardless of the set value. Exemplifies a mode in which the set value is the same regardless of the set value that is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. Regardless of the set value, the change ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach jackpot may be the same regardless of the set value.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is a loss, a mode in which the determination ratio of the non-reach or normal reach fluctuation pattern is different according to the set setting value is illustrated, but it is set. Depending on the set value that is present, there may be one or more undetermined fluctuation patterns among the non-reach fluctuation patterns and the normal reach fluctuation patterns. That is, the fact that the determination ratio of the variation pattern differs depending on the set value that has been set means that one of the variation patterns is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%) or that the specific variation pattern is 100%. It also includes the determination of the percentage.

  The variation time of the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than that of the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and the variation of the non-reach loss is smaller than the variation pattern (PA1-2). The variation time of the pattern (PA1-3) is shorter (see FIG. 21-5). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach loss with a short fluctuation time is determined, and the reserved memories are easily digested, and the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit of four. When the start prize is sometimes given, the useless start prize in which the hold memory is not made is less likely to occur, and when the number of the hold memories is reduced, the fluctuation time of the non-reach loss without a long change time is reduced. By determining PA1-1), it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the fact that the variable display is not performed because the variable display time is lengthened.

  Also, in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 21-10 (A) to 21-10 (C), the variation is determined by using a loss variation pattern determination table which differs according to the total number of stored storages. Although the mode for determining the pattern is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of reserved storages in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, the first The variation pattern may be determined using a different loss pattern determination table depending on the number of stored special symbols and the variation display of the second special symbol (in the case of executing the variation display of the second special symbol).

  Further, in the variation pattern determination table for each loss of the characteristic portion 3 of the present embodiment, even if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any numerical value of 1 to 3, the variation pattern of the super reach loss The ranges of random numbers assigned to (PA2-2 and PA2-3) are the same. However, the jackpot probability and the losing probability are different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, the ratio in which the variable display is actually executed in the super-reach losing variation pattern (the super-reach losing variation pattern) (Appearance rate) differs according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that, in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the ratio at which the variable display is performed in the super reach loss fluctuation pattern differs according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, The present invention is not limited to this. Considering the jackpot probability and the loss probability for each set value, the fluctuation display is performed at the same rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the super reach loss. It may be executed in a variation pattern.

  The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 21A may be a backup RAM partially or entirely backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the content of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply becomes unable to supply power). You. In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like. In addition, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating a progress state of the game.

  In the RAM 102, a game control data holding area (not shown) is provided as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. The game control data holding area includes a first special figure reservation storage unit, a second special figure reservation storage unit, a general figure reservation storage unit, a game control flag setting unit, a game control timer setting unit, a game control counter, and the like. A setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit are provided.

  The first special map holding storage unit stores a special map which has not yet started, although a game ball has passed (entered) a first starting winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting winning (first starting winning) has been generated. The storage unit stores the pending data of the game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A). As an example, the first special map holding storage unit associates the winning order (the order in which game balls are detected) with the hold number in the first start winning port and establishes the first starting condition when the game ball passes (enters). The random number value MR1 for variation display result determination, the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 and the like by the CPU 103 based on The storage is performed until the storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). The hold data thus stored in the first special figure holding storage unit indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the fluctuation display result (the special figure display result) in this special figure game ) Is the hold information that enables determination as to whether or not a big hit will occur.

  The second special figure holding storage unit stores a special winning start (second starting winning) when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B but has not yet started. It stores the hold data of the figure game (a special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B). As an example, the second special map holding storage unit associates the winning order (the order in which game balls are detected) with the hold number in the second starting winning opening, and establishes the second starting condition when the game ball passes (enters). The random number value MR1 for variation display result determination, the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 and the like by the CPU 103 based on It is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). The hold data stored in the second special figure holding storage unit indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the fluctuation display result (the special figure display result) in this special figure game ) Is the hold information that enables determination as to whether or not a big hit will occur.

  In addition, the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening, and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in the common hold storage unit in association with the hold number. In this case, the opening information indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the holding information, and stored in association with the holding number. .

  The ordinary figure holding storage unit stores the information on the ordinary figure game that has not been started by the ordinary symbol display 20 yet, even though the game ball passing through the passing gate is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the general figure holding storage unit associates the game balls with the holding numbers in the order in which the game balls passed through the pass gate, and based on the passing of the game balls, the CPU 103 extracts the general figure display result determination from the random number circuit 104 and the like. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 and the like are stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”).

  The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores, for each of a plurality of types of flags, data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state.

  The game control timer setting section is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating a timer value for each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for counting a part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can be updated by software.

  In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, a random number value not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR4 is stored as a random count value. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random number value may be updated by performing a predetermined process such as a scramble process or an arithmetic process on all or a part of the numerical data.

  The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating a buffer value in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  Next, a game control main process in the characteristic portion 3 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 21-11 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (122SGSa001). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (122SGSa0022). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, and the like), setting of making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON (122SGSa003). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on while the clear switch is ON, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. If the clear switch is ON (122SGSa003; Y), the process proceeds to 122SGSa014. If the clear switch is OFF (122SGSa003; N), it is further determined whether or not backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (122SGSa004). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes a power supply stop processing immediately before the power supply is stopped due to the stop of the power supply. In the process at the time of power supply stop, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a process of protecting data in the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes a process of adding an error detection code (check sum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for progressing the game (including various flags, various timer states, and the like), but also the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is ON. When the backup flag is OFF and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa004; N),

  When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa004; Y), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed-up data (performed using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (122SGSa005). . In 122SGSa005, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped by using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (122SGSa005; N), the process proceeds to 122SGSa014.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (122SGSa005; Y), the CPU 103 sets an effect control board activation start waiting timer for waiting until the effect control board 12 is activated (122SGSa006). Then, the value of the effect control board activation start waiting timer is decremented by one (122SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the effect control board activation start waiting timer has expired (122SGSa008). If the effect control board activation start waiting timer has not expired (122SGSa008; N), 122SGSa007 is executed again, and waits until the effect control board 12 is activated. When the effect control board activation start waiting timer is out (122SGSa008; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON.

  When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa008; Y), a set value confirmation process for displaying the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 on the display monitor 122SG029 is executed, and the salesclerk of the game hall displays the set value. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set in a state where the user can confirm the set value by visually checking the monitor 122SG029 (setting change state) (122SGSa010). When the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF (122SGSa008; N) or after executing the set value confirmation process, the process proceeds to 122SGSa011.

  In 122SGSa011, the CPU 103 performs a recovery process for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time of stopping the power supply. In the recovery processing, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state is restored to the state when the power supply was stopped, and if the special symbol is being changed, the special symbol change is restarted from the state before the recovery by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

  Then, the CPU 103 determines that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has recovered (started by hot start) in a state before the power cut-off, transmits a command at the time of recovery including a hot start notification command to the effect control board 12, and proceeds to 122SGSa021. (122SGSa013).

  In 122SGSa014, the CPU 103 sets an effect control board activation start waiting timer for waiting until the effect control board 12 is activated. Then, the value of the effect control board activation start waiting timer is decremented by one (122SGSa015), and it is determined whether or not the effect control board activation start waiting timer has expired (122SGSa016). If the effect control board activation start waiting timer has not expired (122SGSa016; N), 122SGSa015 is executed again to stand by until the effect control board 12 is activated. When the effect control board activation start waiting timer is out (122SGSa016; Y), the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear processing (122SGSa017) for clearing the contents of the RAM 102, and then turns the lock switch 122SG051 ON. It is determined whether or not there is (122SGSa019).

  When the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF (122SGSa019; N), the CPU 103 determines that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started by a cold start, transmits a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12, and proceeds to 122SGSa021.

  Further, when the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa019; Y), the CPU 103 executes a setting change process (122SGSa020) for changing the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and proceeds to 122SGSa021.

  In 122SGSa021, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104. Then, a register of a CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically performed every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (122SGSa022), and an interrupt is permitted (122SGSa023). Thereafter, a loop process is started. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute a timer interrupt process.

  FIG. 21-12 is a flowchart illustrating the setting value confirmation processing executed by the CPU 103. In the setting value confirmation processing, the CPU 103 first transmits a setting value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa031), and is stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (see FIG. 21-13 (B)). The set value is displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa032). Then, it is determined whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa033). If the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa033; N), the CPU 103 waits until the lock switch 122SG051 is turned OFF by repeatedly executing 122SGSa033.

  When the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF (122SGSa051; N), the CPU 103 ends the display of the set value on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa034) and sends a set value confirmation end notification command to the effect control board 12. Then, the setting value confirmation processing is completed (122SGSa035).

  In the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, the state is the same as the case of starting by the normal hot start by ending the setting confirmation state (ending the setting value confirmation processing). The command transmitted to the effect control board 12 may be a hot start notification command.

  FIG. 21A is a flowchart illustrating the RAM clear processing executed by the CPU 103. In the RAM clear processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the data stored in the RAM 102 is normal (122SGSa041). If the data stored in the RAM 102 is normal (122SGSa041; N), it is further determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa042). If the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa042; Y), the CPU 103 specifies the second address from the top in the RAM 102 and proceeds to 122SGSa045 (122SGSa043).

  On the other hand, when there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 (122SGSa041; Y) or when the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa042; N), the start address in the RAM 102 is designated and the process proceeds to 122SGSa045 (122SGSa044).

  In 122SGSa045, the CPU 103 sets (stores) “00H” at the designated address. In particular, when there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 (122SGSa041; Y) or when there is no backup data (122SGSa042; N), "00H" is set to the address F000, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 automatically sets the set value. 1 is set. Then, it is determined whether or not the designated address is the last address (FXXX described later) of the RAM 102 (122SGSa046). If the specified address is not the last address of the RAM 102 (122SGSa046; N), the next address in the RAM 102 is specified and the process proceeds to 122SGSa045 (122SGSa047). If the specified address is the last address of the RAM 102 (122SGSa046). ; Y) ends the RAM clearing process.

  As shown in FIG. 21B, addresses (F000 to FXXX) are assigned to the respective storage areas in the RAM 102 in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment. Of these storage areas, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored in the head address (F000) of the RAM 102, and the second address (F001) from the head of the RAM 102 is described later. The temporary setting value is stored. Further, other addresses (F002, F003, etc.) include clear switch backup information that can specify whether or not the clear switch was ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 was started, as well as special figure storage and general figure storage. Game information including storage, values of various counters, various timers, various flags, and error information generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored.

  In other words, the RAM clear processing in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment means that when there is no abnormality in the RAM 102 and there is backup data, the addresses (F001 to FXXX) except the address (F000) storing the set value are stored. ) Stores “00H” in the RAM 102 to clear data other than the set value, but when there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 or when there is no backup data, “00H” is stored in all the addresses (F000 to FXXX) in the RAM 102. Is a process of clearing all the data including the set value by storing.

  In the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, the set value is stored in the first address F000 of the RAM 102, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the set value is stored in the last address of the RAM 102. Is also good. When the set value is stored in the last address of the RAM 102 as described above, when executing the RAM clear processing shown in FIG. 21A, the address immediately before the last address of the RAM 102 is used as a data clear address. , And "00H" may be stored sequentially from the address F000 to the address immediately before.

  Furthermore, in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state, an example of clearing data excluding the set value of the RAM 102 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state, only the game information stored at a predetermined address of the RAM 102 (address F003 in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment) is cleared. It may be.

  Further, in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, the form in which the clear switch backup information is stored in the RAM 102 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. A process of storing or reading clear switch backup information in the RAM 102 by storing it in a register of the microcomputer 100 (for example, any of an accumulator that is the center of operation, a flag register that stores the state of the accumulator, and a general-purpose register). May be omitted, and the processing load on the CPU 103 may be reduced. When the clear switch backup information is stored in the RAM 102, the degree of freedom of the register can be improved as compared with the case where the clear switch backup information is stored in the register of the game control microcomputer 100. It is possible to prevent other information (data) from being overwritten by the processing.

  FIG. 21-14 is a flowchart illustrating a setting change process executed by the CPU 103. In the setting change processing, the CPU 103 first transmits a setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa051). The set value change start notification command may be transmitted immediately before the start of the set value change process (at the timing when the lock switch 122SG051 is determined to be ON in 122SGSa018). Then, the setting value stored in the address F000 (see FIG. 21-13 (B)) in the RAM 102 is specified (122SGSa052), and the specified setting value is displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa053).

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting switch 122SG052 has been operated (122SGSa054). When the setting switch 122SG052 is operated (122SGSa054), the content of the address F001 in the RAM 102 is updated (122SGSa055). Specifically, when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is “1”, “2”, which is a setting value that is one step less favorable for the player than “1”, is set as a temporary setting value. When the setting value stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 and displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is “2”, the setting value “3”, which is one step less favorable for the player than “2”, is temporarily set. It is stored as a set value in the address F001 of the RAM 102. When the set value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "3", "1" may be stored as a temporary set value in the address F001 of the RAM 102.

  Then, the CPU 103 displays the set value (temporary set value) stored at the address F001 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa056), and determines whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa057). When the setting switch is not operated in 122SGSa054 (122SGSa054; N), the processing of 122SGSa057 is executed without executing the processing of 122SGSa055 and 122SGSa056.

  When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa057; Y), the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processing of 122SGSa054 to 122SGSa056 to store a new temporary setting value in the address F001 of the RAM 102, or stores it in the address F001. A process of displaying the set value on the display monitor 122SG029 is executed.

  When the lock switch is OFF in 122SGSa057 (122SGSa057; N), the CPU 103 stores the set value stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 in the address F000. That is, the CPU 103 stores the set value stored at the address F001 (the provisional set value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029) at the address F000, thereby changing the set value stored at the address F001 to the actual set value. (Change the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1). Then, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value designation command corresponding to the setting value stored in the address F000 of the RAM 102 and a setting value change end notification command to the effect control board 12, and ends the setting change process. (122SGSa059, 122SGSa060).

  In the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, the mode in which the setting value change end notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the setting change processing is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the setting value change end notification command may be transmitted to the effect control board 12 within the game control main process (immediately after the setting change process is ended).

  In the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by turning off the lock switch 122SG051 (the temporary set value stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102). Is stored in the address F000), but the present invention is not limited to this. The game ball can be placed in the starting winning opening, the clear switch can be operated, the lock switch 122SG051 can be pushed, and the like. By executing the operation described above, the lock switch 122SG051 may be turned off, so that a new set value may be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Also, in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a cold start or started in a setting change state, a cold start notification command or a setting value change start is issued to the effect control board 12. Although the form in which the RAM clear processing is executed before the notification command is transmitted is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be executed after transmitting the command or the setting value change start notification command.

  Further, in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the RAM clear processing is executed before the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and executes the RAM clearing process again after the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed (other than the set value stored in the address F000 of the RAM 102). May be cleared). By doing so, it is possible to prevent a problem such as starting a game with incorrect data stored in the RAM.

  Further, in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started after executing the common RAM clearing process (122SGSa017) between the case where the pachinko game machine 1 is started by the cold start and the case where the pachinko game machine 1 is started by the setting change state. Although a mode according to the state (a cold start notification command, a setting value change start notification command, or a setting value change end notification command) is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the present invention is not limited to this. However, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start and when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a setting change state, a command (a cold start notification command, a setting value change start notification command, a setting value change After transmitting the end notification command) to the effect control board 12, the common RAM clear processing is executed. It may be.

  Next, a game control timer interrupt process in the characteristic portion 3 of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 21-15, the CPU 103 first executes a power-off detection process (122SGS020) in a game control timer interrupt process, and then executes a process from a switch process (S21) to a command control process (S27). . As shown in FIGS. 21 to 16, in the power-off detection process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not there is a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage has dropped below a predetermined value from a power supply board (not shown). Is determined (122SGSa051). If there is no input of the power-off signal (122SGSa051; N), the process ends. If there is an input of the power-off signal (122SGSa051; Y), the backup data including the set values stored in the RAM 102 is specified. (122SGS053), the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 102 (122SGS053). Then, after creating check data to be used for restoring the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (122SGS054), the process proceeds to a loop process in which no processing is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off.

  Next, the effect control main processing in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 21-17 is a flowchart illustrating the effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120. In the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (122SGS401a), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the CTC (counter / timer) mounted on the effect control board 12. Circuit) register setting. Further, an initial operation control process is executed (122SGS401b). In the initial operation control processing, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32 such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation is executed.

  Further, effect control CPU 120 sets a command reception waiting timer corresponding to a command reception waiting period of a command transmitted from main board 11 (122SGS402). Then, the value of the command reception waiting timer is decremented by one (122SGS403), and it is determined whether or not the command reception waiting timer has expired (122SGS404). If the command reception waiting timer has expired (122SGS404; N), the processes of 122SGS403 and 122SGS404 are repeatedly executed, and the process waits until the command reception waiting timer expires.

  Then, when the command reception waiting timer has expired (122SGS404; Y), effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a hot start notification command has been received (122SGS405). When the hot start notification command is received (122SGS405; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restored from the power cut, the player information stored in the RAM 122 (the player information is input in the player information input process described later). After accepting the input of the information, the information (information including the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc.) stored in the RAM 122 is cleared, and the process proceeds to 122SGS417 (122SGS406).

  If no hot start notification command has been received (122SGS405; N), effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a cold notification command has been received (122SGS407). When the cold notification command is received (122SGS407; Y), the player information and the effect information stored in the RAM 122 (the number of fluctuations and the number of big hits stored in the RAM 122 since the previous start of the pachinko gaming machine 1) , Information including the number of times of super reach, etc.) (122SGS408), and that the information stored in the RAM 102 has been cleared, and that the player information and effect information stored in the RAM 122 have been cleared. A RAM clear notification process for notification (execution of RAM clear notification) is executed (122SGS409). In the RAM clear notification process, display of an image on the image display device 5, light emission of the game effect lamp 9, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the like are performed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. It is only necessary to be able to notify the clerk or the like of the amusement arcade that the player information and the effect information stored in the RAM 122 have been cleared. After the execution of the RAM clear notification process, the process proceeds to 122SGS417.

  If no cold start notification command has been received (122SGS407; N), effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a setting value change start notification command has been received (122SGS410). When the setting value change start notification command is received (122SGS410; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, a notification that the setting value changing operation is being performed (a notification that the setting value is being changed) is issued. ) Is executed (122SGS411). Note that the state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting change state generally means that the gaming machine frame 122SG003 is open and a clerk or the like of the game hall that changes the setting value uses the main board 11 Of the display monitor 122SG029 mounted on the camera. In other words, the setting change state is a state in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 cannot be visually recognized by a clerk or the like of the game hall that changes the setting value. It is considered from the display of the device 5 that it is impossible to determine whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state. Therefore, as the notification during the change of the setting value, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in a setting change state by the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 to the clerk of the game hall changing the setting value. You only have to report that you are.

  Further, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the set value change end notification command and the set value designation command have been received, that is, whether or not the set value of the set value has ended (122SGS412). When the setting value change end notification command and the setting value designation command are received (122SGS412), the setting value newly set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the received setting value designation command (the setting value stored in the address F000 of the RAM 102). The value is specified, and the specified setting value is updated and stored in the RAM 122 as setting value information (a value of “1” to “3” corresponding to the setting value) (122SG413). Then, after executing the above-described processing of 122SGS408 and 122SGS409, the process proceeds to 122SGS417. If at least one of the setting value change end notification command and the setting value designation command is not received (122SGS412; N), the processing of 122SGS411 and 122SGS412 is repeatedly executed.

  In the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, a mode in which the RAM 122 is cleared after the execution of the notification of the change of the set value is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The RAM 122 may be cleared in parallel. If the clearing of the RAM 122 is completed during the execution of the notification of the change of the set value, the RAM clear notification may be executed in parallel with the notification of the change of the set value. Notification may be performed.

  If the set value change start notifying command has not been received (122SGS410; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the set value checking start notifying command has been received, that is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting check state. It is determined whether or not it has been activated (122SGS414). If the setting value check start notification command has been received (122SGS414; Y), a setting value checking informing process for notifying that the setting is in the setting check state (the setting value can be checked from the display monitor 122SG029). Execute (122SGS415). In the notification process during the setting value confirmation, the display of an image on the image display device 5, the emission of the game effect lamp 9, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, etc. It suffices if the setting confirmation state can be reported around the pachinko gaming machine 1. If no effect of the setting value confirmation end notification command has been received (122SGS410; N), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to the process of 122SGS405, and issues a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a setting value change start notification command, It waits until any of the value confirmation start notification commands is received (repeatedly executes the processing of 122SGS405, 122SGS407, 122SGS410, and 122SGS414).

  As described above, in the effect control main processing in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21-18, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the hot start or the setting change state, the player information ( While clearing the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. after receiving the input of the player information from the RAM 122, the effect information (the number of fluctuations since the previous start of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the number of big hits, The super-reach count, etc.) and set value information (any numerical value of “1” to “3” corresponding to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1) are not cleared from the RAM 122. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the player information and the effect information are cleared from the RAM 122, but the set value information is not cleared from the RAM 122. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the player information and the effect information are not cleared from the RAM 122, while the setting value information is set to the setting value information already stored in the RAM 122. The data is overwritten (updated).

  That is, in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, information to be cleared from the RAM 122 differs depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start, a cold start, a setting confirmation state, or a setting change state.

  In the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the player information and the effect information are cleared, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state. Illustrates a form in which the player information and the production information are not cleared, but the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state, The player information and the effect information may be cleared.

  Returning to FIG. 21-17, in 122SGS417, the effect control CPU 120 specifies which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the set value change end notification command, and the set value confirmation end notification command has been received, and displays the image. The display of the initial symbol corresponding to the received command is started in the device 5. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 21-19, when the received command is a hot start notification command, a setting value confirmation end notification command, or a cold start notification command, that is, a new setting value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. If not set, the display of the decorative design is started on the image display device 5 as a combination of "1", "2", and "3" from the left as an initial design. When the received command is the setting value change end notification command, that is, when there is a possibility that a new setting value has been set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, "from the left as an initial symbol on the image display device 5". The display of the decorative symbol is started with the combination of "4", "5", and "6".

  In the characteristic section 3 of the present embodiment, when there is a possibility that a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, “4”, “5” from the left as initial symbols are displayed on the image display device 5. "," 6 ", the display of the decorative symbol is started, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a set value (for example," 1 ") that is advantageous for the player is When set, the decorative pattern is a combination of "4", "5", and "6" as the initial pattern at a higher rate than when the setting value (for example, "3") disadvantageous to the player is set. It may be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to suggest that a setting value that is advantageous to the player is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

  In the characteristic section 3 of the present embodiment, when there is a possibility that a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, “4”, “5” from the left as initial symbols are displayed on the image display device 5. "," 6 ", the display of the decorative symbol is started, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a set value (for example," 1 ") that is advantageous for the player is The initial symbol displayed on the image display device 5 may be different between the case where the setting is set and the case where the setting value disadvantageous to the player (for example, “3”) is set. In addition, when the setting value (for example, “1”) that is advantageous to the player is set, and when the setting value that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, “3”) is set, the speakers 8L and 8R output The volume of the output sound, the light amount of the game effect lamp 9, and the like may be varied.

  Returning to FIG. 21-17, the effect control CPU 120 sets “4” to the look-ahead restriction counter in order to regulate the execution of the prefetch notice effect in the first four fluctuations (122SGS418). Thereafter, effect control CPU 120 shifts to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (122SGS419). When a timer interrupt occurs, effect control CPU 120 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt processing. If the timer interrupt flag is set (turned on), the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (122SGS420) and executes the following processing.

  The effect control CPU 120 first executes a startup notification process for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started (122SGS421). In the startup notification process, for example, it is determined whether or not the interrupt is the first interrupt from the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1. If this is the first interrupt from the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is determined which of a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a setting value change end notification command, and a setting value confirmation end notification command has been received. A start notification process table corresponding to the received command is selected, and a start notification process timer corresponding to the received command is started. After the start-up notification process timer is started, the start-up notification process is executed in the next and subsequent interrupts to start the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the value of the start-up notification process timer and the start-up notification process table. The notification may be performed.

  In the feature section 3 of the present embodiment, the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started is a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a setting value change end notification command, or a setting value confirmation end notification command. The state of the start notification of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different depending on whether there is any.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 21-20, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, a hot start notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command is received, that is, a new pachinko gaming machine 1 When the set value is not set, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are executed. The timing at which the game effect lamp 9 starts emitting light for 60 seconds and the timing at which the output sound A from the speakers 8L and 8R start outputting for 30 seconds are the same. The output start timing of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

  When the cold start notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, that is, when a new set value is not set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the data in the RAM 102 is cleared. , The light emission of the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are executed. It should be noted that the light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds and the output start timing of output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are the same, but the light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds is The output start timing of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

  In other words, the specific control in the present invention means that when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start or a setting confirmation state, the effect control CPU 120 emits the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the speakers 8L and 8R for 30 seconds. The output of the output sound A is executed, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the CPU 120 for effect control controls the emission of the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the output sound for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R. Performing the output of B includes both.

  When the pachinko gaming machine 1 receives the set value change end notification command when it is activated, that is, when there is a possibility that a new setting value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming effect Light emission of the lamp 9 for 40 seconds, output of the output sound C from the speakers 8L and 8R for 20 seconds, and display of a message image for 40 seconds on the image display device 5 (for example, a message image indicating that the change of the set value has been completed) Execute Note that the light emission start timing of these gaming effect lamps 9 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C from the speakers 8L and 8R for 20 seconds, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 are the same. The emission start timing of the gaming effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C for 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 may be different.

  In particular, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, the setting value change end notification command is received. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, the hot start notification command or the cold start notification command is received. Differently, since the message image is displayed on the image display device 5, it is easy to recognize that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed.

  In other words, the special control in the present invention means that when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state, the effect control CPU 120 causes the gaming effect lamp 9 to emit light for 40 seconds and output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R for 20 seconds. C, and display of a message image on the image display device 5 for 40 seconds.

  As described above, the timing at which the game effect lamp 9 starts to emit light, the timing at which sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R starts, and the timing at which image display is started on the image display device 5 are the same. Regarding the notification mode when the machine 1 is started, the notification period when the hot start notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command is received (when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start) is 60 seconds, and the cold start notification command is issued. When the notification is received (when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up by a cold start), the notification period is 60 seconds, and when the set value change end notification command is received (when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up in a setting changed state). The period is 40 seconds.

  Note that, in the characteristic part 3 of the present embodiment, an example is described in which the start notification when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started is executed using the game effect lamp 9, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an external output terminal capable of outputting a signal to a management computer such as a management computer of a game arcade or a counter of each unit, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated. As a start notification at the time of the start, a signal that can specify that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started may be output from the external output terminal to the management device.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 3 of the present embodiment, a device that executes the start notification even when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in any of the hot start, the cold start, the setting change state, and the setting confirmation state is partially common. Although a certain form (in which light emission of the game effect lamp 9 and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are executed) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. A device that performs start notification differs depending on whether the device is started in a start, a cold start, a setting change state, or a setting confirmation state. (For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the image display device 5 To display a message image, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state, a signal is output to the management device from the above-described external output terminal, etc.) Unishi may be.

  Further, the notification mode of each device that executes the startup notification may be made different depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started in a hot start, a cold start, a setting change state, or a setting confirmation state. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, all the gaming effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are turned on, while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state. In this case, only some of the gaming effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may emit light.

  Furthermore, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, since the gaming machine frame 122SG003 is open, sound is output from only one of the speakers 8L and 8R (to the pachinko gaming machine 1). When three or more speakers are provided, sound is output from only some of the speakers.) When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the gaming machine frame 122SG003 is closed. Since there are many cases, sound output from all speakers 8L and 8R may be performed. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the image display device 5 displays a message image indicating that the setting is being changed, such as “setting is being changed,” while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold. When started at the start, a message image indicating that the RAM 102 or the RAM 122 has been cleared, such as “RAM cleared”, may be displayed on the image display device 5.

  Further, in the case where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a plurality of the above-mentioned external output terminals, a terminal for outputting a signal to the management device may be different according to each notification. For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the period until the change of the setting value is completed (the time until the setting value change end notification command or the setting value designation command is received) is used as the setting value change notification. During the period, a signal is output from the terminal corresponding to the setting change to the management device, and after the change of the set value is completed, a signal is output from the terminal corresponding to the error or the RAM clear to the management device as the RAM clear notification. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, it is only necessary to output a signal from the terminal corresponding to the error or the RAM clear to the management device as the RAM clear notification.

  When the external output terminal is used commonly for each notification, the timing of outputting a signal to the management device may be made different according to each notification.

  As described above, in the start-up notification process, a form in which the start-up notification mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different according to the received command is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 May be executed in one notification mode regardless of the received command. In addition, the start notification of the pachinko gaming machine 1 exemplifies a mode in which the start notification is performed even when any of a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a setting value confirmation end notification command, and a setting value change end notification command is received. The present invention is not limited to this. Among the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the set value confirmation end notification command, and the set value change end notification command, the pachinko gaming machine 1 A command that does not execute the start notification may be provided.

  Further, in the feature section 3 of the present embodiment, as an initialization effect in the present invention, a start notification in a different mode is executed in accordance with a command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, or the pachinko gaming machine 1 Is displayed on the image display device 5 in accordance with the command received when the is activated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. The mode of the start notification and the combination of the decorative symbols may be all different according to the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, or only a part of them may be the same.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 3 of the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by a hot start, activated by a cold start, activated in a setting change state, or activated in a setting confirmation state. Also, the present invention is not limited to this, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start or started in a setting confirmation state, the start notification is performed. May not be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 21-17, next, effect control CPU 120 executes a power-off detection process (122SGS422). In the power-off detection process, as shown in FIGS. 21 to 22, first, effect control CPU 120 receives a power-off signal from a power supply board (not shown) indicating that the power supply voltage has dropped to a predetermined value or less. It is determined whether or not (122SGS431). If there is no input of the power-off signal (122SGS431; N), the processing is terminated, and if there is an input of the power-off signal (122SGS431; Y), the setting value information and the player information stored in the RAM 122 are deleted. The backup data including the backup data is specified (122SGS432), and the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 122 (122SGS433). Then, after creating check data to be used for restoring the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (122SGS434), the processing shifts to a loop processing in which none of the processing is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off.

  Returning to FIG. 21-17, next, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the received effect control command, and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: 122SGS423). In this command analysis processing, effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command transmitted from main board 11 stored in the reception command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM 122. In the command analysis process, the effect control command stored in the buffer area is analyzed as to which command (see FIG. 21C).

  Next, effect control CPU 120 performs an effect control process (122SGS424). In the effect control process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from among the processes corresponding to the control state, and the display control of the image display device 5 is executed.

  Next, an effect random number update process (122SGS425) for updating the count value of a counter for generating an effect random number such as a jackpot symbol determination random number, a player information input process for accepting input of player information (122SGS426), A player information output process of outputting player information (122SGS427) and an effect information totaling process of totaling effect information (122SGS428) are executed. Then, the process proceeds to S52.

  In the player information input processing, the effect control CPU 120 operates the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B of the player to operate a password (a password generated by an external server in which game information of the player is stored in advance). The player accesses the server by using a communication terminal such as a smartphone and can receive the generated password), and stores the player information specified from the password in the RAM 122. Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of large hits, the number of super reach, and the like as player information stored each time the fluctuation display, the big hit game, and the super reach are executed.

  In the player information output process, the production control CPU 120 generates a two-dimensional code based on the player information stored in the RAM 122 by operating the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B of the player, and generates the two-dimensional code. Is displayed on the image display device 5. Then, after the display of the two-dimensional code is completed, the player information stored in the RAM 122 is cleared. The player reads the two-dimensional code displayed on the image display device 5 with a portable terminal such as a smartphone, and transmits the player information totalized in the current game to an external server. 1 can be stored in the server.

  In the effect information totalizing process, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. stored in the RAM 122 as effect information each time a variable display, a big hit game, or a super reach is executed. I do.

  Next, a description will be given of the effect control process processing in the characteristic portion 3 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 21 to 22, in the effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the value of the look-ahead restriction counter is “0” (122SGS441). If the value of the look-ahead restriction counter is “0” (122SGS441; Y), after executing the look-ahead notice setting process (S161), any of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) according to the effect control process flag is performed. Perform the above processing.

  When the value of the look-ahead restriction counter is any one of “1” to “4” (122SGS441; N), it is further determined whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is “1” (122SGS442). ). When the value of the effect control process flag is “0” or any one of “2” to “7” (122SGS442; N), one of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) according to the effect control process flag. When the processing is executed and the value of the effect control process flag is “1” (122SGS442; Y), the value of the look-ahead restriction counter is decremented by 1 (122SGS443), and S170 to S177 (S170 to S177) are performed according to the effect control process flag. (See FIG. 7). By executing the processes of 122SGS441 to 122SGS443 as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 immediately after startup, the execution of the prefetch notice effect is restricted until the variable display is executed four times.

  In the characteristic portion 3 of the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control main process and the effect control process process based on the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1, thereby displaying the variable display four times. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 determines whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been activated, based on the start-up prize determination process (see FIG. 5), the execution of the prefetch notice effect may be restricted over four variable displays.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 3 according to the present embodiment, regardless of whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a cold start or in a setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is related to the progress of the game based on the fact that the game becomes possible. As a setting, an example in which the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is regulated over four variable displays is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is determined whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started by a cold start. Regardless of whether the game has been started in the changed state, based on the fact that the game has become possible, the settings relating to the progress of the game are set according to the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the light amount of the game effect lamp 9, and the RTC. The setting of the effect and the like may be set to the state at the time of factory shipment.

  As described above, in pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9 (H), effect control CPU 120 performs the reach effect of super reach A or super reach B as the first suggestion effect, and the second effect. The super-reach C and the super-reach D can be executed as a suggestion effect, and the super-reach C and the super-reach D can be executed when the super-reach C and the super-reach D are performed. Since the title 31AK007 corresponding to the reach effect of Super Reach C or Super Reach D is notified from the start of the effect, the notification of the title 31AK007 according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

This embodiment also includes a fourth invention described below. That is, as the conventional pachinko gaming machines, there are, for example, those described in JP-A-2016-42880 and those described in JP-A-2010-200902. However, in the gaming machines described in JP-A-2016-42880 and JP-A-2010-200902, when the gaming machine is powered on and started (power supply to the gaming machine is started. ), A command (control information) output from the main board to the effect control board (effect control means) in order to restore the gaming machine based on the memory in which the main board (game control board) is backed up. A command output from the main board to the effect control board to clear the backed-up memory regardless of the memory where the main board is backed up, and a state in which the set value of the gaming machine can be changed If the command output from the main board to the effect control board is the same, when the game machine is powered on and activated, the effect control board is Making it impossible perform appropriate processing according to the movement state. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of the means 1 of the fourth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player,
A setting unit (for example, the CPU 103 executes a setting change process shown in FIG. 21-14) which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) by a predetermined operation. Part) and
Game control means capable of controlling the progress of the game and executing control to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5) Part) and
A backup storage unit (for example, the RAM 102) capable of holding stored contents for a predetermined period even when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped;
Effect control means (eg, effect control CPU 120 clears RAM shown in FIG. 21-17) capable of controlling the effect based on control information (eg, the effect control command shown in FIG. 21-3) output from the game control means. A notification process, a notification process during a setting value change, a notification process during a setting value check, etc.),
With
After the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the game control means sets a startup state when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, and restores the first startup based on the storage content stored in the backup storage means. State (for example, hot start), a second activation state (for example, cold start) for erasing and restoring the stored contents regardless of the stored contents stored in the backup storage means, and setting by the setting means is possible. , And outputs different control information corresponding to the activated state to the effect control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 21-11 and 21-14). In the case where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start, the CPU 103 transmits a hot start notification command to the effect control When the gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the CPU 103 transmits a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12, and when the pachinko machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the CPU 103 sends the cold start notification command to the effect control board 12. For sending the setting value change start notification command
According to this feature, it is possible for the effect control means to execute an appropriate process according to the activation state of the game control means when the power supply is started. .

Further, as means 2 of the fourth invention,
An effect control storage means (for example, a RAM 122) capable of storing information used by the effect control means;
The information to be erased among the information stored in the effect control storage means differs depending on whether the activation state corresponding to the control information is the second activation state or the third activation state ( For example, as shown in FIG. 21-18, the information cleared from the RAM 102 differs depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start, a cold start, a setting confirmation state, or a setting change state.
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to perform appropriate erasure according to the activation state.

Furthermore, as means 3 of the fourth invention,
The game control means can output control information (for example, a set value change end notification command) for designating the end of the third activation state,
The effect control means performs special control according to the end of the third activation state based on the output of the control information designating the termination of the third activation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-20). As described above, based on the reception of the setting value change end notification command, the effect control CPU 120 emits the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds and outputs the output sound C for 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R in the startup notification process. A gaming machine is described in which the image display device 5 displays a message image (for example, a message image indicating that the change of the set value has been completed) for 40 seconds. For example, by the special control, it is possible to recognize that the third activation state in which the set value can be set has ended.

Further, as means 4 of the fourth invention,
When the control information corresponding to the first activation state or the second activation state is output, the effect control means performs specific control in accordance with the output (for example, as shown in FIGS. Based on the reception of the start notification command and the cold start notification command, the effect control CPU 120 executes the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 and the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R in the startup notification process.
According to this feature, it is possible to recognize by a specific control that a starting state in which a set value cannot be set is provided.

Further, as means 5 of the fourth invention,
The effect control means performs different control depending on the activation state corresponding to the control information (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-20, based on the reception of the hot start notification command, the effect control CPU 120 In the start-up notification process, the CPU 120 for effect control performs based on the part that emits the light of the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the output of the output sound A from the speakers 8L and 8R for 30 seconds and receives the cold start notification command. In the start-up notification process, a portion for executing the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and outputting the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the effect of controlling the production control based on the reception of the set value change end notification command. The CPU 120 emits light for 40 seconds from the game effect lamp 9 and 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R in the startup notification processing. And a message image for 40 seconds in the image display device 5. Also, as shown in Fig. 21-19, based on the reception of the hot start notification command and the cold start notification command, The decorative symbol is displayed as a combination of "1,""2," and "3" as the initial symbol, and the decorative symbol is set to "4" or "4" as the initial symbol based on the reception of the setting value change end notification command. (A part displayed with a combination of "5" and "6")
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize which activation state is in effect.

Further, as means 6 of the fourth invention,
When the setting value is changed in the third activation state, the game control means deletes the backup information stored in the backup storage means except for the specific information (for example, FIG. As shown in 21-23, the RAM clearing process is executed based on the change of the set value, and the data after the address F001 except for the set value data stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 is cleared).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to execute appropriate erasure of backup information according to a change in a set value.

Further, as means 7 of the fourth invention,
Game information storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing game information used by the game control means to control the progress of the game,
The timing of erasing at least a part of the game information stored in the game information storage means differs between the first activation state and the second activation state (for example, as shown in a modification 11, a pachinko gaming machine) When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a cold start, the RAM clear processing is executed at a timing before the cold start notification command is transmitted to the staging control board 12, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state, the staging The part that executes the RAM clear processing at the timing after transmitting the setting value change start notification command to the control board 12)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to execute erasing of game information at an appropriate timing according to an activation state.

The present embodiment also includes a fifth invention described below. That is, as the conventional pachinko gaming machines, there are, for example, those described in JP-A-2016-42880 and those described in JP-A-2010-200902. However, in the gaming machines described in JP-A-2016-42880 and JP-A-2010-200902, when the gaming machine is powered on and started (power supply to the gaming machine is started. And when the main board is backed up regardless of the backed up storage (general start-up state) and when the set value of the gaming machine can be changed (set start-up state) If the notification mode is the same, it is difficult to identify whether the gaming machine is in the general activation state or the setting activation state, and it is difficult to find an illegal setting change or the like of the gaming machine. Was. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of the means 1 of the fifth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player,
A setting unit (for example, the CPU 103 executes a setting change process shown in FIG. 21-14) which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) by a predetermined operation. Part) and
Game control means capable of controlling the progress of the game and executing control to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5) Part) and
A backup storage unit (for example, the RAM 102 or the RAM 122) capable of retaining the stored content for a predetermined period even when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped;
Start-up notifying means (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the start-up notifying process shown in FIG. 21-17) capable of notifying the start-up state of the game control means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started;
With
The game control means includes, as the start state, a general start state (for example, a state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start) in which the storage contents stored in the backup storage means are cleared and started, and A setting activation state (for example, a setting change state) for validating the setting,
The start notification unit performs the notification in a different manner between the general start state and the set start state (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-20, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start). When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state, the light emission of the game effect lamp and the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are performed. A part for displaying a message image on the display device 5)
According to this feature, it is possible to easily specify whether the activation state is the general activation state or the setting activation state, and thus it is possible to easily detect an illegality due to the setting. .

Further, as means 2 of the fifth invention,
The start notification unit is capable of executing various notifications according to the priority,
The priority of the notification of the setting activation state is higher than the priority of the notification of the general activation state (for example, as shown in Modification 12, the priority is higher during the execution of the high-priority setting value change notification. To prevent low RAM clear notification from being executed)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, the notification of the setting activation state is given priority, so that it is possible to prevent the illegality due to the setting from being undetectable.

Further, as means 3 of the fifth invention,
The start notification unit notifies the set start state and the general start state in different notification periods (for example, the notification period when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start is 60 seconds, the pachinko gaming machine 1 (A part where the notification period when the device is started in the setting change state is 40 seconds). According to this feature, it is possible to execute appropriate notification in a period corresponding to the start state. .

Further, as means 4 of the fifth invention,
The activation notifying means,
A first notification unit (for example, the image display device 5), and a second notification unit (for example, the gaming effect lamp 9 and the speakers 8L and 8R) different from the first notification unit,
The setting notification state is notified by the first notification means (for example, a part displaying a message image on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 21-20),
The general start-up state is notified by the second notification means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 21 to 20, a portion that emits light from the game effect lamp 9 and outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R)
According to this feature, the start-up notification is executed by different notification means, so that it is easy to recognize which start-up state is in effect.

Further, as means 5 of the fifth invention,
The game control means includes a game control state based on a common setting as a setting related to a game progress in a game possible state after the set start state and a game possible state after the general start state (for example, The game in which the CPU 103 does not execute the start winning determination process after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, and thereby, it is possible to execute the prefetch notice effect up to four times of variable display). According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience, such as recognizing that the setting has been changed, by executing game control with different settings.

The present embodiment also includes a sixth invention described below. That is, as a conventional gaming machine, for example, there is a gaming machine described in JP-A-2006-137351. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-137351, if the game information is unintentionally erased due to a change in the set value, a store or a player in which the gaming machine is installed may be lost. There is a risk of giving a disadvantage. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of the means 1 of the sixth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player,
A setting unit (for example, the CPU 103 executes a setting change process shown in FIG. 21-14) which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) by a predetermined operation. Part) and
Game control means capable of controlling the progress of the game and executing control to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5) Part) and
Game information storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing game information used by the game control means to control the progress of the game,
A notifying unit capable of notifying in advance that the game information stored in the game information storage unit is to be deleted (for example, a part in which the effect control CPU 120 executes a set value change confirmation notifying process in Modification 8);
With
The game control means erases at least a part of the game information stored in the game information storage means when a new set value is set by the setting means (for example, when the CPU 103 RAM clear processing),
The predetermined operation includes a setting change start operation (for example, an operation of turning on a clear switch), a setting change operation (for example, an operation of turning on a setting changeover switch 122SG052), and a setting change completion operation (for example, turning off a lock switch 122SG051). Operation) and
The setting unit can perform the setting change operation by performing the setting change start operation (for example, as shown in FIGS. 21 to 23 as a modification 8, the CPU 103 determines that the clear switch is ON ( 122SGSa054a; the part where the processing of 122SGSa054d to 122SGSa056 can be executed after Y)), the setting change completion operation is performed after the enabled setting change operation, and the setting changed by the setting change operation is performed. The value is set (for example, as shown in FIGS. 21 to 23 as Modification 8, the CPU 103 determines that the lock switch is OFF (122SGSa057; N), and then executes the process of 122SGSa058),
The notification unit executes the notification when the setting change start operation is performed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 21 to 24 as Modification 8, the effect control CPU 120 transmits the first setting value change start notification command). (The part that executes the setting value change confirmation notification processing based on the determination that the setting value has been received (122SGS410; Y))
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the game information from being unintentionally erased due to a change in the set value.

Further, as means 2 of the sixth invention,
The game control means, after the setting change start operation, if the setting change completion operation is performed without performing the setting change operation, the game information stored in the game information storage means, Not erased (for example, as shown in FIGS. 21 to 23 as Modification 8, after the CPU 103 determines that the setting changeover switch has not been operated (122SGSa054d; N), it further determines that the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF. In this case, based on the fact that the same set value is stored in the address F000 and the address F001 in the RAM 102 (122SGSa057c; Y), the part that ends the set value change process without executing the RAM clear process (122SGSa060). )
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a player from being disadvantaged by erasing the game information even though the set value is not changed. be able to.

Further, as means 3 of the sixth invention,
The notification means can notify that the game information is not erased by the game control means when the predetermined operation is completed without performing the setting change completion operation (for example, FIG. As shown at -25, the effect control CPU 120 executes the setting value change confirmation notifying process to display the message image 122SG005M1 on the image display device 5.)
According to this feature, a game machine characterized by the fact that the operator can recognize an operation method for preventing the game information from being erased, Erase can be further prevented.

Further, as means 4 of the sixth invention,
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the erasure condition is satisfied, and when a predetermined confirmation operation is performed, the game control means stores the game information stored in the game information storage means. After erasing at least a part of the information (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-11), the CPU 103 determines that the clear switch is ON in the game control main process (122SGSa003; Y), and then executes the RAM clear process (122SGSa017). Part),
The notification unit also performs the notification even when the erasure condition is satisfied (for example, a portion in which the message image 122SG005M2 is displayed on the image display device 5 as illustrated in FIGS. 21 to 26 as a ninth modification).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent game information from being erased unintentionally.

Further, as means 5 of the sixth invention,
Effect control means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of controlling effects based on control information output from the game control means;
Effect control storage means (for example, RAM 122) capable of storing information used by the effect control means;
Selecting means (for example, a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B) capable of selecting whether or not to execute erasure in the effect control storage means;
With
When the erasing condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, and when it is selected by the selecting means not to execute the erasing in the effect control storage means, the game information storage is performed. At least a part of the game information stored in the means is erased (for example, as shown in a modified example 10, only the RAM 102 is cleared), and the erase condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. And when it is selected by the selection means to execute erasure in the effect control storage means, at least a part of the game information stored in the game information storage means is erased. Erasing at least a part of the information stored in the effect control storage means (for example, as shown in Modification 10, RAM 102 and RAM 122 Part to clear both)
According to this feature, when the erasure condition is satisfied, whether or not to erase the effect control storage means together with the erasure in the game information storage means is described. Can be selected.

  As described above, the characteristic portion 3 in the embodiment of the present invention has been described with reference to the drawings. However, the specific configuration is not limited to the embodiment, and there may be changes and additions without departing from the gist of the present invention. This is also included in the present invention.

  For example, in the characteristic part 3 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21-11, when the clear switch is ON at the time of starting the pachinko gaming machine 1, after executing the RAM clear processing (122SGSa017), the lock switch is executed. When the 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa018; Y), the setting change process (122SGSa020) is executed, and an example in which a new set value can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, if the clear switch is ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, it is first determined whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON. If the lock switch 122SG051 is ON, the setting change process is performed. Even if the RAM clear processing is executed based on the setting of a new set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, There.

  When the RAM clearing process is executed based on the setting of the new setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting changing process, the setting change is performed as shown in FIGS. In the processing, the CPU 103 first transmits a first setting value change times notification command indicating that the CPU 103 has started executing the setting change processing to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa051). Next, the setting value stored at the address F000 in the RAM 102 is specified (122SGSa052), and the specified setting value is displayed on the display monitor 122SG029.

  The CPU 103 determines whether the clear switch is ON (122SGSa054a). If the clear switch is OFF (122SGSa054a; N), the CPU 103 further determines whether the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa054a; N). 122SGSa054b). If the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa054b; Y), the processes of 122SGSa054a and 122SGSa054b are repeatedly executed, and the process waits until the clear switch is turned ON or the lock switch 122SG051 is turned OFF. If the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF, a setting value change end notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, and the setting change process ends (122SGS061).

  When the clear switch is ON (122SGSa054a; Y), the CPU 103 issues a second setting value change start notification command indicating that the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by operating the setting changeover switch 122SG052. It is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa054c), and it is determined whether or not the setting switch 122SG052 is operated (122SGSa054d).

  When the setting switch 122SG052 is operated (122SGSa054d; Y), the content of the address F001 in the RAM 102 is updated (122SGSa055). Specifically, when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is “1”, “2”, which is a setting value that is one step less favorable for the player than “1”, is set as a temporary setting value. When the setting value stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 and displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is “2”, the setting value “3”, which is one step less favorable for the player than “2”, is temporarily set. It is stored as a set value in the address F001 of the RAM 102. When the set value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "3", "1" may be stored as a temporary set value in the address F001 of the RAM 102.

  Then, the CPU 103 displays the set value (temporary set value) stored at the address F001 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa056), and determines whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa057). When the setting switch is not operated in 122SGSa054 (122SGSa054; N), the processing of 122SGSa057 is executed without executing the processing of 122SGSa055 and 122SGSa056.

  When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa057; Y), the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processes of 122SGSa054d to 122SGSa056 to store a new temporary set value in the address F001 of the RAM 102, or stores it in the address F001. A process of displaying the set value on the display monitor 122SG029 is executed.

  If the lock switch is OFF in 122SGSa057 (122SGSa057; N), the CPU 103 determines whether or not a set value (temporary set value) is stored in the address 001 of the RAM 102 (122SGSa057a). If the setting value (temporary setting value) is not stored in the address 001 of the RAM 102, that is, if the lock switch 122SG051 is turned off without operating the setting changeover switch 122SG052, a setting value change end notification command is produced. The setting is transmitted to the control board 12 and the setting change process is terminated (122SGS061).

  On the other hand, when the set value (temporary set value) is stored in the address 001 of the RAM 102 (122SGSa057a; Y), the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 and the set value stored in the address F001 are used. (122SGSa057b), and it is determined whether the same setting value is stored in the address F000 and the address F001 in the RAM 102 (122SGSa057c). If the same set value is stored in the address F000 and the address F001 in the RAM 102 (122SGSa057c; Y), that is, if the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has not been changed, a set value change end notification command is issued. The data is transmitted to the board 12 and the setting change process ends (122SGS061).

  When different setting values are stored in the address F000 and the address F001 in the RAM 102 (122SGSa057c; N), that is, when the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, the setting value is stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102. The set value is stored in the address F000, that is, the set value stored in the address F001 is stored as the main set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (122SGSa058).

  Then, a setting value designation command corresponding to the setting value (the newly set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1) stored at the address F000 in the RAM 102 is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa059), and the RAM is cleared. The processing is executed (122SGSa060). Note that the RAM clear processing (122SGSa060) executes the same processing as the RAM clear processing described with reference to FIG. 21-13, and excludes the set value stored in the RAM 102 at the address F000 (data stored after the address F001). Clear data). After the execution of the RAM clear processing (122SGSa060), a setting value change end notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, and the setting change processing is ended (122SGS061).

  FIGS. 21 to 24 are flowcharts illustrating a part of the effect control main process according to the eighth modification. In the effect control main process according to Modification 8, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that the cold start notification command has not been received (122SGS407; N), as illustrated in FIGS. It is determined whether or not a command has been received (122SGS410a). If the first setting value change start notification command has not been received (122SGS410a; N), the process proceeds to 122SGS414 (see FIG. 21-17). If the first setting value change start notification command has been received (122SGS410a; Y), A setting value change confirmation notification process is executed (122SGS410b), and the game information and the like stored in the RAM 102 are cleared by changing the setting value on the image display device 5, and the lock is set when the setting value is not changed. An instruction to turn off the switch 122SG051 is displayed as a message image 122SG005M1 (see FIG. 21-25 (A)).

  Then, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the second setting value change start notification command has been received (122SGS410c). If the second set value change start notification command has not been received (122SGS410C; N), it is further determined whether or not the set value change end notification command has been received (122SGS410d). If the setting value change end notification command has not been received (122SGS410d; N), the processing of 122SGS410b to 122SGS410d is repeatedly executed, and the process waits until the first setting value change start notification command or the setting value change end notification command is received. If the setting value change end notification command has been received (122SGS410d; Y), the process proceeds to 122SGS414 (see FIG. 21-17).

  Further, when the second setting value change start notification command is received (122SGS410c; Y), the effect control CPU 120 executes a setting value changing notification process for notifying that the setting value changing operation is being performed. (122SGS411), it is determined whether or not a setting value change end notification command has been received (122SGS411a). If the setting value change end notification command has not been received (122SGS411a; N), the processes of 122SG411 and 122SGS411a are repeatedly executed, and the process waits until the setting value change end notification command is received. When the setting value change end notification command is received (122SGS411a; Y), it is determined whether or not the setting value designation command is received (122SGS411b). If the setting value designation command has not been received (122SGS411b; N), the process proceeds to 122SGS414 (see FIG. 21-17). If the setting value designation command has been received (122SGS411b; Y), the process proceeds from the received setting value designation command. A set value newly set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (set value stored in the address F000 of the RAM 102) is specified, and the specified set value is set value information (“1” to “3” corresponding to the set value). Is updated and stored in the RAM 122 (122SG413). Then, the process proceeds to 122SGS408 (see FIG. 21-17).

  As described above, the CPU 103 executes the setting change process, and the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control main process, so that the clerk in the game hall or the like turns on the clear switch and the lock switch 122SG051 in the pachinko game machine. When the device 1 is started, as shown in FIG. 21-25 (A), the game display information and the like stored in the RAM 102 are cleared by changing the set value in the image display device 5, or the set value is changed. If not, an instruction to turn off the lock switch 122SG051 is displayed as the message image 122SG005M1.

  When the clerk of the game hall or the like turns off the lock switch 122SG051 while the message image 122SG005M1 is displayed on the image display device 5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 as shown in FIG. Is not changed and the RAM 102 is not cleared, and the decorative symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 as an initial symbol in a combination of "1", "2", and "3". On the other hand, when the clerk of the game arcade turns on the clear switch again while the message image 122SG005M1 is displayed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 21-25 (C), the pachinko gaming machine 1 Is in a setting change state, and the display of an image on the image display device 5, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the like inform that the setting value is being changed.

  When the lock switch 122SG051 is turned off without setting a new setting value by the clerk of the game hall or the like in the setting change state, or when the clerk of the game hall sets the new setting value to the same value as the original setting value. When the set value is set and the lock switch 122SG051 is turned off, as shown in FIG. 21D, the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not changed and the RAM 102 is cleared. Instead, a decorative symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 as an initial symbol in a combination of “1”, “2”, and “3”. Further, in the setting change state, when a store clerk at the game hall or the like sets a new set value (changes the set value) and turns off the lock switch 122SG051, the set value is set as shown in FIG. Is changed, the RAM 102 is cleared, and a decorative symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 as a combination of "4", "5", and "6" as an initial symbol.

  In the eighth modification, the pachinko game machine 1 is activated by a store clerk or the like at the game arcade while the clear switch and the lock switch 122SG051 are turned on, thereby changing the set values to the image display device 5 and changing the RAM 102 to the RAM 102. Of the game information and the like, and the instruction to turn off the lock switch 122SG051 when the setting value is not changed are displayed as the message image 122SG005M1. The present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIGS. 21 to 26 as a ninth modification, the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state where the clear switch is turned on, so that the pachinko machine is displayed on the image display device 5. Starting the gaming machine 1 by a cold start clears the game information and the like stored in the RAM 102, The instruction If it does not start the machine 1 at cold start to reboot of the pachinko gaming machine 1, may be displayed as a message image 122SG005M2.

  In this way, for example, when a clerk at a game arcade turns on the clear switch by mistake when trying to start the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a hot start, the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts at a cold start. This prevents the game information stored in the RAM 102 from being unintentionally cleared.

  In the modified examples 8 and 9, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state or started in a cold start, the message images 122SG005M1 and 122SG005M2 are displayed on the image display device 5. Although the form in which the confirmation of whether or not to clear the RAM 102 is illustrated by way of example, the present invention is not limited to this. The confirmation may be performed when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a cold start, or when both are started.

  In the eighth modification, the pachinko game machine 1 is activated by a store clerk or the like at the game arcade while the clear switch and the lock switch 122SG051 are turned on, thereby changing the set values to the image display device 5 and changing the RAM 102 to the RAM 102. Of the game information and the like, and the instruction to turn off the lock switch 122SG051 when the setting value is not changed are displayed as the message image 122SG005M1. Without limitation, as shown in FIGS. 21-27 as a tenth modification, when the RAM 102 is cleared based on the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started by a cold start or the set value has been changed, The image display device 5 indicates that the set values have been changed, that the RAM 102 has been cleared, and that the set values have been changed. And a message image 122SG005M3 including an option of whether to clear the RAM 122 in response to the clearing of the RAM 102 and accepting a selection of whether to clear the RAM 122 by operating the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A. You may do so.

  When clearing of the RAM 122 is selected by operating the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, the effect control CPU 120 executes the RAM clearing process to clear other information except the set value information in the RAM 122 (results). If the clearing of the RAM 122 is not selected by operating the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, the RAM 122 is not cleared (as a result, only the RAM 102 is cleared).

  Also, in the characteristic part 3 in the above embodiment, the same timing (cold start notification command and setting for the effect control board 12) Although the form in which the RAM clear processing is executed at the timing before transmitting the value change start notification command) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. As a modification 11, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 When starting at the start, the RAM clearing process is executed at a timing before transmitting the cold start notification command to the effect control board 12, and when starting the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change state, the effect control board 12 is started. After the transmission of the set value change start notification command to the When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, for example, after the setting value change end notification command is transmitted, that is, after the end of the setting value change, the RAM is cleared. The timing at which the RAM 102 is cleared may be different from the timing at which the RAM 102 is cleared.

  In the characteristic part 3 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21-17, the RAM 102 and the RAM 122 are always cleared when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a setting change state. Although the form in which the RAM clear notification process is executed to notify the fact (perform the RAM clear notification) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. As a modification 12, the pachinko gaming machine 1 Is activated in the setting change state to notify that the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is being changed (execution of a change in the setting value is performed), and priority is given to each notification such as not executing the RAM clear notification. If a high priority notification (for example, a notification of a change in the set value) is being performed, a low priority notification (for example, a RAM clear notification) is not performed. It may be.

  In the case where a priority is provided for each notification in this way, a low-priority notification may be executed after a high-priority notification is executed. In this case, the low-priority notification is executed in a shorter time period than when the high-priority notification is not executed, so that the notification execution period is prevented from becoming long. You may.

  Further, in the characteristic part 3 in the above-described embodiment, the setting for the movable body 32 is not executed at the time of starting the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the starting of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to this. At the time, a confirmation operation of whether or not the movable body 32 operates normally may be executed in parallel with the above-described notification of RAM clear, notification of change of set value, notification of confirmation of set value, and various types of startup notifications. . In the case where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start or a cold start, a start notification for 60 seconds is executed, so that the operation of confirming the movable body 32 can be executed during the start notification. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, since the set value is changed in addition to the start notification for 40 seconds, the movable body 32 is changed during the change of these set values and during the start notification for 40 seconds. Can be performed.

  The operation of checking the movable body 32 may be performed from the time the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, regardless of the activation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, The effect control CPU 120 (effect control board 12) may execute the set value change start notification command, the set value change end notification command, the set value confirmation start notification command, the set value confirmation end notification command, and the like from the time when the effect control CPU 120 (effect control board 12) receives the command. Further, in the case where the effect control CPU 120 executes the check operation of the movable body 32 from the point of receiving the set value change start notification command, that is, executes the check operation of the movable body 32 during the change of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 In such a case, even if an error occurs in the confirmation operation, the execution of the notification during the setting value change may be prioritized, and the error notification of the confirmation operation may not be executed.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 3 of the embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state, a new setting value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 so that the new setting value is directly reflected in the game. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once restarted (pachinko gaming). The new setting value may be reflected in the game by activating the machine 1 by a hot start). When the new setting value is reflected in the game by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1 as described above, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state, the movable body 32 is checked. After slightly moving the movable body 32 from the origin position to the production position, the confirmation operation that can be executed in a relatively short period of time, such as moving the movable body 32 to the origin position again, is executed, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 Is restarted, as a confirmation operation of the movable body 32, a confirmation that a relatively long period of time is required, such as moving the movable body 32 from the origin position to the production position and then moving the movable body 32 to the origin position again. The operation may be performed. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the period required for the operation of checking the movable body 32 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started.

  Further, in the characteristic part 3 of the embodiment, the setting value stored in the address F000 is disclosed as the specific information that is not cleared from the RAM 102, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting value is not cleared from the RAM 102. Specific information that is not performed may include RTC settings, error history, and the like.

  Furthermore, in the characteristic part 3 of the embodiment, the mode in which the setting value as the specific information that is not cleared in the RAM 102, the temporary setting value as the information to be cleared, the game information, and the like are stored is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, two RAMs are provided on the game control microcomputer 100, one RAM stores specific information that is not cleared such as set values, and the other RAM stores provisional set values and game information. Information to be cleared such as information may be stored. By doing so, the RAM (temporary set values, game information, and the like) on the other side is stored depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start, a cold start, a setting change state, or a setting confirmation state. (RAM) is cleared. Further, an area for storing specific information that is not cleared and an area for storing information that is cleared may be provided in the RAM 102.

  When two RAMs are provided on the game control microcomputer 100 as described above, a RAM (Static Random Access Memory) connected to a backup battery is connected to a RAM for storing uncleared specific information such as set values. On the other hand, by setting the RAM in which the temporary setting values and game information are stored as FeRAM (Ferroelectric Random Access Memory), data having higher importance than other data such as setting values can be surely cleared. Alternatively, the information may be stored without being stored.

  Further, in the characteristic part 3 of the embodiment, the form in which the clear switch is mounted on the power supply board is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the clear switch is not limited to the main board 11. It may be mounted on. By doing so, there is no need to newly attach a clear switch to the existing power supply board, so that the manufacturing cost of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be reduced.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the characteristic part 3, the mode in which the display monitor 122SG051 for displaying the set value is mounted on the main board 11 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. A display monitor 122SG051 may be provided at a position near the setting changeover switch 122SG052 in 11 to make it easy to execute a setting value changing operation.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 3 in the above embodiment, the form in which the display monitor 122SG051 for displaying the set value is mounted on the main board 11 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game is not limited to this. When it is possible to calculate the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio in the machine 1, the calculated accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio may be displayed on the display monitor 122SG051.

  Further, in the characteristic part 3 in the above embodiment, an example is described in which the display monitor 122SG051 and the setting changeover switch 122SG052 are provided on the main board 11 so that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changed using a monitor (7-segment monitor) mounted on the payout control board, a reset button, or the like.

  Also, in the characteristic part 3 in the embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12 as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. Since the RAM clear processing (122SGSa017) is executed, both the set value change start notification command and the cold start notification command may be transmitted to the effect control board 12.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 3 in the above-described embodiment, the setting value 1 is set to the most advantageous setting value for the player, and the setting value 3 is set to the most disadvantageous setting value for the player (the setting value 1 is the most disadvantageous for the game place). The setting value 3 is set to be the most advantageous setting value for the game hall), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting value 1 is the most disadvantageous to the player. The set value may be set as the set value 3, and the set value 3 may be set to be the most advantageous set value for the player.

  In particular, in the characteristic part 3, when there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 (122SGSa041; Y) or when there is no backup data (122SGSa042; N), "00H" is set to the address F000, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 Is a state in which the set value 1 is automatically set, that is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes the most advantageous state for the player. For this reason, some players cause the pachinko gaming machine 1 to improperly set the value 1 to the pachinko gaming machine 1 by causing the CPU 103 to execute the RAM clearing process (see FIG. It is assumed to be set. Therefore, as described above, by setting the set value 1 to the most disadvantageous set value for the player, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute the It is possible to prevent a situation that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the security of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  In the characteristic part 3 of the embodiment, the special control and the specific control performed by the effect control CPU 120 perform the lighting period of the game effect lamp 9, the sound and the output period output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the image. Although the form in which the image is displayed on the display device 5 is different (the control related to the notification at the time of starting is different) has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. In addition to the control related to the above-described notification at the time of start-up, an initial symbol (see FIG. 21-19), a background image, and a character displayed on the image display device 5 after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is ready for a game. (For example, the effect state and the effect state after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a state in which the game can be played) and the operation of confirming the movable body 32. Whether rows, aspects and execution period of the confirmation operations may include control surrounding confirmation operation, such as different. That is, the special control and the specific control in the present invention may be any control as long as at least a part of the control target of the effect control CPU 120, the control mode of the effect control CPU 120, the control period of the effect control CPU 120, and the like are different. .

  Further, in the characteristic portion 3 of the embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of a gaming machine. Can be started, and a variable display result is derived on an image display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols each of which is identifiable, thereby ending one game and displaying the variable display derived on the image display device. The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine in which a prize can be generated according to the result.

  In the above-described embodiment, the title corresponding to the super-reach reach effect is displayed from the start of the super-reach reach effect (characteristic portion 31AK in FIGS. 1 to 19), and the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052. Is operated, any one of a plurality of setting values can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. By opening and closing the gaming machine frame 109SG003 and the glass door frame 109SG003a, the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052 are set. In a mode in which the state can be switched between an operable state and an inoperable state, any one of a plurality of set values can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 on the main board 11 (CPU 103), and the set value is converted. The stored secret value is stored in the RAM 102 and the effect control The main board 11 (CPU 103) according to a form in which the suggestion effect (a morning effect background effect) indicating the set value is executable on the side of the 12 (effect control CPU 120) and the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 being activated. Sends a different command to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120), and can execute a different start notification when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a cold start and when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in a setting changed state. In the case where the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, a mode of notifying that the RAM 102 is cleared (the characteristic part 3 of FIGS. 21-1 to 21-27) has been disclosed. , A plurality of feature parts may be applied among these feature parts.

  (Explanation about the characteristic part 109SG)

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is a pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a setting value designation command capable of specifying a setting value is transmitted to an effect control board for performing an effect, and the set value is transmitted to the effect control board. Notifying and controlling the setting suggestion effect, the effect control board that controls these setting suggestion effects is a board that controls the effect rather than controlling the progress of the game, thereby controlling the progress of the game. Since it is easier to take out the board from the case etc. and analyze it than the game control board to do, if the set value stored in the effect control board is tampered, inappropriate setting suggestion effects are performed There was a problem that there was fear. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of the means 1 of 109SG-1 for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Setting means for setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values of 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 executes a process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means;
Effect control means for controlling the effect based on the control information transmitted from the game control means,
With
The game control means includes, as the control information capable of specifying the set value, set value control information including a secret value obtained by converting the set value, which is different from the set value set by the setting means (for example, , Setting value specification command), and
The effect control means is capable of storing a secret value included in the set value control information transmitted from the game control means and executing an effect relating to the set value specified from the secret value (for example, a pachinko gaming machine). The part where the background effect (setting value suggestion effect) is executed until one hour elapses after the power is turned on to 1 or until 100 times of fluctuation display are executed.
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the stored set values from being falsified.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 2 of 109SG-1,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the game control device executes the conversion using a conversion table in which the set value and the secret value are associated with each other. Can be prevented from being falsified while reducing the processing load of.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 3 of 109SG-1,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the game control means executes the conversion by performing an operation on the set value with a predetermined conversion coefficient, and according to this feature, It is possible to prevent the set value from being falsified while reducing the required data capacity.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 4 of 109SG-1,
A gaming machine is characterized in that the game control means executes the conversion by setting a specific bit value corresponding to the set value to 1, and according to this feature, It is possible to prevent the set value from being falsified while reducing the data capacity.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 5 of 109SG-1,
The gaming control means executes the conversion by shifting the set value by a predetermined number, which describes the gaming machine.According to this feature, the data capacity required for the conversion is reduced. Moreover, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being falsified.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is a pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a setting value designation command capable of specifying a setting value is transmitted to an effect control board for performing an effect, and the set value is transmitted to the effect control board. Notifying and controlling the setting suggestion effect, the effect control board that controls these setting suggestion effects is a board that controls the effect rather than controlling the progress of the game, thereby controlling the progress of the game. Since it is easier to take out the board from the case etc. and analyze it than the game control board to do, if the set value stored in the effect control board is tampered, inappropriate setting suggestion effects are performed There was a problem that there was fear. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of the means 1 of 109SG-2 for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Setting means for setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values of 1 to 3);
Game control means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 executes a process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means;
Effect control means for controlling the effect based on the control information transmitted from the game control means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes a process control process shown in FIG. 5);
With
The game control means can transmit set value control information (for example, a set value designation command) including the set value as the control information,
The effect control means converts a set value included in the set value control information transmitted from the game control means into a secret value that is a numerical value different from the set value, and stores the converted secret value. (For example, until one hour has passed since the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 was turned on, or until 100 fluctuation displays were executed, the background effect (setting Part that performs value suggestion production)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the stored set values from being falsified.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of 109SG-2,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the game control device executes the conversion using a conversion table in which the set value and the secret value are associated with each other. Can be prevented from being falsified while reducing the processing load of.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 3 of 109SG-2,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the game control means executes the conversion by performing an operation on the set value with a predetermined conversion coefficient, and according to this feature, It is possible to prevent the set value from being falsified while reducing the required data capacity.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 4 of 109SG-2,
A gaming machine is characterized in that the game control means executes the conversion by setting a specific bit value corresponding to the set value to 1, and according to this feature, It is possible to prevent the set value from being falsified while reducing the data capacity.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 5 of 109SG-2,
The gaming control means executes the conversion by shifting the set value by a predetermined number, which describes the gaming machine.According to this feature, the data capacity required for the conversion is reduced. Moreover, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being falsified.

  As described above, the embodiments of the present invention have been described with reference to the drawings. However, the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and even if there are changes and additions without departing from the gist of the present invention, the present invention will be described. included.

  In the above-described embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of a gaming machine. However, for example, a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using a gaming value. At the same time, one game is ended by deriving a variable display result on an image display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols each of which can be identified, and according to the variable display result derived on the image display device. The present invention is also applicable to slot machines in which a prize can be generated.

  The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration thereof is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions in a range not departing from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other exemplary embodiments described below.

  Further, among the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each of the modifications, and the configurations shown in the below-described embodiments and each of the modifications, all or some of the configurations may be arbitrarily combined.

  It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the below-described embodiments disclosed this time are merely examples in all respects and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above and the following description, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  The gaming machine of the present invention may also be a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) provided with display means (for example, the image display device 5 or the like) capable of playing a game and displaying an effect display relating to the game. Detecting means (for example, the controller sensor unit 35A, the push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting the operation of the player, and a valid display (for example, valid display 64SH003, 64SH005) indicating that the detection of the operation by the detecting means is valid. , Etc.) on the display means, and at least a part of the effect display (eg, display in the promotion effect) including the effective display displayed by the effective display means. A difficult-to-visual effect means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 or the like) for performing a difficult-to-visual effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize, (1) In the state where the validity display (for example, the validity display 64SH005 or the like) is displayed, when an operation is detected by the detection unit, the first performance display (for example, a treasure box and a character string) is displayed. The first effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120 or the like) capable of performing a corresponding effect (for example, a button effect) and an operation of selecting one option from a plurality of options as the effective display are effective. When an operation is detected by the detection unit in a state where the second validity display (for example, the validity display 64SH003 or the like) is displayed, a selection result (for example, FIG. A second effect (for example, a corresponding effect in the selected effect) that displays a second effect display capable of specifying a selection result (for example, a selected character) shown in -1 (B2) is displayed. A second effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120 or the like) capable of displaying the first effective display, wherein the first effect display is displayed, and the first effect is performed by the first effect means. If it is performed, it is possible to perform a visual effect that is difficult to see (for example, if the determination is affirmative in 64SH104 and 64SH105 in FIG. In the case where the second effect is performed by the second effect means, an effect that is difficult to view is not performed (for example, when a positive determination is made in 64SH101 in FIG. 20-4, or a negative determination is made in 64SH104 and a positive determination is made in 64SH110). In this case, the selection effect is performed, and the effect of difficulty in visual recognition is not performed, etc.). Suggestion effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) that suggests being controlled, and title notification means (for example, effect control control) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestion effect. CPU 120), and the title notifying means can notify a title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect (for example, FIGS. 9D and 9F). Machine.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest. In addition, the effect of production can be enhanced.

  Further, as an example of a form of a gaming machine that can suppress a decrease in gaming interest and enhance a staging effect, a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player ( For example, a pachinko gaming machine 1), a suggestion effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect) indicating that control is performed in the advantageous state, and a response to the suggestion effect. Title informing means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of informing the user of the suggested effect, wherein the title information means is capable of informing a title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect. There are certain gaming machines (for example, FIGS. 9D and 9F). Hereinafter, an example of the embodiment of the gaming machine will be described as another embodiment.

(Other examples)
Hereinafter, a characteristic portion of another embodiment will be described. Next, the characteristic portion 21TM will be described. Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, and a terminal board (information output board) 21TM016 as shown in FIG. 22-1 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also provided with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 2 described above, the main board 11 includes a first starting port switch 22A and a second starting port switch 22B, and a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B. Various components are connected, and various effect devices such as speakers 8L and 8R and a game effect lamp 9 are connected to the effect control board 12, but these devices are omitted in FIG. 22-1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side. As shown in FIG. 22C, the main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in the board case 21TM201, and progresses the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Various circuits for control are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a function of setting random numbers used in the special figure game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and a sub-side control board including an effect control board 12 and the like. And a function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer. In addition, the main board 11 performs lighting / extinguishing control of each LED (for example, a segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to perform the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The display of the variation of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the variation display of the symbol, and controlling the variation of the ordinary symbol by the ordinary symbol display 20 by performing lighting / off / coloring control of the ordinary symbol display 20 and the like. It also has a control function.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 22-3 and FIG. 22-5 (A), the main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 21TM029 which is visible from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the display monitor 21TM029 is It also has a function of displaying various winning information related to winning. Note that a display changeover switch 21TM030 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 21TM029, and the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 can be switched by operating the display changeover switch 21TM030.

  The main board 11 receives various signals such as a power-off signal, a clear signal, and a reset signal in addition to detection signals from the game control microcomputer 100 and various switches for detecting game balls, for example. An information output circuit 112 for outputting various signals such as a security signal from the switch circuit 110 for transmission to the terminal 100 and the terminal board 21TM016 is mounted.

  The main substrate 11 shown in FIG. 22A is sealed in a substrate case 21TM201 made of a synthetic resin material having transparency as shown in FIGS. 22-3 and 22-5 (A). A display monitor 21TM029 (for example, 7 segments) is arranged at the center of 11, and a display changeover switch 21TM030 is arranged on the right side of the display monitor 21TM029. The display monitor 21TM029 and the display changeover switch 21TM030 are arranged on the front when the main board 11 is viewed. A lock switch 21TM051 (see FIG. 22A) for switching to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is provided at the lower center of the rear surface of the main board 11. The main board 11 cannot be visually recognized in a state where the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened. Therefore, the front face when viewing the main board 11 refers to the back side of the game board 2 in a state where the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. This is a front view when viewing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

  In addition, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is provided with each winning opening (large winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning opening, hereinafter, "entry area"). ), And the various kinds of winning information such as the connection ratio and the winning combination based on the counting are displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, and the winning information is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to confirm various kinds of winning information such as the connection ratio and the winning ratio after the installation in the game hall. That is, on the maker side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is usual that the game board surface is designed so that the game ball enters the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency (to pass the test). When the test is performed, it is checked whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Further, even after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment has been made, and as a result of the adjustment, whether the gaming ball has entered the general winning opening as designed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made after the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been installed.

  The power supply board is sealed in a board case made of a synthetic resin material having transparency, and on the lower right side of the back of the power supply board, a set value such as a jackpot winning probability (a payout rate) described later is changed. A clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 functioning as a setting switch for power supply and a power switch 21TM055 are provided. By operating the power switch 21TM055 in a state where the power supply voltage is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, a store clerk or the like at the amusement arcade can set a predetermined number of boards such as the main board 11, the production control board 12, and the payout control board 21TM037. Operating voltage is supplied. Furthermore, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at the timing when the power switch 21TM055 is operated, a clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100, and an initialization process (RAM clear) described later is performed. Be executed. By arranging the power switch 21TM055 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 close on the same power supply board, the power-on operation and the initialization operation are facilitated.

  The lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the game machine frame 3 which can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. Thus, only a clerk having a predetermined key can operate. In addition, since the lock switch 21TM051 requires key operation, only a store clerk having a key for operating the lock switch 21TM051 can be operated among game store clerks. The lock switch 21TM051 is a switch capable of performing an ON / OFF switching operation using a predetermined key. The lock switch 21TM051 is capable of performing the switching operation and performing an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pressing operation). A possible switch may be used.

  The lock switch 21TM051 can maintain the ON state or the OFF state. That is, the lock switch 21TM051 can maintain the ON state or the OFF state even when no force is applied by a store clerk or the like at the game arcade. The lock switch 21TM051 has a configuration in which a key can be inserted and removed only in an OFF state. According to such a configuration, the clerk at the game hall must turn off the lock switch 21TM051 in order to collect the key. Can be prevented.

  As shown in FIG. 22C, the lower part of the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided for discharging gaming balls winning each winning opening and gaming balls entering the out opening to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A nozzle (discharge port) is provided, and a discharge port switch 21TM070 for detecting a game ball discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (detecting a shot game ball) is provided in the nozzle. ing. The outlet switch 21TM070 is connected to the above-described switch circuit 110 as shown in FIG.

  The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, an audio control command used to control audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of the decoration LED and the like.

  FIG. 22B is a block diagram illustrating components related to payout, such as the payout control board 21TM037 and the ball payout device 21TM097. As shown in FIG. 22B, a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including a payout control CPU 21TM371 is mounted on the payout control board 21TM037. In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a one-chip microcomputer and has at least a built-in RAM. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a RAM (not shown), a ROM (not shown) storing a payout control program, an I / O port, and the like constitute a payout control board 21TM037. That is, the payout control board 21TM037 is realized by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 having the payout control CPU 21TM371, RAM and ROM, and the I / O port. Further, the I / O port may be built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  The detection signals from the ball out switch 21TM187, the full tank switch 21TM048, and the payout number count switch 21TM301 are input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. In this embodiment, the detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and then is output to the main board 11 via the I / O port 21TM372a and the output circuit 21TM373B. .

  As shown in FIG. 22-2, the payout control board 21TM037 has a game machine frame opening sensor for detecting the opening of the game machine frame 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2, and the front face of the game board 2 can be opened and closed. And a door frame opening sensor 21TM300 which is provided with a door frame opening sensor for detecting the opening of the glass door frame 3a to be covered, and various abnormalities are detected based on detection signals output from these sensors. It also has a function of determining the occurrence of (error). Note that a detection signal when the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected and a detection signal when the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected are input to different terminals, so that a payout control microcomputer is provided. 21TM370 is capable of recognizing the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a separately.

  The detection signal from the payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is input to the I / O port 21TM372e of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. The payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is a sensor including a light emitting element (LED) and a light receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 21TM289, and is used to detect that a game ball is clogged, that is, to detect a so-called ball bite. . The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 indicates that the detection signal from the ball out switch 21TM187 indicates a ball out state or the detection signal from the full switch 21TM048 indicates a full state. Then, the ball payout process is stopped.

  Further, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates the full tank state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the low level with respect to the firing board 21TM090 to stop the ball firing from the hit ball firing device. Outputs a full signal. The firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 output from the AND circuit 21TM091 of the firing board 21TM090 is transmitted from the firing board 21TM090 to the firing motor 21TM094. The full signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is input to one of the input sides of an AND circuit 21TM091 mounted on the launch board 21TM090, and a drive signal from the drive signal generation circuit 21TM092 (for driving the launch motor 21TM094). The signal is a signal that serves to supply power from the power supply board.) Is input to the other input side of the AND circuit 21TM091. Then, the firing motor signal of the AND circuit 21TM091 is input to the firing motor 21TM094. That is, while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is outputting the full signal, the output of the firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 is stopped.

   The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a built-in serial communication circuit 21TM380 for inputting / outputting (transmitting / receiving) signals through serial communication with the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, a connection between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is established between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuits 21TM505 and 21TM380. In order to perform confirmation, signals (prize ball request signal, received ACK signal) are exchanged (transmitted / received) at regular intervals (for example, 1 second). That is, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a signal (prize ball request signal in this embodiment) for confirming the connection at regular intervals via the serial communication circuit 21TM505, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 When the prize ball request signal is received from the game control microcomputer 100, the acknowledgment signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, specific data is added to the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal, so that the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can transmit and receive the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal. It is configured to exchange specific data with the device. For example, when a prize is generated, the game control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out by changing a predetermined bit of a prize ball request signal, and sets the prize for which the setting has been made. The ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 completes the prize ball payout operation, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the data indicating the end of the prize ball by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and transmits the set received ACK signal to a game. It is transmitted to the control microcomputer 100. Further, when a predetermined error (error such as lending, filling up the ball, running out of ball, etc.) occurs, the data indicating the content of the error is set by changing the predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the setting is performed. The received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The specific signal exchange between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 by serial communication will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 22-22 and FIGS.

   The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits, via the output port 21TM372b, a prize ball information signal indicating the number of prize balls paid out and a ball lending number signal indicating the number of lending balls to a terminal board (an external terminal board for a frame and an external terminal board for a board). Is output to 21TM160. Although a driver circuit is provided outside the output port 21TM372b, it is omitted in FIG. 22B.

  Further, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs an error signal to the error display LED 21TM374 using a 7-segment LED via the output port 21TM372c. Further, a signal for instructing turning on / off is output to prize ball LED21TM053 and ball out LED21TM054 via output port 21TM372b. The detection signal from the error release switch 21TM375 for releasing the error state is input to the input port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037. The error release switch 21TM375 is used to release an error state by software reset.

  Further, a drive signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 to the payout motor 21TM289 is transmitted to the payout motor 21TM289 in the payout mechanism of the ball payout device 21TM097 via the output port 21TM372a and the relay board 21TM072. Although a driver circuit (motor drive circuit) is provided outside the output port 21TM372a, it is omitted in FIG. 22-3.

  A card unit control microcomputer is mounted on the card unit 21TM050 installed adjacent to the gaming machine. Further, the card unit 21TM050 is provided with a usable indicator lamp, a connecting stand direction indicator, a card insertion indicator lamp, and a card insertion slot. To the interface board (relay board) 21TM066, a frequency display LED 21TM060, a ball lending enable LED 21TM061, a ball lending switch 21TM062, and a return switch 21TM063 are connected.

  From the interface board 21TM066, the card unit 21TM050 is supplied with a ball rental switch signal indicating that the ball rental switch 21TM062 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 21TM063 has been operated in response to the operation of the player. . Further, a card balance display signal indicating the balance of the prepaid card and a ball lending permission display signal are given from the card unit 21TM050 to the interface board 21TM066. Between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037, a connection signal (VL signal), a unit operation signal (BRDY signal), a ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), a ball lending completion signal (EXS signal), and a pachinko machine operation signal ( PRDY signal) is transmitted and received via the input port 21TM372f and the output port 21TM372d. An interface board 21TM066 is interposed between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037. Therefore, a signal such as a connection signal (VL signal) is transmitted and received between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037 via the interface board 21TM066, as shown in FIG.

  When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 outputs a PRDY signal to the card unit 21TM050. When the power is turned on, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a VL signal. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines the connection state / non-connection state of the card unit 21TM050 based on the input state of the VL signal. When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch is operated to input the ball lending switch signal, the microcomputer for controlling the card unit outputs a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the microcomputer for controlling the card unit outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 raises the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050, and when detecting the fall of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050, drives the payout motor 21TM289 to give a predetermined number of loaned balls to the player. Pay out. When the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 lowers the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050. Thereafter, under the condition that the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 is not in the ON state, when a payout command signal is received from the game control microcomputer 100, the prize ball payout control is executed.

  The power supply voltage AC24V used in the card unit 21TM050 is supplied from the payout control board 21TM037. That is, power supply from the power supply board to the card unit 21TM050 is performed via the payout control board 21TM037 and the interface board 21TM066. In this example, a fuse for protecting the card unit 21TM050 is provided in a 24V power supply line for the card unit 21TM050 provided in the interface board 21TM066, and a voltage higher than a predetermined voltage is supplied to the card unit 21TM050. Is prevented.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the jackpot winning probability (payout rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in a special symbol normal process of a special symbol process process to be described later, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) corresponding to the set value, the winning probability (winning rate) of the big hit is changed. . The set value is made up of six steps of 1 to 6, where 6 is the highest payout rate, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases.

  FIGS. 22A to 22F are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables corresponding to the respective set values. The display result determination table is a set of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In each of the display result determination tables, the variable special figure designating buffer is 1 (first), that is, the first special symbol is the target of the variable display, and the variable special figure designating buffer is 2 (second). That is, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is subjected to the variable display, the determination value of the big hit is set.

  As shown in FIG. 22-4 (A), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1, the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. , The jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/300) than when the set values are “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, and “6”. ing. Further, when the variable special figure designating buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designating buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is also the target of the variable display, the big hit is won with the same probability (1/300) as the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 22-4 (B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2 and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”. The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280) than in a certain case. Further, when the variable special figure designating buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designating buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is also the subject of variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is the subject of variable display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 22C, when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”. The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280) than in the case of "2". Further, when the variable special figure designating buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designating buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is also the subject of variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is the subject of variable display.

  As shown in FIG. 22D, when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 4 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is “1”. The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/250) than in the case of "2" or "3". Further, when the variable special figure designating buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designating buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is also the target of the variable display, the big hit is won with the same probability (1/250) as the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 22E, when using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 5, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is “1”, The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/235) than in the case of "2", "3", and "4". Further, when the variable special figure designating buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designating buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is also the subject of variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/235) as the case where the first special symbol is the subject of variable display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 22F, when using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 5, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is “1”. The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/220) than in the case of "2", "3", "4", and "5". Further, when the variable special figure designating buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designating buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is also the target of the variable display, the big hit is won with the same probability (1/220) as the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

  That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and determines whether the value of MR1 corresponds to one of the big hits shown in FIGS. If it matches the hit determination value, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit F). That is, the jackpot winning is determined with a probability according to the set value. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 22-4 (A) to (F) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. To determine whether or not to make a big hit means to determine whether or not to control to the big hit gaming state, but to stop the symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. It is also to decide whether to make a big hit symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit by using the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 22-4 (A) to (F). Provided separately, the jackpot determination is performed by using a common table for the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variable special figure designation buffer. Is also good.

  In the present embodiment, a total of six setting values 1 to 6 are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 May be 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

  Here, a description will be given of the display of the total of the game balls and the ratio of the accessory on the main board 11 of the present embodiment.

  The main board 11 has information on winning of a game, for example, the number of prize balls by winning a first starting winning opening (navel), the number of winning balls by winning a second starting winning opening (electric chew), a large winning opening. The number of prize balls and the total number of prize balls due to winning in the (Attacker) are input, the number of firing balls is totaled, and the display monitor 21TM029 displays the number of prize balls in the total winning port (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. Percentage (%), the percentage of the total prize balls, and the percentage of the total number of prize balls due to the prize in the second starting winning opening (Deng Chu) and the total number of prize balls in the total winning prize ball (Attacker) A base ratio (%), which is a ratio of a certain combination (%) and a ratio of the total number of award balls to the number of game balls launched, is displayed. The repetition ratio is the proportion of the total number of prize balls occupied by the number of prize balls (the number of continuous character-acquired balls described below) due to winning in the big winning opening (attacker). The winning combination is the number of winning balls in the second starting winning opening (electric chew) and the winning number of balls in the large winning opening (attacker) out of the total number of winning balls (the following number of acquired balls). Is the percentage that is accounted for. The base is the ratio of the number of game balls launched to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls (the total number of balls obtained below) is calculated based on the number of prize balls by winning in the special winning opening (attacker), the number of prize balls by winning in the second starting winning opening (electric chew), (Attacker) and the total number of prize balls by winning a prize port (first start prize port, general prize port) other than the second start prize port (electric chute). The special winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are variable characters, and the passing ratio of the game ball varies, so that the expected winning ratio of the game ball varies. is there. The winning openings (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than the large winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are fixed auditoriums, and the passing width of the game ball is fixed. As a result, the expected winning percentage of the game balls is a fixed character.

  As a method of totaling and calculating information on winnings in the game, regarding the connection ratio and the winning ratio, the winning balls by winning the first starting winning opening (navel) and the general winning opening (sode) in the number of winning balls of 6000 pieces. The number of balls (general prize balls), the number of prize balls by winning in the second starting winning opening (electric chew), the number of ordinary electric prize balls (electric chew prize balls), and the winning in the large winning opening (attacker) The number of special electric prize balls (attacker prize balls), which is the number of prize balls, is totaled. The total is defined as one set, and the connection ratio (%) and the winning combination (%) for 10 sets, that is, 60000 pieces are calculated. The number of prize balls (number of general prize balls), the number of ordinary electric prize balls (number of electric chu prize balls), the number of special electric The number of role prize balls (the number of attacker prize balls) is recorded in a ring buffer provided for each set value, has a recording capacity of at least 11 sets, and is updated for each set. ing. In other words, the storage of 11 sets of 6000 pieces is stored in a considerable amount (for example, for several bytes), and the total ratio (%) and the winning combination (%) of the totals can be calculated. As for the base, the number of launched game balls with respect to the number of 60000 prize balls is totaled. The total is taken as one set, and the ratio (base (%)) of 60,000 prize balls to the number of launched game balls is calculated.

  The display monitor 21TM029 displays the base ratio (%), the combination ratio (%), the total connection ratio (%), the combination ratio (%), and the last calculated 6000 prize balls (6000). The base 1 (%)) and the base (base 2 (%)) calculated based on the immediately preceding 60000 prize balls can be switched and displayed at predetermined time intervals (for example, 5 seconds). That is, six displays are switched and displayed by one display means. In this case, it takes 30 seconds to complete the display, but the number of prize balls due to winning in the first starting winning opening (navel) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are counted as the game progresses. The number of prize balls due to winning and the number of prize balls due to winning a large winning opening (attacker) will change. Then, for example, if the number of winning balls won after displaying the connection ratio (%) for 6000 pieces is reflected in the winning percentage (%) for 60000 pieces displayed thereafter, for example, There is a possibility that a discrepancy occurs between the repetition ratio (%) and the role ratio (%) for 60000 pieces. Therefore, the number of award balls by winning the first start winning opening (navel), the number of award balls by winning the second starting winning opening (electric chew), the number of award balls by winning a large winning opening (attacker), the award ball If the total number is input and tabulated at a predetermined timing in the switching display (for example, a display timing of the connection ratio (%) for 6000 pieces), such a discrepancy can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, a storage area for storing information related to the winning of a game is provided for each set value, and includes a general winning prize ball, a first starting winning prize ball, a normal electric winning prize ball, and a special electric winning. The prize balls, the total prize balls, and the total hits are stored in a storage area (ring buffer) corresponding to the set value. For this reason, the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base in the present embodiment can be individually calculated for each set value.

  In the following, as an example of the calculation method, the total number of prize balls is 60,000, and the number of prize balls by winning in the second starting winning opening (denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning in the large winning opening (attacker) is described. A method of calculating the ratio of the bonuses (ratio (%)) when the total number of the bonuses acquired balls is 42,000 will be described. In the following description, the total number of acquired balls refers to the total cumulative number of game media (prize balls) paid out from the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, the number of the accessory acquisition balls refers to the cumulative number of game media paid out when the game media wins the attacker and the electric chew. In addition, the number of continuous bonus item acquisition balls refers to the cumulative number of game media paid out by winning the game media to the attacker. The hit total is the cumulative number of game media hit into the pachinko gaming machine 1 until the number of prize balls reaches 60000. Therefore, the connection ratio can be obtained by the following equation (1). The winning combination can be obtained by the following equation (2). The base can be obtained by the following equation (3).

  Connection ratio = [Number of consecutive bonus ball acquisitions / Total number of acquisitions] × 100 (1)

  Role ratio = [(number of consecutive acquired ball + number of acquired ball) / total acquired number] × 100 (2)

  Base = [60000 (total number of prize balls) / total hits] × 100 (3)

  When the total number of prize balls is 60000 and the number of obtained bonus balls is 42,000, the bonus ratio is obtained as 0.70 (three digits after the decimal point are cut off) by dividing 42,000 by 60000. However, since the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot perform calculations below the decimal point, calculations using the following method are required.

  First, the first calculation method will be described. In the first calculation method, first, the number of the accessory acquisition balls is multiplied by 100 to be 4200000. Then, this 4200000 is divided by 60000. This requires 70 as the quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 70%. That is, by multiplying the dividend by 100, the calculation result up to two digits after the decimal point can be obtained. Here, when calculating the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point, the calculation result may be multiplied by 1000.

  Next, a second calculation method will be described. In the second calculation method, first, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 to obtain 600. Then, 42000 is divided by the 600. This requires 70 as the quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 70%. That is, by dividing the divisor by 100, the calculation result up to two decimal places can be obtained. Here, when calculating the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point, the calculation result may be divided by 1000.

  In the above example, the total number of prize balls is 60000, but a three-byte area is provided as an area for storing the total number of prize balls in order to calculate a long-lived bonus ratio. That is, in this example, 00EA60h is stored in the 3-byte storage area. Similarly, 00A410h is also stored in the storage area of 3 bytes for the number of the obtained ball.

  Here, the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can perform only operation between values of a maximum of 2 bytes. Therefore, the lower one byte may be truncated to facilitate the operation.

  Here, a third calculation method which is performed by simplifying the above-described second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, in order to facilitate the calculation by the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the lower one byte 60h is rounded down to 00EA60h of the total number of prize balls, and the total number of prize balls is 00EAh, that is, 234 is calculated in decimal notation. Similarly, the lower one byte of 10h is discarded from the 00A410h of the number of the acquired ball, and the number of the acquired ball is 00A4h, that is, 164 is calculated in decimal notation.

  Then, similarly to the second calculation method, 2 is calculated by dividing the total number of prize balls by 100 (273/100). Then, 156 is divided by 2 to obtain 78 as a quotient. From the 78 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 78%.

  In the third calculation method, while the calculation by the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is facilitated, an error of + 12% occurs. However, when both the total number of prize balls and the number of winning ball obtained are 10 times, the error is + 1%. That is, as the period for calculating the accessory ratio becomes longer, the error is reduced and approximates the original value.

The board case 21TM201 is formed of a material having a light-transmitting property so that the main board 11 and the display monitor 21TM029 are visible. The board case 21TM201 has a hole (not shown) through which a wiring connector connected to the main board 11 is inserted, and a heat radiating hole for releasing heat of electric components of the main board 11. The display monitor 21TM029 provided on the main board 11 is arranged at a position where the heat radiating hole is not directly in front. Therefore, the visibility of the display monitor 21TM029 is not blocked by the heat radiating holes. Here, “directly in front” means directly in front of the main board 11 as a viewpoint, and means between an employee or the like who wants to view the main board 11 and the main board 11.
Here, the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can perform only operation between values of a maximum of 2 bytes. Therefore, the lower one byte may be truncated to facilitate the operation.

  Here, a third calculation method which is performed by simplifying the above-described second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, in order to facilitate the calculation by the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the lower one byte 60h is rounded down to 00EA60h of the total number of prize balls, and the total number of prize balls is 00EAh, that is, 234 is calculated in decimal notation. Similarly, the lower one byte of 10h is discarded from the 00A410h of the number of the acquired ball, and the number of the acquired ball is 00A4h, that is, 164 is calculated in decimal notation.

  Then, similarly to the second calculation method, 2 is calculated by dividing the total number of prize balls by 100 (273/100). Then, 156 is divided by 2 to obtain 78 as a quotient. From the 78 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 78%.

  In addition, a storage area in which information on game winning is stored (ring buffer, 10 sets total buffer (sum of information on game winning stored in a ring buffer provided with 10 counters of maximum 2 bytes), award ball The total number buffer is not initialized when the reset button is operated, and may be stored continuously. The ring buffer will be further described later. It should be noted that the stored value of the checksum is calculated and initialization is performed when an abnormality is detected. Initialization of the storage area for storing information related to the winning of a game when an event that cannot occur as a situation is detected, such as when the value of the number of consecutive bonus balls obtained is larger than the value of the number of balls obtained. Processing may be performed. Further, an error display, a warning display, or the like may be performed without performing the initialization processing, or an error display or a warning display may be performed, or the initialization processing may be performed after the display. The error display and the warning display will be further described later.

  The calculation of the winning combination (%) is, for example, assuming that the total number of acquired balls is 34321 and the number of acquired bonus balls is 19876, the divisor is divided by 34321 for 19876, and the ratio is calculated. 19876/34321 = 0.57912... It is calculated that the winning combination (%) is about 57.9%. When performing calculations in the game control microcomputer 100, calculations at the decimal point must be avoided, and therefore, are replaced by the following formulas. In the division of 19876/34321, the denominator 34321 is divided by 100, and the decimal point is truncated to be 19876/343 = 57.9475. Since the fractional part is rounded down, it is calculated to be 57% of the duty ratio (%) and is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. In this example, the value calculated by the accurate calculation is different from the value calculated by the error in the display. There will be no.

  The minimum value in 16 bits is 32768 (the value other than the value of the most significant bit is 0), and the value with the maximum error is when the total number of acquired balls and the number of accessory acquired balls are 32799. When this is calculated by the above method, 32799/32799 = 100%, and when it is replaced with the calculation by the game control microcomputer 100, 32799/327 = 100.3%, resulting in + 0.3% error. When the calculation is performed with the decimal point truncated, for example, the accurate value is 69.9%, and when the value calculated by the game control microcomputer is 70.1%, the display is changed from 69% to 70% by 1%. Although it is conceivable that an error of% is displayed, the combination ratio (%) (or the connection ratio (%)) can be displayed with a very small error on the display of the error of 1%.

  In addition, when the above calculation method is used, the total number of obtained balls is divided by 100, so that the calculation cannot be performed when the total number of obtained balls is less than 100. Further, when the value is less than 32768, the error gradually increases. If it is less than 10,000, the error may exceed 1% and may be even larger. That is, the error increases as the total number of acquired balls decreases. Therefore, until the total number of acquired balls equal to or more than a specific number (for example, 32768 which is the minimum value of 16 bits) is counted by the counter, the display ratio (%) and the connection ratio (%) are not displayed on the display monitor. Even if the display is performed, the possibility that the error may be large may be notified by emitting a dedicated LED, outputting a notification sound, or blinking the displayed value.

  Further, the display monitor 21TM029 displays the combination ratio (%), the connection ratio (%), and the base (%) on seven segments, and switches each value every predetermined period (for example, every five seconds). To display. In this case, for example, while the winning ratio (%) is displayed for 5 seconds, an event occurs in which a game medium newly wins on the electric chute or the attacker, and the value calculated accordingly changes the ratio ( %), The value of the winning combination (%) may be different from the value of the consecutive winning (%). For this reason, it is preferable that the combination ratio (%) and the connection ratio (%) are calculated within the same interrupt and the calculated values are sequentially displayed.

  Also, when the numerical value that can be displayed in seven segments is two digits (for example, when two seven segments are provided), 100% cannot be displayed as 100. In this case, 99 may be displayed instead of 100. In the display monitor 21TM029 shown in FIG. 22-5 (A), a numerical value can be displayed in the lower two digits, but in this case, the numerical value may be displayed without using the upper two digits. Alternatively, a numerical value may be displayed in a part of the upper two digits under a specific condition.

  In the present embodiment, an example has been described in which the sensors provided in the attacker and the electric chew each detect that a game medium has won, and the respective award balls are individually counted based on the detection result. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and uses a sensor provided after a discharge path for discharging a game medium that has won an attacker and a game medium that has won a power chute, and uses a sensor provided after the merging to determine the detection result. On the basis of this, the number of obtained accessory balls and the number of obtained continuous accessory balls may be totaled.

  Hereinafter, the display of the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base will be described more specifically. In the present embodiment, the main board 11 is provided on the back side of the game board 2 (see FIG. 22C). On the back side of the game board 2, in addition to the main board 11, peripheral boards such as the effect control board 12 are also provided.

  The RAM 102 on the main board 11 includes a gate passing number counter, a first starting winning number counter, a second starting winning number counter, a first general winning number counter, a second general winning number counter, a third general winning number counter, and a fourth general winning number counter. A general winning number counter and a large winning number counter are provided. In the present embodiment, the form in which the number of winnings of the special winning opening (attacker) is counted by the special winning number counter is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these first large winnings are not limited to this. A first grand prize counter for counting the number of prizes to the mouth and a second grand prize counter for counting the number of prizes to the second grand prize are separately provided, and the number of prizes to the first grand prize is determined. And the number of winnings in the second grand prize mouth may be separately counted, and the respective winning numbers may be summed up to be the number of winnings in the attacker.

  The gate passage number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the gate switch 21. The first start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first start port switch 22A. The second start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the second start port switch 22B. The first general winning number counter to the fourth general winning number counter are counters for counting the number of game balls detected by the first general winning opening switch to the fourth general winning opening switch. The large winning number counter is a counter for counting the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23.

  A clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is connected to the power supply board shown in FIG. 22-3. The clear switch 21TM052 is arranged on the rear side surface of the game board 2 at a position where an employee or the like cannot easily operate it. By operating the clear switch 21TM052, the data used for the connection ratio and the combination stored in the RAM 102 described later is cleared. The clear switch is a switch which is operated when a situation arises in which the calculation of the ratio or the combination of the ratios has to be performed again, for example, when a failure occurs in the calculation of the ratio of the ratio or the combination of the ratios. For this reason, this switch does not need to be operated when collecting data for calculating a normal connection ratio or a winning combination. When the clear switch 21TM052 is operated, a clear switch operation signal is transmitted to the main board 11 in addition to clearing the data.

  As described above, the main board 11 is provided with the RTC 106, and the RTC 106 can detect the current time. The RTC 106 can measure a predetermined time, elapsed time, and the like by performing initial settings. In the present embodiment, the RTC 106 can measure the business hours of the game hall.

  The main board 11 is housed in a board case 21TM201 as shown in FIG. The caulking pin 21TM011B is attached to the board case 21TM201. With the provision of the caulking pins 21TM011B, the main board 11 is completely sealed in the board case 21TM201, and illegal acts on the main board 11 are prevented. The board case 21TM201 is a swaged board case (hereinafter also referred to as a "swaging board case").

  The display monitor 21TM029 is provided on the main board 11. Further, a sealing seal 21TM011S for proving that the main substrate 11 is sealed is attached to the substrate case 21TM201. The sealing seal 21TM011S is affixed, for example, across the removed portion of the board case 21TM201. The seal 21TM011S is arranged at a position distant from the main substrate 11, and is arranged at a position different from a position where visibility of the display monitor 21TM029 is blocked, such as directly in front of the display monitor 21TM029. As described above, the display monitor 21TM029 is arranged at a position which is not hidden by the seal 21TM011S.

  The display monitor 21TM029 includes a first display unit 21TM029A, a second display unit 21TM029B, a third display unit 21TM029C, a fourth display unit 21TM029D, and a fifth display unit 21TM029E. Each of the first display unit 21TM029A to the fifth display unit 21TM029E is composed of seven segments composed of seven segments that draw the character “8” and dots arranged at the lower right side of the seven segments. The first display unit 21TM029A to the fifth display unit 21TM029E can be turned on and blinked in various colors, for example, red, blue, green, yellow, white, and the like. In addition, these colors can be displayed in different colors or so-called rainbows while being changed in a very short cycle.

  The items of display Nos. 1 to 6 shown in FIG. 22-5 (B) are displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. In the first display unit 21TM029A of the first digit, the set values (1 to 6) totaled and a RAM clear notification (“C”) indicating that the RAM clear executed after the processing of the setting change mode by the CPU 103 is completed. ) Is displayed, and the totaling period is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B of the second digit and the third display unit 21TM029C of the third digit, the fourth display unit 21TM029D of the fourth digit and the fifth display unit of the fifth digit. 21TM029E displays a numerical value as a percentage. In display No. 1, a short-term connection ratio is displayed, and in display No. 2, a short-term winning ratio is displayed. In the display No. 3, the total ratio is displayed, and in the display No. 4, the total winning combination is displayed. Display No. 5 displays the base (base 1) calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls, and display No. 6 displays the base (base 2) calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls. Is done.

  Here, the short term means a period in which the number of awarded balls (acquired balls) is 6,000. The period in which the total sum is obtained means the total period after the calculation of the ratio and the winning ratio is started, or the total period after the calculation of the ratio and the winning ratio is once reset.

  In the above example, the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base are calculated without depending on the gaming state, but may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the repetition ratio may be a percentage of the total number of prize balls occupied by the number of prize balls due to winning in the special winning opening during the jackpot game state. The winning combination is defined as a ratio of the total number of prize balls to the total number of prize balls due to winning in the second starting winning opening in the high base state and the number of winning balls due to winning in the large winning opening in the jackpot game state. Is also good. Further, the base may be calculated separately for the low base state and the high base state.

  When the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed, “y6.” Is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C. “Y7.” Is displayed on the display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C. When the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term connection ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E, and the short-term combination ratio of the display No. 2 is displayed. In this case, the short-term winning combination is displayed as a percentage (in%) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the total cumulative ratio of the display No. 3 is displayed, “A6.” Is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C, and when the total cumulative combination ratio of the display No. 4 is displayed, “A7.” Is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C. When the total cumulative connection ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative connection ratio is displayed as a percentage (in%) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E, and the total cumulative combination of display No. 4 is displayed. When the ratio is displayed, the total cumulative winning ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, “bL.” Is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C. When the base 2 of the display No. 4 is displayed, the second display unit is displayed. “B6.” Is displayed on the 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C. When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, the total cumulative connection ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E, and the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed. In this case, the total cumulative winning combination is displayed as a percentage (in%) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  In calculating the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base, the main board 11 enters the large winning opening (attacker), the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening. The number of entered game balls and the number of game balls discharged from the outlet are counted. In the main processing, the CPU 103 controls the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B, the count switch 23, and the first to fourth general winning opening switches to the fourth general winning opening switch and the outlet switch 21TM070. A switch process for checking the state of each switch (the presence or absence of a detection signal) is performed.

  In this switch processing, it is specified which entry area the game ball has entered based on the detection signal output from each switch. When the detection signal is output from the gate switch 21, the value of the gate passage number counter is added, and when the detection signals are output from the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, The value of the first start winning number counter and the value of the second start winning number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the count switch 23, the value of the large winning number counter is added, and the first general winning opening switch, When the detection signal is output from the second general winning opening switch, the third general winning opening switch, and the fourth general winning opening switch, the first general winning number counter, the second general winning number counter, and the third general winning number. The value of the counter and the fourth general winning number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the outlet switch 21TM070, the value of the number-of-inserts counter is added, thereby obtaining each entry area. Aggregate of entering the number of game balls (the winning number of game balls to each of the winning openings). The value of each counter is stored in the RAM 102.

  As described above, the step of counting the number of game balls entering each entry area is also executed in a series of processing for confirming the state of the switch corresponding to each entry area (switch state confirmation processing. (Included in the switch process), it is possible to count the number of game balls entering each entry area without having to execute a separate counting program, that is, without causing a problem of insufficient capacity due to an increase in the number of execution programs. It has become.

  The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the number of prize balls by winning in each winning opening based on the totaled number of game balls winning in each winning opening, and stores the calculated number of winning balls in the RAM 102 for each winning opening. Let it. The number of prize balls by winning a game ball is calculated by multiplying the number of game balls paid out by one prize to the winning opening by the number of winnings to the winning opening. The number of prize balls obtained by winning game balls is determined in advance for each winning port.

  As shown in FIG. 22-6, the number of prize balls for each winning opening classified here is a general winning opening prize ball (the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening (sode)). ), First starting winning opening prize ball (winning prize ball at the first starting winning opening (navel)), ordinary electric prize winning ball (winning prize ball in electric chew), special electric winning prize ball (attacker Prize balls). The RAM 102 also stores the total number of prize balls and the number of hit game balls. Although the CPU 103 separately counts the number of game balls won to the general winning opening and the number of game balls won to the first starting winning opening, the number of game balls winning to the general winning opening and the first starting are calculated. The number of game ball winnings to the winning opening may be summed up. Further, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize ball and the number of prize balls of the first starting winning prize ball are separately calculated. The number of prize balls may be calculated together.

  The RAM 102 includes a ring buffer and an active buffer for storing the number of awarded balls and the number of hits. The ring buffer includes ten first storage areas to tenth storage areas each having a maximum 2-byte counter for storing the number of winning balls in each winning opening for each of the 6,000 winning balls. As described above, the ring buffer has a storage area of a predetermined unit (up to 2 bytes). The active buffer has a zero storage area including a maximum 2-byte counter for storing the number of prize balls by winning in each winning opening for each of the 6,000 prize balls. In the 0th storage area, the number of prize balls for each winning opening that increases as the game progresses is added. The eleven storage areas from the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area can store 256 × 256 = 65536 data, and up to 6000 data can be stored with a margin.

  Further, the RAM 102 is provided with a storage area for each of the winning prize holes, the total number of prize balls (for 10 sets) and the number of hits stored in the first storage area to the tenth storage area, and the total sum. I have. The storage area for the total of 10 sets and the total total is composed of a counter of a maximum of 3 bytes. Therefore, 256 × 256 × 256 = 16777216 data can be stored, and up to 60000 data can be stored with a margin. I can remember.

  Further, the RAM 102 has an association ratio storage area for storing the combination ratio and the connection ratio of 10 sets and the total total, a base of 10 sets (base 2), and a base of the previous 10 sets (base 1). And a base storage area for storing The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the winning combination and the total ratio of the 10 sets and the total total based on the number of prize balls based on the winning number of the game balls to each of the winning ports of the 10 sets and the total total. In addition, the combination ratio and the total ratio are stored in a ratio combination ratio storage area. Each of the connection ratio storage areas for storing the combination ratios and the connection ratios of the 10 sets and the total total is composed of a counter of a maximum of 1 byte. When the combination ratio and the connection ratio of the 10 sets and the total total are stored in, for example, integers, they can be stored with a margin by a maximum 1-byte counter.

  Further, the CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the base of 10 sets by the number of hits of the game balls into the winning holes of 10 sets for each of the winning sets, and calculates the base of the 10 sets (base 2) and the last time. The base (base 1) calculated from the number of hits of the game balls to the winning ports for each of 10 sets for each winning port is stored in the base storage area. When the bases 1 and 2 are stored as integers, for example, they can be stored with a margin by a maximum 1-byte counter.

  Here, the memory space of the CPU 103 on the main board 11 will be described. FIG. 22-7 is a diagram showing a memory map of the CPU on the main board. The CPU 103 has a memory space for accessing the above-described internal registers, the ROM 101, the RAM 102, and the like. More specifically, as shown in the memory map of FIG. 22-7, the address / data signal lines of the ROM 101 correspond to the ROM area of the memory space (in the present embodiment, 0000H to 2FFFH (H indicates a hexadecimal number. 0000H to 2FBFH, and 2FC0H to 2FFFH are assigned to a program management area), and the CPU 103 reads data from the ROM 101 by designating the ROM area. In the present embodiment, the ROM area is managed by dividing it into eight areas of a first area to an eighth area, and the first area is an area starting from 0000H.

  Further, the address / data signal lines of the built-in register are allocated to a register area (FE00H to FEBFH in the present embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 reads data from the built-in register and transfers data to the register via this register area. Is written.

  The address / data signal lines of the RAM 102 are allocated to RWM areas (F000H to F3FFH in the present embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 specifies the RWM area to read data from the RAM 102 or to read data from the RAM 102. Write data. The other areas of the memory space (in the present embodiment, 3000H to EFFFH, F400H to FDFFH, and FEC0H to FFFFH) are unused areas.

  As shown in FIG. 22-8, a RAM area corresponding to the storage area of the RAM 102 (in this embodiment, a 16 Kbyte area of 0000H to 2FFFH) is a RAM control area, an unused area, a RAM data area, and other areas. It is composed of The storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM control area stores instruction data (opcode) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of instructions executed by the CPU 103 and supplementary data (operands) necessary for the CPU 103 to execute each instruction. The data for the configured control program (which may be simply referred to as control program data) is temporarily stored, and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM data area includes reference data referred to by the control program. (For example, the various lottery data described above) are temporarily stored.

  Further, data used for displaying the connection ratio and the winning combination is temporarily stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the unused area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other areas. For example, the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area is provided with a storage area for storing the total sum of the number of winning balls for each winning opening and a storage area for the total hand combination ratio. The storage areas of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other areas include an active buffer having a zero storage area for each winning opening, a ring buffer having first to tenth storage areas, and the number of prize balls (10 sets) for each winning opening. ), And a storage area for 10 sets. In the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the unused area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other area, data having different subroutine start addresses are stored.

  In the present embodiment, 1-byte (8-bit) data can be stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to each address of the RAM area, and the above-described data (instruction data, supplementary data, reference data, etc.) can be stored. , Management data) is data having a number of bytes exceeding 1 byte (for example, 2 bytes), the data is divided and stored for each byte in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to a plurality of continuous addresses in the RAM control area. are doing.

  The main board 11 controls the display monitor 21TM029 to display the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base. Here, the main board 11 performs control to sequentially display a plurality of items. FIG. 22A is a time chart illustrating display times of items displayed on the accessory ratio display device. As shown in FIG. 22A, when the display on the display monitor 21TM029 is started, first, the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed. The display of the short-term connection ratio of display No. 1 is displayed in green. In the display of the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1, as shown in FIG. 22-9 (B-1), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and “y” is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. Is displayed, and the character "6." is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. Further, the short-term ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E. For example, when the short-term connection ratio is 41%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character “1.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the display of display No. 1 is continued for 5 seconds, the short-term role ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. The display of the short-term connection ratio of display No. 2 is displayed in red. In the display of the short-term role ratio of the display No. 2, as shown in FIG. 22-9 (B-2), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and “y” is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. Is displayed, and the character "7." is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. Further, the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E display the short-term role ratio. For example, when the short-term role ratio is 63%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character “3.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the display of display No. 2 continues for 5 seconds, the total cumulative connection ratio of display No. 3 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative connection ratio of the display No. 3 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative connection ratio of the display No. 3, as shown in FIG. 22-9 (B-3), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and “A” is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. Is displayed, and the character "6." is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. The fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E display the total cumulative connection ratio. For example, when the total cumulative connection ratio is 58%, the character “5.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character “8.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the display of the display No. 3 continues for 5 seconds, the total total winning combination of the display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative combination ratio of the display No. 4 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative winning combination of the display No. 4, as shown in FIG. 22-9 (B-4), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and “A” is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. Is displayed, and the character "7." is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. The total display ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E. For example, when the total cumulative combination ratio is 68%, the character “6.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character “8.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the display of the display No. 4 continues for 5 seconds, the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed as shown in FIG. 22-9 (B-5). The display of the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 1 of the display No. 5, as shown in FIG. 22-9 (B-5), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and “b” is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. The character is displayed, and the character “L.” is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. The base 1 calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E. For example, when the base 1 is 40%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character “0.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

When the display of the display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed as shown in FIG. 22-9 (B-6). The display of the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 2 of the display No. 6, as shown in FIG. 22-9 (B-6), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and “b” is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. The character is displayed, and the character “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. In addition, the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E have
The base 2 calculated based on the immediately preceding 60000 prize balls is displayed. For example, when the base 2 is 42%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character “2” is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  Then, when the display of the display No. 5 is continued for 5 seconds, the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed as shown in FIG. The short-term ratio of display No. 1 is displayed. Thereafter, the short-term connection ratio of display No. 1 to the display of base 2 of display No. 6 are sequentially displayed every 5 seconds. In the display color, only the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1 is green, and the short-term role ratio of the display No. 2 to the base 2 of the display No. 5 are red. As described above, the display monitor 21TM029 switches and displays the short-term ratio, the short-term ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 every 5 seconds.

  Further, the display of the short-term ratio, short-term position ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative ratio, base 1 and base 2 is indicated by a display changeover switch 21TM030 as shown in FIGS. Based on the operation, the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative connection ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the display of the base 1 and the base 2 when the set value is “1”, and the display when the set value is “2” Short-term ratio, short-term position ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative ratio, display of base 1, base 2, short-term ratio when the set value is "3", short-term role ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative It is possible to sequentially change the display of the winning combination, the base 1, and the base 2. If the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated during the display of the short-term ratio, the short-term role ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 when the set value is “1”, The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is updated to “2”, and the short term ratio, the short term position ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative position displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E are displayed. The numerical values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the value of the set value “2”.

  When the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated during the display of the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative connection ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 when the set value is “2”, The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is updated to “3”, and the short-term ratio, the short-term position ratio, the total cumulative ratio, and the total cumulative position displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E are displayed. The numerical values of the ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the value of the set value “3”.

  When the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated during the display of the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative connection ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 when the set value is “3”, The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is updated to “4”, and the short-term ratio, the short-term position ratio, the total cumulative ratio, and the total cumulative position displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E are displayed. The numerical values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the value of the set value “4”.

  When the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated during the display of the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative connection ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 when the set value is "4", The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is updated to “5”, and the short-term ratio, short-term position ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative position displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E are displayed. The numerical values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the value of the set value “5”.

  When the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated during the display of the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative connection ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 when the set value is “5”, The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is updated to “6”, and the short-term ratio, the short-term position ratio, the total cumulative ratio, and the total cumulative position displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E are displayed. The numerical values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the value of the set value “6”.

  When the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated during the display of the short-term ratio, the short-term ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 when the set value is “6”, The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is updated to “1”, and the short-term ratio, the short-term position ratio, the total cumulative ratio, and the total cumulative position displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E are displayed. The numerical values of the ratio, base 1 and base 2 are switched to the set value “1”.

  In the display monitor 21TM029 of the present embodiment, the form in which the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base at each set value can be displayed is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this. May be able to display only one numerical value or only any two numerical values among these connection ratio, combination ratio, and base.

  Further, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, which are information based on the number of awarded balls, are calculated, and the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the history of the number of awarded balls may be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 without calculating the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base. .

  In this embodiment, only the short-term ratio is displayed in red on the display monitor 21TM029, and the short-term ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are displayed in green. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The short-term ratio and the short-term duty ratio, the total cumulative ratio and the total cumulative role ratio are displayed in the same color. It may be displayed in the same color different from the winning combination, the total cumulative connecting ratio, and the total cumulative winning ratio.

  Further, when the total prize balls in the 0th storage area in the active buffer reach the predetermined capacity of 6000, the main board 11 updates the storage in the 0th to 10th storage areas in the ring buffer. Further, the storage unit stores the sum and total accumulated storage areas of the 10 sets and the duty ratio storage area for storing the winning combination and the duty ratio of the 10 sets and the total sum, respectively.

  In updating in the active buffer and the ring buffer, the numerical value stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the 1st storage area of the ring buffer. Further, the numerical values stored in the first to ninth storage areas of the ring buffer are moved to the second to tenth storage areas, respectively. For example, as shown in FIG. 22-10, the prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 0th storage area to the ninth storage area are “27”, “81”, “120”, “36”, “225”, and “87”, respectively. It is assumed that they are "66", "117", "45", and "21". At this time, when the total prize balls in the 0th storage area of the active buffer reach 6000, the prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 1st storage area to the 10th storage area are respectively set to “27” “81” “ 120, "36", "225", "87", "66", "117", "45", and "21". Further, the number of award balls in the 0th storage area is set to “0”, and the number of award balls in the 10th storage area is deleted.

  When updating the number of prize balls stored in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area, the stored number of prize balls may be deleted once, and then the new number of prize balls may be stored. Alternatively, a new prize ball number may be stored by overwriting the stored prize ball number.

  Next, an operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. As shown in FIG. 22-11, when the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 executes a security check process, which is a process for confirming whether or not the contents of the program are valid, and then executes the game control main process from step S21TM1010. Start processing. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S21TM1010). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S21TM1020), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S21TM1030). Next, a wait is performed until the effect control board 12 starts operating (step S21TM1040).

  Then, the CPU 103 initializes the built-in device (eg, initializes a CTC (counter / timer) and a PIO (parallel input / output port), which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) (step S21TM1050). The access state is set (step S21TM1060). In the interrupt mode 2, an address synthesized from a value (1 byte) of a specific register (I register) built in the CPU 103 and an interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is: This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 22-12, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM1110). If the lock switch 21TM051 is not ON (step S21TM1110; NO), the process proceeds to step S21TM1310. If the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM1110; YES), the CPU 103 outputs an output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting switch mounted on the power supply board) 21TM052 input through the input port. ) Is confirmed (step S21TM1120).

  If the ON state is detected in checking the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM1120), the CPU 103 shifts to a setting change mode in which the set value can be changed. . That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, and the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. The processing state is controlled to the setting change mode based on the status.

  Upon transition to the setting change mode, the CPU 103 outputs a setting change corresponding signal from the information output circuit 112 and outputs a security signal (step S21TM1130). Thus, in an external device such as a hall computer that manages game information of each gaming machine, based on the input of the setting change correspondence signal and the security signal, the gaming machine that is the output source of these signals changes the setting. It is possible to specify that the mode is controlled to the mode or the setting confirmation mode described later. Therefore, in the display device provided in the external device, it is possible to notify a gaming machine (for example, a machine number or the like) controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode in a identifiable manner.

  In addition, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command designating the control to the setting change mode as an effect control command for the effect control board 12 (step S21TM1140). The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 can notify that the gaming machine is being controlled to the setting change mode.

  Then, the CPU 103 reads out the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 and displays it on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM1150). Then, the operation waits for the operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 (step S21TM1160) and the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 (step S21TM1180).

  In the operation standby state of the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052, the CPU 103 changes the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 every time the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM1160). (Step S21TM1170). For example, as will be described later, each time a setting change operation is received, a display control is performed in which the displayed set value is increased by one and returned to one after reaching six.

  When the CPU 103 detects the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 in a state of waiting for the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 (YES in step S21TM1180), the CPU 103 changes the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 to The set value is changed to the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM1190). That is, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is overwritten with the displayed set value, thereby fixing the set value. Then, the determined set value (the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM1190).

  In step S21TM1160, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not operated (without determining YES in step S21TM1160), and the lock switch 21TM051 is turned OFF (YES in step S21TM1180). In the case where it is determined), the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 matches the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. The setting value stored in the area is not changed.

  When the processing in step S21TM1200 is executed, the setting change mode ends, and the CPU 103 shifts to the initialization processing in step S21TM1410 shown in FIGS.

  In the state confirmation of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 in the above-described step S21TM1120, when the OFF state is detected (NO in step S21TM1120), the CPU 103 performs the setting for confirming the set value. Move to confirmation mode. That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, but does not satisfy the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. Based on this, the processing state is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

  The CPU 103 outputs a setting change corresponding signal from the information output circuit 112 and outputs a security signal with the transition to the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM1210). Thus, in an external device such as a hall computer that manages game information of each gaming machine, based on the input of the setting change correspondence signal and the security signal, the gaming machine that is the source of these signals changes the setting. It is possible to specify that the mode is controlled to the mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, in the display device provided in the external device, it is possible to notify a gaming machine (for example, a machine number or the like) controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode in a identifiable manner.

  In addition, the CPU 103 transmits, as an effect control command for the effect control board 12, a setting confirmation mode command designating control to the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM1220). The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Accordingly, it is possible to notify the image display device 5 that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

  Then, the CPU 103 reads out the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 and displays it on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM1230). Then, it waits for the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 (step S21TM1240).

  When the CPU 103 detects the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 in the state of waiting for the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 (YES in step S21TM1240), the setting confirmation mode ends, and the CPU 103 executes the processing shown in FIG. The process proceeds to a determination process of whether or not the power-off detection process has been performed in step S21TM1320 shown in FIG.

  When it is determined in step S21TM1110 that the lock switch is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM1110), the CPU 103 executes the clear switch input through the input port as shown in FIG. (Setting switch mounted on the power supply board) The state of the output signal (clear signal) of 21TM052 is confirmed (step S21TM1310).

  When the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not ON (NO in step S21TM1310), the CPU 103 executes power-off detection processing (see FIG. 22-14). It is determined whether or not check data is stored in a predetermined backup area (step S21TM1320).

  In this example, as a case where the process of step S21TM1320 is executed, (1) the setting change is performed based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF when the power is turned on and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also OFF. When the process of step S21TM1320 is immediately executed without shifting to any of the mode and the setting confirmation mode, and (2) when the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF. There is a case in which the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the fact that the processing has been executed, and the processing in step S21TM1320 is executed after the setting confirmation mode ends.

  If the backup data is stored, the CPU 103 checks the data in the backup RAM area (Step S21TM1330). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S21TM1330, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same processing in the power-off detection processing. When the power supply is restored after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should have been saved, and the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on without restoring from the stop of the power supply is executed (NO in step S21TM1330). It is determined and the process proceeds to step S21TM1410).

  If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM1330), CPU 103 performs a game state restoring process (process in steps S21TM1340 and step S21TM1350) for returning game control microcomputer 100 to the state at the time of stopping power supply. More specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 101 is set as a pointer (step S21TM1340), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in a work area (an area in the RAM 102), and step S21TM1360 is set. (Step S21TM1350). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. In the backup setting table, initialization data is set for an area of the work area that may be initialized. As a result of the processing of steps S21TM1340 and S21TM1350, the saved contents of the work area that must not be initialized remain. The parts that must not be initialized include, for example, data indicating the game state before power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probable change flag, time saving flag, restriction member state designation flag, initialized flag, etc.), output of output port An area where the state is stored (output port buffer), a part in which data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set, and the like. The set value storage area (the area in which the determined set value is stored) is also included in the part that must not be initialized. Further, for each set value, an area in which each total value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base is stored is also included in the part that must not be initialized.

  Next, the CPU 103 reads the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (Step S21TM1360). In a later-described game control timer interrupt process, a big hit determination in the special symbol process process (step S21TM1690) is executed based on the set value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits a backup command (command at the time of restoration) as a command at the time of restoration of power supply (step S21TM1370). The effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the power supply has been restored based on the data at the time of stopping the power supply based on the reception of the backup command (command at the time of restoration). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the backup command, in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9, and the like, the power supply is restored from the power cut based on the data at the time of stopping the power supply. It is possible to notify that. Next, CPU 103 executes a setting command transmission process of step S21TM1470.

  In step S21TM1310, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is on (step S21TM1310; YES) or if no backup data is stored in step S21TM1320 (step S21TM1320; NO), the process proceeds to step S21TM1330. If the result of the parity check is not normal (step S21TM1330; NO), an initialization process is executed (step S21TM1410).

  In the present example, the initialization processing of step S21TM1410 is executed as follows: (1) The setting is performed based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. The case where the initialization process of step S21TM1410 is immediately executed without shifting to any of the change mode and the setting confirmation mode, and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF when the power is turned on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052. Is also OFF, based on the determination of NO in either step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330, the process immediately proceeds to step S21TM1410 without shifting to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. When the initialization process is executed and (3) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also ON, the mode shifts to the setting change mode. The case where the initialization process of step S21TM1410 is executed after the end of the setting change mode, and the case where (4) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF when the power is turned on. , The setting check mode is entered, and the initialization process of step S21TM1410 is executed on condition that it is determined as NO in either step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330 after the end of the setting check mode. .

  In the initialization process, the CPU 103 first performs a RAM clear process (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clearing process, data (such as a special symbol process flag, a probable change flag, a time reduction flag, etc.) indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped, which is stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102, is cleared, and an initial value is set. However, the set values stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 are not cleared and are not changed before the RAM clear processing. Further, the area in which the total values (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the connection ratio, the role ratio, and the base are stored for each set value is not cleared. The value is not changed before the RAM clear processing. Then, by notifying the character "C" on the display monitor 21TM029, it is notified that the gaming state has been initialized (step S21TM1420). The RAM clear processing initializes predetermined data (for example, data of a count value of a counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. May be initialized. Alternatively, predetermined data (for example, data of a count value of a counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 102. The start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 101 is set as a pointer (step S21TM1430), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S21TM1440).

  Also, by performing the processing of step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, for example, it is possible to selectively perform processing according to a control state such as a random number counter for determining a normal symbol hit, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball storage buffer, and a special symbol process flag. An initial value is set in the flag.

  In this embodiment, the mode in which the mode is shifted to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode is exemplified on condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON, but the present invention is not limited to this. Further, the setting change mode is provided on condition that the gaming machine frame 3 is opened (it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is opened by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300). A transition to the setting confirmation mode may be made possible.

  After executing Step S21TM1430 and Step S21TM1440, the CPU 103 reads the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (Step S21TM1450). In a later-described game control timer interrupt process, a big hit determination in the special symbol process process (step S21TM1690) is executed based on the set value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command designating that the initialization process has been performed when the power is turned on (or when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends) (step S21TM1460). The effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the initialization process has been performed based on the reception of the initialization command. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, the effect control device 120 may notify that the game state or the like has been initialized in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9. It is possible. Next, CPU 103 executes a setting command transmission process of step S21TM1470.

  The CPU 103 transmits the setting command specifying the setting value read in step S21TM1360 or step S21TM1450 to the effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM1470). The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest the setting value by executing an effect according to the setting value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the big hit gaming state ends according to the specified set value.

  Then, CPU 103 executes a setting process of serial communication circuit 21TM505 (step S21TM1480). In this setting process, a connection confirmation signal is output from the output circuit 21TM067 of the main board 11 to the input circuit 21TM373A of the payout control board 21TM037 (see FIGS. 22-19 and 22-21). The communication between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to be executable.

  Next, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initial setting the random number circuit 104 (step S21TM1490). The CPU 103 performs setting for causing the random number circuit 104 to update the value of the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result by executing processing according to a random number circuit setting program, for example.

  Then, in step S21TM1500, the CPU 103 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically performed at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically performed every 2 ms.

  Next, CPU 103 repeatedly executes a display random number update process (step S21TM1520) and an initial value random number update process (step S21TM1530). When the display random number updating process and the initial value random number updating process are executed, the interrupt is prohibited (step S21TM1510). It is set (step S21TM1540). In the present embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining a stop symbol of a special symbol when not a big hit or a random number for determining whether or not to reach when a large hit is not made. The random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of a counter for generating a display random number. The initial value random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of a counter for generating an initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is used to determine an initial value of a count value of a counter (normal symbol hit determination random number generation counter) for generating a random number for determining whether or not a symbol is a hit. It is a random number to perform. A game control process for controlling the progress of a game described later (the game control microcomputer 100 controls a game device such as an effect display device, a variable prize ball device, and a ball payout device provided in the game machine by itself. In this process, the count value of the random number for the normal symbol hit determination is one round (the normal value of the random number for the normal symbol hit determination) in the process of transmitting the command signal to control the other microcomputer, or the game machine control process. When the number of possible values has increased by the number between the minimum value and the maximum value), an initial value is set in the counter.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 22-12 and 22-13, when the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting change mode, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command (step S21TM1140), and then transmits a power-on initialization command. (Step S21TM1460), and transmits a setting command (Step S21TM1470). When the CPU 103 is set to the setting confirmation mode, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM1220), and then transmits a backup command at the time of power-off recovery or an initialization command at power-on (step S21TM1370 or step S21TM1370). S21TM1460), and transmits a setting command (step S21TM1470). Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the end of the setting change mode based on receiving the initialization command after receiving the setting change mode command, and can display the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect, and the like. It is possible to notify the end of the setting change mode by the effect device such as the lamp 9. The effect control CPU 120 can specify the end of the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the backup command or the initialization command after receiving the setting confirmation mode command, and can specify the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R. It is possible to notify the end of the setting confirmation mode by the effect device such as the game effect lamp 9 or the like.

  Upon receiving the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receiving the interrupt request, the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 22-14 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a power-off detection process (step S21TM1610). Then, it is determined whether or not a game stop error has occurred (step S21TM1615). On the condition that a game stop error has not occurred (NO in step S21TM1615), a predetermined switch process is executed to execute a switch. The state of the detection signal input from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, the count switch 23, and the discharge port switch 21TM070 via the circuit 110 is determined (step S21TM1620). On the other hand, when a game stop error has occurred (YES in step S21TM1615), the switch processing in step S21TM1620 is not executed, and as a result, the game is stopped.

  For example, the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, the opening state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, and an abnormality is detected by a magnetic sensor (not shown). That the level of magnetism determined is detected, that the vibration of the level determined to be abnormal by the vibration sensor (not shown) is detected, and that the level and frequency band of the level determined to be abnormal by the radio wave sensor (not shown) Based on the detection of the radio wave, it is determined that a game stop error has occurred.

  Subsequently, when the game ball wins one of the first start winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the big winning opening, the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening, that is, the first starting opening switch 22A. When the detection signals are input from the second starting port switch 22B, the count switch 23, the first general winning port switch to the fourth general winning port switch, the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning by each detection signal is determined. A prize ball process (step S21TM1630) for setting and the like is executed.

  Next, the CPU 103 displays winning information such as a winning ratio such as a winning ratio, a connecting ratio, and a base (step S21TM1640), and displays winning information such as a winning ratio, a connecting ratio, and a base calculated by the winning information. The winning information display control process to be displayed on the 21TM029 is performed (step S21TM1650). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined main-side error process (step S21TM1660), an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be executed if necessary according to the diagnosis result. In step S21TM1660, an abnormality (game stop error) is detected by the various sensors described in the description of step S1615. If an abnormality is detected, an abnormality detection flag is set, and a step in the next timer interrupt is set. In S21TM1615, the game may be stopped (the switch process is not executed). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as big hit information, start information, probability variation information, and payout information which are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 are output. (Step S21TM1670).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as the random number value MR1 and the random number values MR1 to MR4 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S21TM1680). ). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S21TM1690). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display are updated. Various processes are selected and executed in order to control the display operation in the device 4B and set the opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Subsequent to the special symbol processing, the ordinary symbol processing is executed (step S21TM1700). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on or off the segment LED) on the ordinary symbol display 20 by executing the ordinary symbol process processing, and displays the variation of the ordinary symbol and the movable wings in the variable winning ball device 6B. Enables setting of one-sided tilting operation.

  After executing the normal symbol process processing, the CPU 103 executes the command control processing to transmit a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 (step S21TM1710). As an example of these, in the command control processing, in the output port included in the I / O 105, the effect is produced in accordance with the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit. After setting control data in an output port for transmitting an effect control command to the control board 12, predetermined control data is set in an output port of the effect control INT signal, and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. By turning off after that, the effect control command can be transmitted based on the setting in the command transmission table. After the command control process is executed, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated after the interrupt control is set.

  In the command control process of step S21TM1710, a command for notifying the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or a command for notifying that the variation pattern or the variation display has been completed is transmitted. By transmitting the existing command such as the information of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the effect control board 12, the setting value may be periodically notified. Further, by receiving these commands from the main board 11, the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) executes an effect indicating the set value at various timings, such as during a variable display or a big hit game. You may.

  Next, the display mode of the display monitor 21TM029 in the processing related to the setting change mode (steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200 of the main processing) and the RAM clear (steps S21TM1410 to S21TM1420 of the main processing) will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 22-15 (A), when the power is turned off (the power is turned off) by the operation of a game clerk or the like, the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, and the display monitor is stopped. The display on 21TM029 ends.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 22-15 (B), on condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (Y in step S21TM1110 of the main processing), a store clerk of the game arcade or the like switches the clear switch (setting changeover switch). When the power is turned on while operating the 21TM052 (in the case of Y in step S21TM1120 of the main processing), the processing of steps S21TM1130 and S21TM1140 is executed by the CPU 103, and the set values stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (this In the example, the setting value “1”) is copied to the setting information temporary storage area of the RAM 102, and the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area on the display monitor 21TM029 (more precisely, the first display unit 21TM029A). (In this example, the setting value "1") is displayed. (Step S21TM1150).

  In the state where the set value is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A in this way, as shown in FIG. 22-15 (C), the CPU 103 sets the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 by a store clerk or the like at the game arcade. Each time an operation is detected, the numerical value (setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area) displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is sequentially updated and displayed (step S21TM1170). For example, each time the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value (setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area) displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is changed from 1 → 2 → 3 → Update display is performed in the order of 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 →. Here, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the setting value (the setting value “1” in this example) stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed by the operation. When the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 described later is executed, the set value (the set value “1” in this example) stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A. Is changed (in this example, the setting value “2” stored in the setting information temporary storage area) (overwritten).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 22D, the CPU 103 detects the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 by a store clerk of the game arcade or the like (YES in step S21TM1180), and stores it in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. The stored setting value (in this example, the setting value “1”) is changed to the numerical value displayed in the first display unit 21TM029A (in this example, the setting value “2” stored in the setting information temporary storage area). ) (Overwritten), and the set value (set value “2” in this example) stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is determined (step S21TM1190). At this time, the CPU 103 causes the first display unit 21TM029A to blink, thereby notifying the clerk of the game arcade that the new set value is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102, and that the control of the setting change mode has been completed. (Setting completion notification) is performed (step S21TM1200).

  Note that once the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (in this example, the setting information temporary storage area Neither the stored set value “2”) nor the set value (set value “2” in this example) stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is changed. If the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is changeable even after the set value is determined, there is a possibility that the user may misunderstand that the set value can be changed even when the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, once the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is not changed.

  Then, the setting change mode (step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) ends, and the CPU 103 executes a RAM clear process (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clearing process, data (a special symbol process flag, a probable change flag, a time reduction flag, etc.) stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 indicating the game state at the time of power failure is cleared, and an initial value is set. Thereby, the game state is initialized, but the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed before the RAM clear processing. Further, when the reserved storage is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the reserved storage is cleared. After the RAM clearing process is completed, the CPU 103 displays “C” on the first display unit 21TM029A, thereby notifying a store clerk of the game arcade or the like that the RAM clearing process has been performed (RAM clear notification). (Step S21TM1420). Thereby, the clerk of the game hall or the like grasps that the setting change mode has ended (the set value has been determined) and the initialization processing has been executed. Then, by executing the processing after step S21TM1430, a state in which a game is possible, that is, a state in which a variable display result, a jackpot type, a variable pattern determination lottery, a prize ball payout, and the like can be performed.

  Note that, in the setting change mode of the present embodiment, a mode in which the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is displayed as an initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is exemplified. The initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the setting change mode is not limited to the setting value most advantageous to the player ("6" in the present embodiment) or the most disadvantageous value to the player. The set value (“1” in this embodiment) may be displayed.

  Further, with the end of the setting change mode, the CPU 103 notifies the display monitor 21TM029 of the change of the connection ratio and the combination corresponding to the determined set value (the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) after the notification of the RAM clear. You may make it display each total value, such as a ratio and a base. In addition, for each set value, each total value such as the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base corresponding to each set value may be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the order (in ascending or descending order of the set values).

  If the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off without being turned off while the lock switch 21TM051 is in the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off. The setting values stored in the storage area have not been changed since the power was turned on, and the setting values stored in the setting information temporary storage area are deleted.

  Next, a display mode of the display monitor 21TM029 in the processing of the setting confirmation mode (steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 22-16 (A), when the power is turned off (the power is turned off) by an operation of a game room clerk or the like, the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, and the display monitor is stopped. The display on 21TM029 ends.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 22-16 (B), on condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (Y in step S21TM1110 of the main processing), the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF. (In the case of N in step S21TM1120 of the main processing), the processing of steps S21TM1210 and S21TM1220 is executed by the CPU 103, and the set values stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (in this example, the set values "1") is copied to the setting information temporary storage area of the RAM 102, and the set value (in this example, stored in the setting information temporary storage area on the display monitor 21TM029 (more precisely, the first display unit 21TM029A)). Set value "1") is displayed (step 21TM1230).

  Note that, unlike the case where the setting change mode is controlled, the first display unit is operated even when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated by a game room clerk or the like when the setting check mode is controlled. The numerical value (setting value “1” stored in the setting information temporary storage area in this example) displayed on 21TM029A is not updated and displayed. If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated by a store clerk or the like in the game arcade while being controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (this example) In this case, if the setting value “1”) stored in the setting information temporary storage area is updated and displayed, it may be misunderstood that the setting value can be changed in the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the setting check mode is being controlled, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (in this example, the setting The setting value “1” stored in the information temporary storage area is not updated and displayed.

  Then, the CPU 103 ends the setting confirmation mode based on detecting that the lock switch 21TM051 has been turned off by the store clerk at the game arcade (YES in step S21TM1240). By executing the processing after step S21TM1320, a state in which a game can be played, that is, a state in which a fluctuation display result, a jackpot type, a fluctuation pattern determination lottery, a prize ball payout, and the like can be executed. That is, when the processing in the setting confirmation mode is executed, the CPU 103 does not execute the processing related to the RAM clear, except when the result of the determination in step S21TM1320 or S21TM1330 is NO.

  After the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off, as described above, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (in this example, the setting information Neither the setting value “1” stored in the temporary storage area nor the setting value (the setting value “1” in this example) stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is changed.

  As described above, when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also in the ON state. If the condition for controlling the setting change mode is satisfied, the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode, (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting change switch) If the condition for controlling the setting confirmation mode, that is, the 21TM052 is in the OFF state, is satisfied, the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

  In order to change or display the set value (to shift to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode), the clerk of the game arcade turns on the lock switch 21TM051 at the time of turning on the power. In order to shift to, the operation for further executing the initialization process (operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052) is performed, and in order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, the initialization process is executed. Do not perform the operation. In this way, the clerk at the game arcade can select whether to control the gaming machine in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (or not to control any of them) when the power is turned on, and to perform the initialization processing. It is also possible to select whether or not to execute.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is not necessary to perform an initialization process to shift the gaming machine to the setting confirmation mode (the RAM clear is not executed except when it is determined NO in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330). Therefore, even if the clerk at the game hall wants to check the set value while the player is playing a game, the power is turned off once, and the game is transferred to the setting check mode when the power is turned on, the game state remains unchanged. It is not initialized and does not disadvantage the player. On the amusement arcade side, the setting value can be checked without any trouble by the setting checking mode.

  Further, with the end of the setting confirmation mode, the CPU 103 sets the display ratio on the display monitor 21TM029 (the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102), the connection ratio, the role ratio, the base, and the like. May be displayed. In addition, for each set value, each total value such as the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base corresponding to each set value may be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the order (in ascending or descending order of the set values).

  FIG. 22-17 shows the setting change mode by the effect devices (image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, and game effect lamp 9) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when controlled in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. An example is shown in which notification that the mode has shifted to the setting confirmation mode is performed. FIG. 22-17 (1) shows an example of an image displayed on the image display device 5 when controlled in the setting change mode, and FIG. 22-17 (2) shows an image displayed when controlled in the setting confirmation mode. Examples of images displayed on the device 5 are shown.

  As shown in (A) of FIG. 22-17 (1), the activation of the effect control board 12 is not completed when the power is turned on (in particular, before the wait of the effect control board operation waiting in step S21TM1040 is completed). Therefore, no image is displayed on the image display device 5, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the gaming effect lamp 9 is not emitting light.

  Next, as shown in (B) of FIG. 22-17 (1), on the basis of the reception of the setting change mode command transmitted to the effect control board 12 from the CPU 103 in step S21TM1140 in the main processing, the effect control The CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode, and can notify that fact. For example, the image display device 5 displays the character “Setting is being changed”, and outputs a sound (for example, “Setting is being changed”) from the speakers 8L and 8R to notify that the mode has changed to the setting change mode. By making the effect lamp 9 emit light in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white blinking mode), it is notified that the setting change mode has been entered. According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the mode is shifted to the setting change mode in the image display device 5 or the like having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the setting change is performed. It is possible to clearly grasp that the mode is controlled. Here, in the state shown in (B) of FIG. 22-17 (1), other display information (for example, effect design, small design, fourth design, right-handed display, etc.) on the image display device 5 is not displayed.

  It should be noted that when the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting change mode command, it is not in a state in which a video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 by the VDP (Video Display Processor) (that is, by the display control unit 123). Until control of the image display device 5 is not possible (until the image display device 5 can be supplied to the image display device 5) (that is, until the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5). The notification by the image display device 5 is not performed, and the voice notification and the light emission notification are executed in advance. That is, a sound (for example, a sound saying "Setting is being changed") is output from the speakers 8L and 8R to notify that the mode has changed to the setting change mode, and the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, a white blinking mode). By emitting light, it is notified that the mode has shifted to the setting change mode. After that, when the video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 (that is, when the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5), the audio notification and the light emission notification are transmitted. In addition, the notification by the image display device 5 is started. That is, the image display device 5 displays the text “setting is being changed”.

  Then, as shown in (C) of FIG. 22-17 (1), based on the reception of the setting command transmitted from CPU 103 to effect control board 12 in step S21TM1470 in the main processing (or CPU 103 in step S21TM1460). The CPU 120 for effect control specifies that the game control microcomputer 100 has ended the setting change mode, based on the reception of the power-on initialization command transmitted to the effect control board 12 from That fact can be notified. For example, on the image display device 5, a character “Setting change completed” is displayed, and a sound (for example, a sound “Setting is being changed”) for notifying that the mode has been changed to the setting change mode output from the speakers 8L and 8R is output. By stopping the output and stopping the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, a white blinking mode), the end of the setting change mode is notified. According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the setting change mode has ended in the image display device 5 or the like having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the setting change mode is not set. It is possible to clearly understand that the process has been completed.

  Then, as shown in (D) of FIG. 22-17 (1), the CPU 103 executes the processing after step S21TM1480 of the main processing, and is in a state where the game can be played (the game control timer interrupt processing is performed). With the execution, the effect control command for displaying the demonstration screen on the image display device 5 is transmitted, and the effect control CPU 120 having received the command displays the demonstration screen on the image display device 5.

  As shown in (A) of FIG. 22-17 (2), the activation of the effect control board 12 is not completed when the power is turned on (in particular, before the wait for the effect control board operation in step S21TM1040 is completed). Therefore, no image is displayed on the image display device 5, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the gaming effect lamp 9 is not emitting light.

  Next, as shown in (B) of FIG. 22-17 (2), based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command transmitted to the effect control board 12 from the CPU 103 in step S21TM1220 in the main process, the effect control The CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode, and can notify that fact. For example, on the image display device 5, the characters "Setting is being confirmed" are displayed, and a sound (for example, "Setting is being confirmed") is output from the speakers 8L and 8R to notify that the mode has shifted to the setting confirmation mode. By making the effect lamp 9 emit light in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white blinking mode), it is notified that the mode has shifted to the setting confirmation mode. According to such a configuration, in the image display device 5 having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like, it is possible to notify that the mode has been shifted to the setting confirmation mode. It is possible to clearly understand that the mode is controlled. Here, in the state shown in (B) of FIG. 22-17 (2), other display information on the image display device 5 (for example, effect design, small design, fourth design, right-handed display, etc.) is not displayed.

  It should be noted that when the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting confirmation mode command, it is not in a state where a video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 by a VDP (Video Display Processor) (that is, by the display control unit 123). Until control of the image display device 5 is not possible (until the image display device 5 can be supplied to the image display device 5) (that is, until the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5). The notification by the image display device 5 is not performed, and the voice notification and the light emission notification are executed in advance. That is, a sound (for example, a sound of “Setting is being changed”) is output from the speakers 8L and 8R to notify that the mode has shifted to the setting confirmation mode, and the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a predetermined light emitting manner (for example, a white blinking manner). By emitting light, it is notified that the mode has shifted to the setting confirmation mode. After that, when the video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 (that is, when the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5), the audio notification and the light emission notification are transmitted. In addition, the notification by the image display device 5 is started. That is, the image display device 5 displays the characters “Setting is being confirmed”.

  Then, as shown in (C) of FIG. 22-17 (2), based on the reception of the setting command transmitted from CPU 103 to effect control board 12 in step S21TM1470 in the main processing (or step S21TM1370 or step S21TM1370). In step S21TM1460, based on the reception of the power-off restoration command or the power-on initialization command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 from the CPU 103), the effect control CPU 120 is set by the game control microcomputer 100. It is possible to specify that the confirmation mode has ended, and to notify that fact. For example, on the image display device 5, the character “Setting confirmation completed” is displayed, and a sound (for example, a sound “Setting confirmation is being performed”) notifying that the mode has been shifted to the setting confirmation mode output from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R is output. By stopping the output and stopping the light emission by the game effect lamp 9 in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, a white blinking mode), the end of the setting confirmation mode is notified. According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the setting check mode has ended in the image display device 5 or the like having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the setting check mode is set to It is possible to clearly understand that the process has been completed.

  Then, as shown in (D) of FIG. 22-17 (2), the CPU 103 executes the processing after step S21TM1480 of the main processing, and is in a game-enabled state (the game control timer interrupt processing is performed). With the execution, the effect control command for displaying the demonstration screen on the image display device 5 is transmitted, and the effect control CPU 120 having received the command displays the demonstration screen on the image display device 5.

  The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest the setting value by executing an effect according to the setting value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the big hit gaming state ends according to the specified set value. 22-18 (1), (2), and (3) show examples of the setting suggestion effect. FIG. 22-18 (1) shows an example in which the “sunny” mode ending image is selected on the big hit end screen, and FIG. 22-18 (2) shows an example in which the “cloudy” mode ending image is selected on the big hit end screen. For example, FIG. 22-18 (3) shows an example in which the ending image in the “rain” mode is selected on the big hit end screen. FIG. 22D is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of a table for determining the mode of the setting suggestion effect based on the setting value specified by the setting command.

  In step S21TM1470 of the main process, the CPU 103 transmits a setting command for designating a setting value to the effect control CPU 120. Further, when the big hitting game state ends, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for executing an ending effect on the image display device 5 to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 stores the setting value specified by the received setting command in the RAM 102, so that the ending effect mode can be determined based on the stored setting value. For example, based on an effect control command transmitted when the big hit game state ends, the image display device 5 stores the character together with a character (“BONUS end” character) indicating that the big hit game state has ended. It is possible to display an ending image in a mode (fine mode, cloudy mode, rainy mode) determined based on the set value that is set.

  The table shown in FIG. 22-18 (4) shows that the setting value specified by the setting command is “1, 2”, “3, 4”, and “5, 6”. When the setting suggestion mode is determined to be the “sunny” mode shown in FIG. 22-18 (1), the “cloudy” mode shown in FIG. 22-18 (2), and FIG. In the case of deciding on the “rain” mode shown in 18 (3), the judgment value of is assigned.

  If the setting value specified by the received setting command is “1” or “2”, effect control CPU 120 suggests the setting of the “sunny” mode shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). It is decided to perform the effect (ending effect), and to execute the setting suggestive effect (ending effect) of the “cloudy” mode shown in (2) at a moderate ratio (for example, 40%). It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “rain” mode shown in (3) at the ratio of (for example, 40%). Further, when the setting value specified by the received setting command is “3” or “4”, the effect control CPU 120 performs the “clear” mode shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). It is determined that the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) is to be executed, and that the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “cloudy” mode shown in (2) is to be executed at a high ratio (for example, 50%), and It is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “rain” mode shown in (3) at the ratio (for example, 30%). When the setting value specified by the received setting command is “5” or “6”, the effect control CPU 120 performs the “clear” mode shown in (1) at a high rate (for example, 50%). It is determined that the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) is to be executed, and that the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “cloudy” mode shown in (2) is to be executed at a low rate (for example, 20%), It is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “rain” mode shown in (3) at the ratio (for example, 30%).

  As described above, by making the determination ratio of each mode of the setting suggestion effect different according to the setting value, the player becomes interested in what mode the setting suggestion effect is performed, and the setting suggestion effect is performed. The entertainment of the production can be improved. In this example, the player will be interested in the manner in which the ending effect performed when the big hit gaming state ends is performed, and in particular, the ending effect is performed in the “sunny” mode. You expect it to be done.

  Next, the award ball processing (step S21TM1630) in the main processing will be described. First, a payout control signal (connection confirmation signal) and a prize ball request signal (payout control command) transmitted and received between the main board 11 and the payout control board 21TM037 will be described.

  FIG. 22-19 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of a control signal output from the game control microcomputer 100 to the payout control board 21TM037. In this embodiment, a connection confirmation signal is transmitted and received as a control signal between the main board 11 and the payout control board 21TM037 in order to perform various controls related to payout control and the like. As shown in FIGS. 22-19, the connection confirmation signal is output when the main board 11 starts up (when the game control microcomputer 100 starts the game control process), and the main board 11 is output to the payout control board 21TM037. Is a signal (connection confirmation signal of the main board 11) for notifying that has started. The connection confirmation signal indicates that the prize ball can be paid out. The connection confirmation signal is output through the I / O port 21TM057 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the output circuit 21TM067, and is controlled through the input circuit 21TM373A and the I / O port 21TM372e of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Is input to the microcomputer 21TM370. Each of the connection confirmation signals is 1-bit data, and is transmitted by one signal line. It should be noted that the connection confirmation signal is set to an output enabled state by setting an initial value to a bit corresponding to the connection confirmation signal of the output port 0 by the processing of steps S21TM1350 and S21TM1440 executed when the power is turned on (specifically, Is output by the process of step S21TM2080, but may be output at the timing of steps S21TM1350 and S21TM1440.)

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 includes a serial communication circuit 21TM380 as in the game control microcomputer 100. Various payout control commands are transmitted and received between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 built in the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The configuration and functions of the serial communication circuit 21TM380 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are the same as those of the serial communication circuit 21TM505 included in the game control microcomputer 100.

  FIG. 22-20 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of a control command transmitted and received between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control board 21TM037. In this embodiment, various control commands (prize ball request signals) are transmitted and received between the microcomputers of the main board 11 and the payout control board 21TM037 in order to perform various controls related to payout control and the like.

  As described above, the prize ball request signal and the received ACK signal are constituted by 8-bit data (binary 8-digit data), and are output as control commands indicating predetermined contents according to the set contents of the 8-bit data. Is done.

  The connection confirmation command is sent from the game control microcomputer 100 at regular intervals (1s) in order to check whether the connection state between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is normal. This is a control command to be transmitted. The data content of the connection confirmation command is “A0 (H)”, that is, “1010000”.

  The connection OK command is a control command for notifying that the connection state between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is normal, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits the connection confirmation command. Is a control command to be transmitted as a response signal in response to the reception of the control command. The data content of the connection OK command is “8x (H)”, that is, “10000xxx”. Here, when an award ball error (abnormal state in which the award ball payout operation based on the winning or the ball lending operation based on the ball lending request cannot be performed normally) occurs, the first bit “x” is set. Is set to “1”. When a full tank error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the second bit. In addition, when an out-of-ball error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the third bit. When a door opening error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the fourth bit. In this way, while the connection between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is being confirmed, the occurrence of a predetermined error in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is determined by the game control microcomputer. 100 can be notified.

  The prize ball number command is a control command for notifying the number (0 to 14) of game balls for which a payout request is made, and is a control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 100 based on the occurrence of a prize. . The content of the data of the winning ball number command is “5x (H)”, that is, “0101xxxx”. In this embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, three prize balls are paid out, and the game ball is released by the prize port switch corresponding to the general prize port 10. When detected, ten prize balls are paid out, and when a game ball is detected by the count switch 23, 14 prize balls are paid out. Therefore, when a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B, the prize ball number command “01010111” for notifying three prize balls is transmitted, and the general winning port 10 is transmitted. When a game ball is detected by the corresponding winning opening switch, a prize ball number command “01011010” for notifying the number of prize balls is transmitted, and when a game ball is detected by the count switch 23, the prize ball number is determined. A prize ball number command “0101110” for notifying 14 pieces is transmitted. It should be noted that any one of the connection confirmation command and the winning ball number command is transmitted as a winning ball request signal. The prize ball number command is transmitted instead of the connection confirmation command at the timing when the connection confirmation command is transmitted, based on the condition for paying out the prize balls (the occurrence of a prize or the like). In this embodiment, as described above, data corresponding to the number of winning balls is set in the upper 4 bits, but data corresponding to the number of winning balls is set in the lower 4 bits while sharing the upper 4 bits. You may do so.

  The prize ball end command is a control command indicating that the prize ball operation (prize ball payout operation) has been completed, and is a control command transmitted by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 based on the end of the prize ball operation. The content of the data of the award ball end command is “50 (H)”, that is, “01010000”. The prize ball end command is transmitted instead of the connection OK command at the timing when the connection OK command is transmitted based on the completion of the prize ball operation. In this embodiment, it is not configured to set data indicating error information in the prize ball end command. This is because the prize ball end command is transmitted only once when the prize ball operation ends, so that the data indicating the error information is set and transmitted in the next connection OK command without transmitting the error information at that timing. This is because it is possible to do so. Note that data indicating error information may be set in the lower 4 bits of the prize ball end command.

  The prize ball preparation command is a control command for notifying that a predetermined error has occurred and the prize ball operation has not been completed. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 generates a predetermined error during execution of the prize ball operation. This is a control command to be transmitted based on what has been done. The data content of the connection OK command is “8x (H)”, that is, “10000xxx”. Here, when an award ball error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the first bit. When a full tank error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the second bit. In addition, when an out-of-ball error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the third bit. When a door opening error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the fourth bit. In this way, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 notifies the game control microcomputer 100 that the predetermined error has occurred during the execution of the prize ball operation and the prize ball operation has not been completed. In addition, the content of the error can be notified to the game control microcomputer 100. As with the connection OK command, the prize ball preparation command notifies that a predetermined error has occurred by changing the contents of the lower 4 bits according to the error state (by changing the predetermined bit). Further, any of the connection OK command, the prize ball preparation command, and the prize ball end command is configured to be transmitted as a received ACK signal. The award ball preparation command is a command (signal) that is output not only in a state where an error has occurred but the award ball operation cannot be performed, but also in a state where the award ball operation is being performed.

  The prize ball preparation command is transmitted instead of the connection OK command at the timing when the connection OK command is transmitted, based on the state where an error has occurred and the prize ball operation cannot be performed. is there.

  FIG. 22-21 is a block diagram showing signal lines and the like used for transmitting and receiving the control signal shown in FIG. 22-19 and the control command shown in FIG. 22-20. As shown in FIG. 22-21, the connection confirmation signal is output by the game control microcomputer 100 via the output circuit 21TM067, and is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the input circuit 21TM373A. The connection confirmation command and the number of prize balls command among the control commands are output from the serial communication circuit 21TM505 incorporated in the game control microcomputer 100 and input to the serial communication circuit 21TM380 incorporated in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. You. Among the control commands, the connection OK command, the prize ball end command, and the prize ball preparation command are output from the serial communication circuit 21TM380 built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the serial communication circuit built in the game control microcomputer 100. 21TM505. In FIG. 22-21, two signal lines (a signal line for transmitting a prize ball request signal and a signal line for transmitting a received ACK signal) are shown as signal lines for performing serial communication. However, actually, the prize ball request signal and the received ACK signal are transmitted and received through one signal line.

  Next, transmission and reception of signals (prize ball request signal, received ACK signal; control command) between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer during normal operation will be described. The winning ball request signal includes a connection confirmation command and a winning ball number command, and the received ACK signal includes a connection OK command, a winning ball end command, and a winning ball preparation command.

  FIG. 22-22 is a sequence diagram showing transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during normal operation. As shown in FIGS. 22-22, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the connection of the signal line with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuit 21TM505 has been cut. A connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal via the serial communication circuit 21TM380, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits a connection OK command as the reception ACK signal to the game control microcomputer 100. Upon receiving the connection OK command as a received ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal 1 s (1 second) after the reception. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-described connection confirmation communication processing as long as the connection state is normal.

  Next, the operation of the payout control board 21TM037 will be described. FIG. 22-23 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the payout control board 21TM037. In the main processing, the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 first performs necessary initialization. That is, the payout control CPU 21TM371 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S21TM1810). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S21TM1820), and the stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S21TM1830). Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371 sets the internal device register (step S21TM1840), sets the CTC and PIO (step S21TM1850), and then sets the RAM in an accessible state (step S21TM1860). In addition, 0000 (H) is set as the initial value of the winning ball unpaid number counter (step S21TM1870).

  In this embodiment, one channel of the built-in CTC is used in the timer mode. Therefore, in the setting processing of the internal device register of step S21TM1840 and the processing of step S21TM1850, the register setting for setting the channel to be used to the timer mode, the register setting for permitting the interrupt generation, and the interrupt vector are set. Is set. Then, the interruption by the channel is used as a timer interruption. If it is desired to generate a timer interrupt every 2 ms, for example, a value corresponding to 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value.

  The interrupt vector set for the channel set in the timer mode (channel 3 in this embodiment) corresponds to the start address of the timer interrupt processing. Specifically, the start address of the timer interrupt processing is specified by the value set in the I register and the interrupt vector. In the timer interruption process, the payout control process for controlling the payout means (including at least the process of driving the payout motor 21TM289 in response to the command signal relating to the payout of the winning ball from the main board, and driving the payout motor 21TM289 in response to the ball lending request) May be included).

  In this embodiment, the interruption mode 2 is also set in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Therefore, it is possible to use the interrupt processing based on the count-up of the built-in CTC. Further, it is possible to set an interrupt processing start address according to the interrupt vector transmitted by the CTC. The interrupt based on the count-up of the channel 3 (CH3) of the CTC is an interrupt that is generated when the internal clock (system clock) of the CPU is counted down and the register value becomes “0”, and is used as a timer interrupt. .

  Next, the payout control CPU 21TM371 first performs a RAM clear process (step S21TM1880). Further, an initial value is set to a flag, a counter, and the like in the RAM area (step S21TM1890). The process of step S21TM1890 includes a process of setting the initial value of the winning ball unpaid number counter to the winning ball unpaid number counter.

  Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes a serial communication circuit setting process for initializing the serial communication circuit 21TM380 (step S21TM1900). In this case, the payout control CPU 21TM371 causes the serial communication circuit 21TM380 to perform serial communication with the game control microcomputer 100 according to the same process as the serial communication circuit setting process (see step S21TM2560) performed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100. Make the settings for

  When the serial communication circuit 21TM380 is initialized, the payout control CPU 21TM371 initializes the priority of the interrupt processing executed in response to the interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 21TM380 (step S21TM1910). In this case, the payout control CPU 21TM 371 initializes the priority of the interrupt processing according to the same processing as the processing of initializing the priority performed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100.

  Then, the register of the CTC provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically performed (step S21TM1920). That is, a value corresponding to the timer interrupt occurrence interval is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. Since the interrupt is prohibited in step S21TM1810 of the initial setting process, the interrupt is permitted before the initialization process is completed (step S21TM1930). Thereafter, the process enters a loop process for monitoring occurrence of a timer interrupt.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the built-in CTC of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to repeatedly generate a timer interrupt. Then, when a timer interrupt occurs, the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes a timer interrupt process.

  FIG. 22-24 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a timer interrupt process executed by the payout control board 21TM037. In the timer interrupt processing, the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes the following processing as payout control processing. First, the payout control CPU 21TM371 performs an input determination process (step S21TM2010). The input determination process is a process of detecting the states of bits 4 to 6 of the input port 0 and bits 3 to 6 of the input port 1 and reflecting the detection result to a predetermined byte (called an input state flag) of the RAM. is there. In the payout control process, when control is performed based on the state of bits 4 to 6 of input port 0 and bits 3 to 6 of input port 1, the state of the input port is not directly checked but the input state is checked. Check the state of the flag.

  Next, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes a payout motor control process (step S21TM2020). In the payout motor control process, when the payout motor 21TM289 is to be driven, a process for outputting the pattern of the payout motors φ1 to φ4 to the output port 0 is performed.

  Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes a prepaid card unit control process for communicating with the card unit 21TM050 (step S21TM2030). The payout control CPU 21TM 371 executes a main control communication process described later (step S21TM2035). Furthermore, a prize ball lending control process for controlling to pay out a lending ball in response to a ball lending request from the card unit 21TM050 and for controlling to pay out a number of prize balls indicated by a prize ball number command from the main board. Is executed (step S21TM2040).

  Then, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes error processing for detecting various errors (step S21TM2050). Further, an information output process for outputting prize ball information and ball lending information output to the outside of the gaming machine is executed (step S21TM2060). In addition, a predetermined display is performed on the error display LED 21TM374 in accordance with the result of the error processing, and a display control process for turning on the prize ball LED 21TM053 and the ball out LED 21TM054 is executed (step S21TM2070).

  In the present embodiment, when various errors (for example, a full error, an out-of-ball error, a prepaid card unit unconnection error) are detected in an error process described later, an error bit corresponding to the detected error is set. Then, in the display control process of step S21TM2070, the payout control CPU 21TM371 performs a predetermined display on the error display LED 21TM374 based on the fact that the error bit is set. In the display control process, the payout control CPU 21TM371 performs control for turning on the prize ball LED21TM053 when the prize ball is being paid out. When the prize ball payout is completed, control for turning off the prize ball LED 21TM053 is performed.

  In this embodiment, the RAM area (output port 0 buffer, output port 1 buffer, output port 2 buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. The contents of the port 0 buffer, the output port 1 buffer, and the output port 2 buffer are output to the output port (step S760: output processing). The output port 0 buffer, the output port 1 buffer, and the output port 2 buffer perform payout motor control processing (step S21TM2020), prepaid card control processing (step S21TM2030), main control communication processing (step S21TM2035), and information output processing (step S21TM2060). And in the display control process (step S21TM2070).

  Next, in the main control communication processing of step S21TM2035, an operation in which the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits and receives various commands will be described. As shown in FIG. 22-21, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a built-in serial communication circuit 21TM380 for serially communicating various commands with the game control microcomputer 100. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the prize ball number command shown in FIGS. 22-20 from the game control microcomputer 100 using the serial communication circuit 21TM380. When receiving the award ball number command, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits the award ball ACK command "D2" as a reception confirmation signal using the serial communication circuit 21TM380.

  Similarly to the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100, when there is an interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 21TM380 while the interrupt is enabled, the payout control CPU 21TM 371 performs an interrupt request issued by the serial communication circuit 21TM 380. Execute the interrupt processing according to the cause. In this embodiment, when the payout control CPU 21TM371 specifies that the interrupt cause is that the serial communication circuit 21TM380 has received the received data, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes the reception interruption process. In this case, the payout control CPU 21TM371 sets a reception interrupt flag indicating that the serial communication circuit 21TM380 is receiving the received data. Note that the payout control CPU 21TM371 may read data from the reception data register of the serial communication circuit 21TM380 instead of setting the reception interrupt flag in the reception interrupt processing. In this case, for example, the payout control CPU 21TM371 determines whether the read reception data is a winning ball number command in the reception interruption process. When the received data is the winning ball number command, the payout control CPU 21TM371 may add the winning ball number indicated by the winning ball number command to the winning ball unpaid number counter. By doing so, in the main control communication process described later, it is determined whether or not the received data is a prize ball number command based on the reception interrupt flag being set, and the prize ball number is determined. It is not necessary to execute the process of adding to the unpaid number counter.

  FIG. 22-25 is a diagram illustrating the main board 11 (the game control microcomputer 100), the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370), the payout motor 21TM289, and the ball lending executed between the card unit 21TM050. It is a block diagram for explaining communication processing of. Here, as described later, there are a first ball lending restriction method to a fourth ball lending restriction method described below as methods for restricting ball lending by the payout motor 21TM289.

  First, (1) in the first ball lending restriction method, during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcontroller) is used from the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100). This is a method of stopping the output of the connection confirmation signal to the computer 21TM370). (2) In the second ball lending restriction method, during the period in which the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, PRDY from the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) to the card unit 21TM050. This is a method of stopping signal output. (3) In the third ball lending restriction method, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. During this period, output of a signal for driving the payout motor 21TM289 from the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) to the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped. (4) In the fourth ball lending restriction method, the EXS from the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) to the card unit 21TM050 is controlled during the period in which the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. This is a method of stopping signal output.

  The transition to the setting change mode and the transition to the setting confirmation mode involve power-off (including turning off the power switch 21TM055) and subsequent power-on, so that the state of the gaming machine is unstable. If the payout control corresponding to the ball lending process is executed in such an unstable state, there is a possibility that an appropriate amount of game media corresponding to the lending request cannot be paid out. In order to prevent the disadvantage of the player in such a situation, in the following embodiment, ball lending in a gaming machine controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is limited. Hereinafter, these first to fourth ball lending restriction methods will be specifically described.

  FIG. 22-26 is a timing chart for explaining communication among the main board 11, the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050 of the gaming machine. Based on the fact that the power supply to the gaming machine is started and the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the payout control board 21TM037 turns the PRDY signal ON when the payout operation is possible. The connection confirmation signal is turned on in the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 22-13 (see FIG. 22-19). When power supply is started, the card unit 21TM050 turns on a VL signal as a connection signal.

  When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch is operated, and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 sends the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being ON. Output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Then, the payout control board 21TM037 turns on the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that the PRDY signal is on and both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are on, and the card unit 21TM050 When the falling (OFF) of the BRQ signal is detected, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to pay out a predetermined number (for example, 25) of lending balls to the player. Then, the payout control board 21TM037 falls the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050. That is, the EXS signal is turned off.

(First ball lending restriction method in setting change mode)
As a method of restricting ball lending during the period in which the setting is changed to the setting change mode, there are the first ball lending restriction method to the fourth ball lending restriction method described above. First, the first ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 22-27 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 22-13, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. While the processing in the mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state.

  While the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection control signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state, and therefore the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state but changes the PRDY signal to the OFF state even when the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even in the state of being electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, even when the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, The card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains OFF. Even if a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains OFF.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 keeps the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state without setting the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the process is being executed, ball lending (payout of game media) is not executed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated.

  As described above, during the period in which the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are controlled, the game control microcomputer 100 does not set the connection confirmation signal to the ON state, thereby controlling the payout control of the game medium by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Can be prevented from running. In addition, the card unit 21TM050 can notify that ball lending is not executed (a ball lending error has occurred) based on the PRDY signal not being turned on.

  When the CPU 103 completes the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and executes the serial communication circuit setting processing of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. When the payout operation is possible, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal.

  When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated to input the ball lending switch signal, the card unit 21TM050 sends the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the ON state. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 to the ON state based on the fact that the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the ON state, and executes the subsequent ball lending payout control.

  It should be noted that, during the game (a state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), a configuration is adopted in which the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in this case, the first ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 22 to 27 can be applied. That is, the game control microcomputer 100 stops outputting the connection confirmation signal (switches from the ON state to the OFF state) based on the control in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As a result, based on the fact that the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the PRDY signal to the OFF state or does not set the EXS signal to the ON state, thereby executing the ball lending. Not to be.

(Second ball lending restriction method in setting change mode)
Next, the second ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. In the example illustrated in FIGS. 22 to 28, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period of being controlled to the setting change mode, and is also in the ON state during the period of being controlled to be in the setting confirmation mode. Shall be. That is, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 22-12 and 22-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at a timing before being controlled to the setting change mode, and is kept on during the setting change mode. Shall be. Further, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 22-12 and 22-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at a timing before being controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and is kept on during the setting confirmation mode. Shall be.

  FIGS. 22 to 28 show the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. Then, after the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is turned on, the mode shifts to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  In the example of FIGS. 22 to 28, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state while the CPU 103 is executing the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Here, the game control microcomputer 100 stops transmitting the connection confirmation command based on the control in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The connection confirmation command is a command for confirming the communication state with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuit 21TM505 as described above.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state based on the fact that no connection confirmation command has been received from the game control microcomputer 100. When the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (ie, the state in which the VL signal is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (ie, the game control microcomputer). Even when the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (while the connection confirmation command is not received), the PRDY signal is turned on even when the CPU 103 is in the state of being electrically connected to the connection confirmation command. The state is not set, but set to the OFF state.

  As a result, even when the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, The card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains OFF. Even if a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains OFF.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 keeps the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state without setting the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal is ON, when the connection confirmation command is not transmitted, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. Is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the ball lending (payout of the game medium) is not executed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated.

  As described above, during the period in which the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are controlled, the game control microcomputer 100 does not transmit the connection confirmation command, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has not received the connection confirmation command. Thus, the PRDY signal is not turned on. In this manner, it is possible to prevent the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 from executing the payout of the game medium. In addition, the card unit 21TM050 can notify that ball lending is not executed (a ball lending error has occurred) based on the PRDY signal not being turned on.

  When the CPU 103 ends the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, transmission of the connection confirmation command is restarted. Based on restarting the reception of the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns the PRDY signal ON when the payout operation is possible.

  When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated to input the ball lending switch signal, the card unit 21TM050 sends the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the ON state. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 to the ON state based on the fact that the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the ON state, and executes the subsequent ball lending payout control.

  It should be noted that, during the game (a state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), a configuration is adopted in which the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in this case, the second ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 22 to 28 can be applied. Further, the PRDY signal can be output (turned on) regardless of whether the connection control signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (whether the connection is on or off). Even if such a configuration is adopted, the second ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 22-28 can be applied. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the PRDY signal which is in the ON state based on not receiving the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100 controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Is switched to the OFF state. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the ball lending from being executed during the period in which the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

(Third ball lending restriction method in setting change mode)
Next, the third ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. In this embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and do not open the gaming machine frame 3 which can be opened by a predetermined key operation. In order to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame 3 must be opened. That is, it is normal that the gaming machine frame 3 is open during the period in which the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. That is, during the period in which the control is performed in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 has been opened. Become. As described above, the period in which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected includes a period in which the setting control mode is controlled and a period in which the setting control mode is controlled.

  FIG. 22-29 shows the main board when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). FIG. 11 is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050.

  In the example of FIGS. 22 to 29, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a) is open. Therefore, the PRDY signal is not turned on. When the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (ie, the state in which the VL signal is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (ie, the game control microcomputer). Even when the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (a period in which the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state), The PRDY signal is turned off instead of being turned on.

  As a result, even when the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, The card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains OFF. Even if a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains OFF.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 keeps the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state without setting the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. That is, when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a), the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, and the BRQ Since both the payout signal and the EXS signal are in the OFF state and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the ball is not operated even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated. Lending (payout of game media) is not executed.

  As described above, during the period in which the control is performed in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is operated by the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). Is detected, the PRDY signal is not turned on. In this manner, it is possible to prevent the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 from executing the payout of the game medium. In addition, the card unit 21TM050 can notify that ball lending is not executed (a ball lending error has occurred) based on the PRDY signal not being turned on.

  Then, the clerk of the game hall or the like performs an operation of turning off the lock switch 21TM051, whereby the CPU 103 ends the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Further, a game machine clerk or the like closes the gaming machine frame 3 so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can play the pachinko gaming machine 1 so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 includes a gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor. 21TM300 does not detect the open state of gaming machine frame 3. With the closing of the gaming machine frame 3, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

  When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated to input the ball lending switch signal, the card unit 21TM050 sends the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the ON state. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 to the ON state based on the fact that the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the ON state, and executes the subsequent ball lending payout control.

  It should be noted that, during the game (a state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), a configuration is adopted in which the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in this case, the third ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 22 to 29 can be applied. Further, the PRDY signal can be output (turned on) regardless of whether the connection control signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (whether the connection is on or off). Even if such a configuration is adopted, the third ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 22-29 can be applied. That is, during the period in which the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is controlled by the gaming machine frame 3 ( Alternatively, the PRDY signal is not turned ON based on the detection of the open state of the glass door frame 3a). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the ball lending from being executed during the period in which the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is provided on the payout control board 21TM037 (the open state detection signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370). The game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 is not limited to such an embodiment, and may be provided on the main board 11 (an open state detection signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100). In the case of such a configuration, the game control microcomputer 100 determines that the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). Then, the output of the connection confirmation signal is stopped (switching from the ON state to the OFF state). As a result, based on the fact that the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the PRDY signal to the OFF state or does not set the EXS signal to the ON state, thereby executing the ball lending. Not to be.

(Fourth ball lending restriction method in setting change mode)
Next, the fourth ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. In the example illustrated in FIGS. 22 to 30, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period of being controlled to the setting change mode, and is also in the ON state during the period of being controlled to be in the setting confirmation mode. Shall be. That is, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 22-12 and 22-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at a timing before being controlled to the setting change mode, and is kept on during the setting change mode. Shall be. Further, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 22-12 and 22-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at a timing before being controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and is kept on during the setting confirmation mode. Shall be.

  FIG. 22-30 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. Then, after the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is turned on, the mode shifts to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  In the example of FIGS. 22-30, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state while the CPU 103 is executing the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Here, the game control microcomputer 100 stops transmitting the connection confirmation command based on the control in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The connection confirmation command is a command for confirming the communication state with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuit 21TM505 as described above.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns the PRDY signal ON based on the connection confirmation signal being ON. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is maintained in the ON state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (ie, the state in which the VL signal is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (ie, the game control microcomputer). When the CPU 103 is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the PRDY signal is set to the ON state.

  When the card is received in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 The PRDY signal is output to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the ON state of the PRDY signal. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Here, in the payout control board 21TM037, the PRDY signal is in the ON state, and both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, but the connection control command is not received from the game control microcomputer 100. Based on this, the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 is not turned on. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (ie, the state in which the VL signal is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (ie, the game control microcomputer). 100), the PRDY signal is in the ON state (ie, the payout operation is possible by the payout control board 21TM037), and the BRDY signal is in the ON state (ie, the ball rental switch 21TM062). Is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input), and the CPU 103 sets even if the BRQ signal is in the ON state (that is, a state in which a predetermined delay time has elapsed since the BRDY signal was turned ON). While executing the process of the change mode or the setting confirmation mode (while the connection confirmation command is not received) It is without EXS signal ON state to the OFF state. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, when the connection confirmation command is not transmitted, the EXS signal is in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed, ball lending (payout of game media) is not executed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated.

  As described above, during the period in which the microcomputer is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the game control microcomputer 100 does not transmit the connection confirmation command, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 which has not received the connection confirmation command. Therefore, the EXS signal is not turned on. In this manner, it is possible to prevent the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 from executing the payout of the game medium. Further, the card unit 21TM050 can notify that ball lending is not executed (the ball lending error has occurred) based on the fact that the EXS signal is not turned on.

  Then, when a predetermined time elapses while the EXS signal is in the OFF state after the BRQ signal is turned on (when the timer set to the predetermined value times out), the card unit 21TM050 stops outputting the BRQ signal. I do. That is, the BRQ signal is turned off. Then, the card unit 21TM050 stops outputting the BRDY signal based on the BRQ signal being turned off. That is, the BRDY signal is turned off.

  When the CPU 103 ends the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, transmission of the connection confirmation command is restarted. At this time, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the PRDY signal in the ON state.

  When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated to input the ball lending switch signal, the card unit 21TM050 sends the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the ON state. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 resumes the reception of the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100, and based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, The EXS signal for the unit 21TM050 is turned ON, and the subsequent ball lending payout control is executed.

  It should be noted that, during the game (a state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), a configuration is adopted in which the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in this case, the fourth ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 22-30 can be applied. Further, the PRDY signal can be output (turned on) regardless of whether the connection control signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (whether the connection is on or off). Even if such a configuration is adopted, the fourth ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 22-30 can be applied. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the EXS signal to the ON state based on not receiving a connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100 controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the ball lending from being executed during the period in which the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  Further, in FIG. 22-30, when a predetermined time elapses while the EXS signal remains OFF after the BRQ signal is turned ON (when a timer set to a predetermined value times out), the card unit 21TM050 Shows an example in which the BRQ signal is returned to the OFF state, and the BRDY signal is also returned to the OFF state. However, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment, and the EXS signal remains OFF after the BRQ signal is turned ON. Even when a predetermined time has elapsed, the BRQ signal may be maintained in the ON state, and the BRDY signal may be maintained in the ON state. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 resumes the reception of the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100 (the completion of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode), and the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal. May be turned on based on the fact that both are on. Here, when the EXS signal is turned on, (1) the ball lending switch 21TM062 is not operated again, the BRQ signal is turned off, and the ball lending is automatically executed (that is, the setting change mode or When the setting confirmation mode ends, a ball lending process corresponding to the ball lending operation received during the setting change mode or the period of the setting confirmation mode may be performed.) (2) Ball lending When the switch 21TM062 is operated again, the BRQ signal may be turned off and ball lending may be executed.

(How not to execute the ball lending restriction during the setting change mode)
Next, a method of not executing the ball lending restriction during the setting change mode will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. In the example illustrated in FIGS. 22 to 31, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period in which the setting change mode is being controlled, and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state also during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is being controlled. Shall be. That is, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 22-12 and 22-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at a timing before being controlled to the setting change mode, and is kept on during the setting change mode. Shall be. Further, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 22-12 and 22-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at a timing before being controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and is kept on during the setting confirmation mode. Shall be.

  FIG. 22-31 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. Then, after the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is turned on, the mode shifts to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  In the example of FIGS. 22-31, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state while the CPU 103 is executing the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Here, the game control microcomputer 100 continues transmitting the connection confirmation command even during the period in which the game is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The connection confirmation command is a command for confirming the communication state with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuit 21TM505 as described above.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the PRDY signal to the ON state based on the fact that the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state and the fact that the connection confirmation command has been received. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is maintained in the ON state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (that is, in a state of being electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, in the game control microcomputer 100). When the CPU 103 is in the state of being electrically connected) and receiving the connection confirmation command, regardless of whether the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the PRDY signal is output. Is turned on.

  When the card is received in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 The PRDY signal is output to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the ON state of the PRDY signal. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  The payout control board 21TM037 outputs an EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, and the BRQ signal are all in the ON state and the connection confirmation command is being received. Is turned on, and when the falling (OFF) of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050 is detected, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to pay out a predetermined number (for example, 25) of game media to the player.

  Thus, even during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the game control microcomputer 100 continuously transmits the connection confirmation command, thereby continuously receiving the connection confirmation command. On the control microcomputer 21TM370 side, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned on. In this way, the payout control of the game medium by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can be executed even during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. The control load for preventing the payout control from being executed during the controlled period can be reduced. In addition, during the period in which the setting is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the communication function between the card unit 21TM050 and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be checked at the same time, and workability can be improved. it can.

  The CPU 103 continues to transmit the connection confirmation command even after ending the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Based on continuing to receive the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the ON state of the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

  When the payout of a predetermined number of game media is completed and the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being controlled, the payout control board 21TM037 stops outputting the EXS signal. . That is, the EXS signal is turned off. Then, the card unit 21TM050 stops outputting the BRDY signal based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal is turned off. As described above, during the period in which the setting is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the EXS signal may change from the ON state to the OFF state, and accordingly, the BRDY signal may change from the ON state to the OFF state. When the payout of a predetermined number of game media ends and the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 stops after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the payout control board 21TM037 stops outputting the EXS signal. That is, the EXS signal is turned off. Then, the card unit 21TM050 stops outputting the BRDY signal based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state. As described above, after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the EXS signal changes from the ON state to the OFF state, and accordingly, the BRDY signal may change from the ON state to the OFF state.

(How to restart ball lending after the end of setting change mode)
Next, regarding the processing in the case where the payout is interrupted due to the power cutoff during the ball lending being executed and the setting is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on thereafter, FIGS. This will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. In the example shown in FIGS. 22 to 32, the payout of the game medium is interrupted based on the occurrence of the power supply interruption while the payout of the game medium is being performed, and the control is switched to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is turned on, and the setting is performed. After the change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the suspended payout is resumed.

  FIGS. 22-32 show the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control) when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) executes the payout of the game medium. Is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. While the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. Is in the ON state.

  When the power is cut off during the period in which the payout control board 21TM037 is performing the payout of the game medium, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. You. That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the output of the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned off. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, and the payout of the game medium is interrupted. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  The unpaid number is updated based on a detection signal from the number-of-payouts count switch 21TM301 input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. Specifically, the number of unpaid items is calculated from the predetermined number of game media to be paid out by the payout motor 21TM289 (that is, the number of payouts specified by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), from the number-of-payouts count switch. It is calculated by subtracting the number counted by the 21TM301 (that is, the number of game media actually paid out by the payout motor 21TM289).

  After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 22-13, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. While the processing in the mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state.

  While the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection control signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state, and therefore the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state but changes the PRDY signal to the OFF state even when the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even in the state of being electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, during the period when the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 performs the payout control based on the PRDY signal being OFF even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated. The BRDY signal is not output to the substrate 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains OFF. Even if a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains OFF.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 keeps the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state without setting the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the state in which the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the processing is being executed, the payout of the game medium is not executed.

  When the CPU 103 completes the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and executes the serial communication circuit setting processing of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. When the payout operation is possible, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal.

  Then, the power supply is resumed, and the payout control is performed based on the fact that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode controlled at the time of turning on the power is completed (the connection confirmation signal is turned on and the PRDY signal is turned on). The microcomputer 21TM370 drives the payout motor 21TM289 based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and drives the payout motor 21TM289 one by one until the unpaid number data becomes zero. Perform a payout operation. This completes the payout of the game medium that has been interrupted due to the power interruption and the subsequent transition to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As described above, when the supply of the game medium is interrupted due to a power outage during the execution of the ball lending, even if the setting is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode at the time of power restoration, the setting is not performed. After the end of the change mode or the setting confirmation mode, it is possible to resume the interrupted payout of the game medium and complete the ball lending.

  Here, in the example shown in FIGS. 22 to 32, the payout process is interrupted due to the occurrence of power interruption during the payout process, and is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is restored. After the end of the above, the example in which the interrupted payout process is restarted is shown. However, this power-off is caused by the clerk of the game hall turning off the power switch 21TM055 in order to change or confirm the set value. It may be a power-off that has occurred or a power-off that has occurred due to turning off the power switch 21TM055 with the closing of the game arcade. Not only when the power is cut off, but also during the payout processing, the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, or the opening of the glass door frame 3a. In response to the state being detected, the payout process being executed is interrupted, and thereafter, the setting change mode or the setting check mode is controlled, and after the setting change mode or the setting check mode ends, the interrupted payout process is performed. You may make it restart.

(Forced termination of ball rental due to power outage)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 22 to 33, the processing when the payout is forcibly terminated (stopped) when the power is cut off while the ball rental is being performed and the payout is not restarted after the power is restored will be specifically described. explain. In the example shown in FIGS. 22-33, when the power supply is interrupted during the payout of the game medium, the payout being executed is stopped, and when the power supply is restored to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, The payout is not restarted, and the payout is not restarted even after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  FIGS. 22-33 show the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control) when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) executes the payout of the game medium. FIG. 10 is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. While the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. Is in the ON state.

  When the power is cut off during the period in which the payout control board 21TM037 is performing the payout of the game medium, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. You. That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the output of the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, both the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are in the OFF state. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops driving the payout motor 21TM289 based on the EXS signal being turned off, and forcibly ends (stops) the payout of the game medium. At this time, data on the number of unpaid items is not stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (or the unpaid number storage buffer itself is not provided). Therefore, as shown below, after the power is restored, the payout of the game media corresponding to the unpaid number is not executed.

  After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 22-13, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. While the processing in the mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state.

  Thereafter, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state but changes the PRDY signal to the OFF state even when the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even in the state of being electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, during the period when the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 performs the payout control based on the PRDY signal being OFF even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated. The BRDY signal is not output to the substrate 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains OFF. Even if a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains OFF.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 keeps the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state without setting the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the state in which the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the processing is being executed, the payout of the game medium is not executed.

  When the CPU 103 completes the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and executes the serial communication circuit setting processing of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. When the payout operation is possible, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal. Since the data of the unpaid number is not backed up, a predetermined number to be paid out in the ball lending process executed before the power failure occurs (before the power is restored to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode). Of the number of game media (that is, the number of payouts designated by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), the payout is not made for the unpaid number that has not been paid out due to the stoppage of the payout (forced termination). Not done. As described above, when the power is cut off during the ball lending, the payout is forcibly terminated (stopped), and thereafter, when the power is restored, the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the setting change mode or the setting. By not executing the payout for the unpaid number after the confirmation mode is completed, the control of backing up the data of the unpaid number and restarting the payout becomes unnecessary, and the ball lending process can be simplified.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 22 to 33, when the power is cut off during the payout, the data of the unpaid number is not backed up, thereby forcibly terminating (pausing) the payout in progress. Not limited to this mode, as in the example shown in FIGS. 22 to 32, when the power is cut off, the data of the unpaid number is backed up, and after the power is restored, the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are set. Under the condition that neither is controlled, the payout of the game media corresponding to the unpaid number is executed based on the data of the unpaid number that has been backed up (payout is restarted based on the backup data). When the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the payout of the game media corresponding to the unpaid number is not executed (the payout based on the backup data is not restarted), and the setting is not performed. Do not run the payout of unpaid coin number corresponding to the game medium even after the change mode or setting confirmation mode end may be so.

  During the game (in a state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), a configuration is adopted in which the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in this case, the method of forcibly terminating the ball lending accompanying the shift to the setting change mode shown in FIGS. 22-33 can be applied. Further, the PRDY signal can be output (turned on) regardless of whether the connection control signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (whether the connection is on or off). Even when such a configuration is adopted, the method of forcibly terminating ball lending accompanying the shift to the setting change mode shown in FIGS. 22-33 can be applied. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state based on not receiving a connection confirmation signal from the game control microcomputer 100 controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent payout (ball lending) from being executed during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

(Award ball payout control)
FIG. 22-34 is a timing chart showing transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during normal operation. As shown in FIGS. 22-34, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Is received as the connection OK command. Upon receiving the connection OK command as the received ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 again transmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal after a lapse of 1 s (1 second) from the reception. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-described connection confirmation communication processing as long as the connection state is normal.

  If there is a winning when the connection confirmation communication process is not being executed (between the reception of the connection OK command as the received ACK signal and the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal), The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of winning balls in the winning ball request signal, and transmits the winning ball number command as the set winning ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the winning ball number command as the winning ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 pays out the number of winning balls specified by the winning ball number command, and pays out the winning ball (winning ball payout operation). Upon completion, a prize ball end command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. Upon receiving the prize ball end command as a received ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal 1 s (1 second) after the reception.

  Although not shown, a prize is awarded during the execution of the communication processing of the connection confirmation (between transmitting the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal and receiving the connection OK command as the received ACK signal). In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of winning balls in the winning ball request signal, and sends the winning ball number command as the set winning ball request signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. After receiving the connection OK command as a reception ACK signal, the connection control section 21 transmits the connection OK command to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the winning ball number command as the winning ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 pays out the number of winning balls specified by the winning ball number command, and pays out the winning ball (winning ball payout operation). Upon completion, a prize ball end command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. During execution of the prize ball payout (prize ball payout operation), a prize ball preparation command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

(Winning is invalid during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode)
FIG. 22-35 is a timing chart showing transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. In the main board 11, when the power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process.

  As described above, until the CPU 103 executes the interruption permission (step S21TM1540) shown in FIG. A special symbol process including a jackpot determination process and the like, in which a switch process (step S21TM1620 shown in FIG. 22-14) for confirming a state of each switch of the general winning opening switch and the count switch 23 (presence or absence of a detection signal) is not executed. The processing (step S21TM1690 shown in FIG. 22-14) and the like are not executed. Therefore, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the CPU 103 does not detect the detection signal output from each switch, and does not execute the big hit determination processing or the like. That is, during the period in which the game medium is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the winning is invalid even if the game medium passes through each winning opening. Further, since the switch process is not executed, the detection of the game ball by the outlet switch 21TM070 is not executed, and the totaling of the base is not executed. In other words, until the interruption permission is executed, it is not necessary to total the items such as the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base. And the processing load on the CPU 103 can be reduced.

  In the period in which the game is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the game control microcomputer 100 does not execute the switch process and the special symbol process process, thereby invalidating the winning based on the game medium passing through each winning opening. And That is, it does not transmit the winning ball number command to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and does not execute the big hit determination processing or the like. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289 based on not receiving the winning ball number command from the game control microcomputer 100. That is, even if the game medium passes through each winning opening during the period in which the control is performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the payout control of the prize ball is not executed.

  When the CPU 103 completes the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the first general winning opening switch to the fourth general winning opening switch, and the count switch 23 A switch process for confirming the state of each switch (presence or absence of a detection signal) can be executed, it can be detected that the game medium has passed through each winning opening, and a prize ball number command (and a connection confirmation command) can be transmitted. Become. In addition, it becomes possible to execute a special symbol process including a big hit determination process.

  The game control microcomputer 100 transmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 which has received the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal receives the ACK signal. A connection OK command is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100 as a signal. At this time, when the game medium passes through any of the winning holes (when a winning is generated), the CPU 103 detects the winning by executing a switch process, and the microcomputer 100 for game control controls the gaming control microcomputer 100 as a winning ball request signal. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, which has transmitted the prize ball number command to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, has received the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, drives the payout motor 21TM289, and drives a predetermined number (for example, three). Pay out game media. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has paid out a predetermined number of game media transmits a winning ball end command as a received ACK signal.

  If the switch processing is executed during the setting change mode period in which the set value may be changed, the jackpot determination random number is extracted, and the jackpot determination is performed based on the jackpot determination random number. In the case where the big hit is determined based on the big hit determination random number which is a big hit with the set value before the change but is not a big hit with the set value after the change (the set value after the determination), Although the set value does not result in a big hit, there may be a case where the big hit determination is executed based on the big hit determination random number which becomes the big hit with the changed set value (set value after determination). That is, in these cases, the relationship between the execution timing of the jackpot determination and the set value is complicated, and the player or the game arcade may be disadvantaged.

  In the present embodiment, when the game mode is controlled to the setting change mode, the payout of the prize ball based on the passing of the game ball through each winning port is not performed, and the big hit determination process is not performed. Is prevented from complicating the relationship between the execution timing and the set value, and disadvantages of the player or the playground are prevented.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the setting change mode in which the set value can be changed, in the setting check mode in which the set value is displayed but cannot be changed, similarly, the winning is invalidated, and the big hit determination process is not performed. I have to. For example, unlike the setting change mode, the setting check mode can be controlled when the game control timer interrupt process is being executed instead of when the power is turned on. If the special symbol process can be executed, control completely different from the setting change mode is required, and a problem arises in that the control load of the game control microcomputer 100 increases.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, even in the setting confirmation mode, control can be performed only at the time of turning on the power, similarly to the setting change mode. By not executing the processing, the processing is shared and the control load of the game control microcomputer 100 is reduced.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 22-12 and 22-13, the timer interrupt setting is performed after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends (step S21TM1500). . Accordingly, since the game control timer interrupt process itself is not executed, the switch process and the special symbol process process in the game control timer interrupt process are not executed, and the period in which the game is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Winning in has been disabled. On the other hand, when the game is stopped due to a magnetic error, a radio wave error, a vibration error, or the like, whether a game stop error has occurred during the period in which the game control timer interrupt process is being executed, that is, during the game. If it is determined (step S21TM1615) that a game stop error has occurred (step S21TM1615), subsequent switch processing (step S21TM1620) and special symbol processing (step S21TM1620) in the same interrupt processing S21TM1690) is not executed, so that the winning is invalidated. As described above, the method of invalidating the winning (stopping the game) differs between the case where the setting is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and the case where the game stop error occurs.

  Note that by stopping the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during the period in which the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not transmit a connection OK command as a received ACK signal to the game control microcomputer 100. Accordingly, the microcomputer 100 for game control sends the microcomputer 21TM370 for payout as a prize ball request signal to the microcomputer 21TM370 for payout based on the fact that the connection OK command has not been received during the period of being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. By not transmitting the prize ball number command, it is possible to prevent the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 from executing the payout control of the game medium. As described above, based on the fact that the game control microcomputer 100 does not output the connection confirmation command and the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not execute the payout control, Winning can be invalidated.

  During the game (in a state where the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 may be operated to control the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. . Even when such a configuration is adopted, the method shown in FIGS. 22 to 35 is applicable, and based on the control in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the game control microcomputer 100 , Switch processing and special symbol processing are preferably not executed.

  In addition, a configuration in which the game control microcomputer 100 can execute a switch process while being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (a configuration in which it is possible to detect that the game medium has passed each winning opening). It is good. When such a configuration is employed, as described above, the transmission of the prize ball number command and the connection confirmation command is stopped when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, thereby controlling the payout control. The payout is invalidated without causing the microcomputer 21TM370 to execute the payout control, and the special symbol process is not executed. Then, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the transmission of the winning ball number command and the connection confirmation command is resumed in a state where the switch processing can be executed, and the special symbol process processing is executed.

(Payout restriction method during detection of machine frame / door frame opening)
FIG. 22-36 is a timing chart showing transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during detection of the opening of the gaming machine frame / door frame. As described above, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the reception ACK transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during the normal operation. A connection OK command is received as a signal. At this time, when a clerk of the game hall opens the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 causes the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door. An open state of the frame 3a is detected.

  In the state in which the gaming machine frame 3 is open (and in the case where the glass door frame 3a and the upper plate are integrated, the state in which the glass door frame 3a is open), award balls to be paid out Is not physically connected to the path on which the flowing prize balls are stored, so if the prize balls are paid out in this state, the game media reaches the upper plate. Without falling. Here, in a state where the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening, and the large winning opening. When the passage of the game medium is detected at any one of the winning ports, the microcomputer 100 for game control transmits a command for the number of prize balls as a prize ball request signal to the microcomputer 21TM370 for payout. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, which detects the open state of the frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, does not execute the payout control of the game medium, and sends a prize ball preparation command as a received ACK signal to the game control microcomputer 100. Send to This prize ball preparation command is issued until the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 no longer detects the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, that is, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Transmission to the game control microcomputer 100 is continued until the state is closed.

  In this manner, during the period in which the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, even if the game medium passes through each winning opening and detects a winning, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the payout motor 21TM289. Is not executed without driving the prize ball. Then, a prize ball preparation command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

  When the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 finishes detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 activates the payout motor 21TM289. It is driven to execute payout control of a predetermined number (a number specified by a prize ball number command) of prize balls according to a prize during a period in which the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected. . Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has paid out a predetermined number of game media transmits a winning ball end command as a received ACK signal.

  When detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a during the payout of the prize ball, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 suspends the payout of the prize ball, and The data of the unpaid number out of the number specified by the number command is stored in the backup area in the RAM. Then, a prize ball preparation command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. When the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 finishes detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 switches the payout motor 21TM289. It drives and executes the payout control of the game media corresponding to the number of unpaid. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has paid out the game medium transmits a winning ball end command as a received ACK signal.

  In addition, during the game (the state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), a configuration is adopted in which the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be set to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in this case, the payout restriction method during the detection of the opening of the gaming machine frame / door frame shown in FIGS. 22-36 can be applied. In the present embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and operate as long as the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is not opened. It is considered impossible. Therefore, in order to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame 3 must be opened, and during the period in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, Normally, the machine frame 3 is open. During the period in which the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is restricted so that the payout of the prize ball is not executed. As a result, the payout of prize balls during the period when the setting change mode is being controlled and the period when the setting confirmation mode is being controlled are limited.

  Next, control in the case where power is cut off during the setting change mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 22-37 (1) and (2).

  FIGS. 22-37 (1) and (2) show the patterns related to the power-down in different charts based on the difference in the situation at the time of the power-down. The power-off pattern shown in FIG. 22-37 (1) indicates the control when the power-off occurs in a state where “set value confirmation” is not performed during “setting value change”, and the power-off recovery is performed. The setting value at the time becomes the setting value at the time of the previous power-on. Further, the power-off pattern shown in FIG. 22-37 (2) shows the control when the power-off occurs in the state where “set value decision” has been performed during “the setting value is being changed”. The set value at power recovery is the set value at the time of power failure.

  That is, FIG. 22-37 (1) shows a setting in the case where the power is cut off without the operation of “set value confirmation” in which the lock switch 21TM051 is operated to the OFF state (the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state). FIG. 22-37 (2) shows the control related to the set value when the power is cut off after the operation of “set value confirmation” in which the lock switch 21TM051 is operated to the OFF state. Is shown.

  FIGS. 22-37 (1) and (2) show various situations in the setting change work from the top to the bottom in the order of occurrence (see the “Order” and “Status” columns). ). Further, in FIGS. 22-37 (1) and (2), the ON / OFF state of the lock switch 21TM051 in each situation (orders 1 to 8) is shown in the column of “lock switch”. In the column of “set value”, set value data (set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) in each situation is shown. In the column of "set value display" in the figure, the display contents (set values stored in the setting information temporary storage area) of the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) in each situation are shown. I have.

  When the setting change operation is performed, as shown at the top of the column of “Status” in FIG. 22-37 (1), the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on (order 1). As shown in the “Lock Switch” column, the state of the lock switch 21TM051 at this time is in the ON state. In FIG. 22-37 (1), the “set value” at the time of “power-on” in order 1 is “1” because the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 at this time is “1”. , “1”.

  Also, the display content of the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) shown in the column of "set value display" is blank (blank) just at this stage because the power has just been turned on. This is before the process of reading and displaying the set value stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM1150), indicating that the display of the set value has not been started.

  After the “power-on” status, the “setting change mode starts” status (order 2). Then, in the "setting change mode start", as shown in FIG. 22-37 (1), the "lock switch" column is "ON", and the "setting value" column is the RAM 102. Is set to “1” based on the fact that it has not been changed from the set value stored in the set value storage area of the set value storage area of the RAM 102 as described above. Is set to “1” based on the fact that the setting value read from the setting information and stored in the setting information temporary storage area is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A).

  Subsequently, when the status of “setting value is being changed” (order 3) is reached, the “lock switch” column remains “ON”, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated. As shown in FIG. 22-37 (1), since the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed, the “set value” column remains “1”, but the setting information is temporarily stored. By changing the set value stored in the area from “1” to “2”, the “set value display” column (set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A)) The selected value changes to "2".

  Further, when the status of “setting value is being changed” (order 4) is reached, the “lock switch” column remains “ON”, and when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, As shown in FIG. 22-37 (1), since the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed, the “set value” column remains “1”. Is changed from “2” to “3”, the “set value display” column (set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A)) is selected. To the new value "3".

  Then, as shown in FIG. 22-37 (1), when the power is cut off during “setting value change” (order 5), the operation for finalizing the setting value is not performed, and the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not set. Has not been executed (the process of step S21TM1190 for finalizing the set value), the column of "set value" remains "1". That is, when the power is turned off, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 maintains the state of “1” when the power is turned on. Here, the set value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is deleted due to the occurrence of the power interruption.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 22-37 (1), when the power is turned on while the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (order 6), In the “setting change mode start” situation (order 7), the setting value (“1” in this example) stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read and stored in the setting information temporary storage area. Is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (the first display unit 21TM029A), the "set value" column remains "1", and the "set value display" column also becomes "1". Note that, in the order 7, the same applies to a case where the setting is changed to the setting confirmation mode instead of the setting change mode.

  As described above, when the power is turned on, the mode is changed to the setting change mode, and the setting change operation is not completed (the lock switch 21TM051 is not switched to the OFF state). Since the set value stored in the storage area is not changed, the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) when the mode is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored, The setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 at the time of the previous power-on (before the power-off occurs) are used. As described above, it is possible to appropriately set a set value in the case where power is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode.

  Next, the control in the case where the power is cut off after the set value is determined will be described with reference to FIG. The description of the processing part common to the case where the power supply shuts down before the set value is determined is omitted. When the power is cut off after the set value is determined, the “set value determination” shown in order 5 is performed after the “setting value is being changed” shown in order 4. Here, immediately before the operation for finalizing the set value is performed, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is “1”, and the set value ( The display monitor 21TM029 (the set value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A) is in the state of "3". Then, during the setting change mode, the “lock switch” column is set to “OFF” based on turning off the lock switch 21TM051.

  That is, in the setting change mode, when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off (YES in step S21TM1180), the setting value “1” stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is stored in the setting information temporary storage area. The stored set value (the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A)) is overwritten by "3", and the set value is determined (step S21TM1190). As a result, "3" is stored as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102.

  Then, when the power is turned off in this state (order 6), the process of overwriting the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (the process of step S21TM1190 for fixing the set value) is executed. The column of “setting value” is “3”. That is, when the power is turned off, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is changed to “3” which is different from the value when the power is turned on. Here, the set value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is deleted due to the occurrence of the power interruption.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 22-37 (2), when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the OFF state to the ON state and the power is turned on (order 7), the state of the “setting change mode start” (the order 7) In order 8), the setting value (“3” in this example) stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read and stored in the setting information temporary storage area, and the display monitor 21TM029 (the first display unit 21TM029A). ), The “set value” column is “3”, and the “set value display” column is also “3”. Note that, in the order 8, the same applies to the case where the setting is changed to the setting confirmation mode instead of the setting change mode.

  As described above, if the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off without turning off the lock switch 21TM051 during the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off. The setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 has not been changed since the power was turned on, and the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is deleted. Therefore, the clerk of the amusement arcade may erroneously shift the gaming machine to the setting change mode when the power is turned on, and further perform the setting change operation (the operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052). However, by subsequently turning off the power switch 21TM055, the change of the set value can be stopped to return to the state before shifting to the setting change mode.

  Since the transition to the setting change mode and the transition to the setting confirmation mode involve power-off (including turning off the power switch 21TM055) and subsequent power-on, the state of the gaming machine is unstable. The handling of the set value in such an unstable state is a problem. However, as shown in FIG. 22-37 (1), the power is supplied without the lock switch 21TM051 being turned off. If a power failure occurs, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed from the time of power-on, so that the set value can be appropriately determined and the control of the set value becomes unstable. Therefore, it is possible to execute appropriate control relating to the set value.

  FIG. 22-38 shows an effect device of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the lock switch 21TM051 or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated during a game (a state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed). An example is shown in which (image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, and game effect lamp 9) notifies that an operation for changing a set value has been performed.

  FIG. 22-38 (1) shows a state in which a decorative symbol is variably displayed on the image display device 5 during a game. At this time, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing a game control timer interrupt process. The main board 11 (CPU 103) detects that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated (switched from the OFF state to the ON state) during the game (for example, during the execution of the variable display of the special symbol) (game control). (Step S21TM1660 of timer interrupt processing for game), transmits a lock switch operation command indicating that lock switch 21TM051 is operated to effect control board 12 (CPU 120 for effect control) (step S21TM1710 of timer interrupt processing for game control). When detecting that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM1660 of the game control timer interrupt process), the setting changeover switch operation indicating that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has been operated. Command to the effect control board 12 And transmits to the effect control CPU 120) (step a game control timer interruption process S21TM1710). That is, a lock switch operation command and / or a setting changeover switch operation command are transmitted to notify that an operation for changing the setting value has been performed.

  As shown in FIG. 22-38 (2), the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120) receives the lock switch operation command and / or the setting changeover switch operation command, and performs the setting change mode and It is possible to specify that an operation for changing the set value has been performed, and to notify the user of the fact that control is not performed in any of the setting check modes. For example, based on the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes an abnormal operation warning notification that displays the character “operation of the lock switch has been detected.” In addition, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, an abnormal operation warning notification that displays the text “Operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected” is executed.

  In this example, based on the fact that both the lock switch operation command and the setting changeover switch operation command have been received, the effect control CPU 120 detects the operation of the lock switch and the setting changeover switch as an abnormal operation warning notification. Are displayed on the image display device 5. In the abnormal operation warning notification, since the display priority is higher than the background image and the decorative pattern (the displayed layer is higher than the background image and the decorative pattern), as shown in FIG. Even during the variable display of the symbol, the clerk at the game hall, etc., confirms that the operation for changing the set value has been performed even though it is not controlled in any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. By grasping clearly, it is possible to confirm whether or not fraud has been performed. Note that the speaker 8L, 8R outputs a sound (for example, a sound indicating that the operation of the lock switch and the setting changeover switch has been detected) to notify that the operation for changing the set value has been detected, and outputs the game effect lamp 9. May be emitted in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, a red flashing mode) to notify that an operation for changing the set value has been detected.

  In this embodiment, only when the power is turned on (before the game control timer interrupt process is executed), the configuration can be set to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Normally, the setting value is changed or confirmed. (Operation of the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052) is not performed within a period in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed. Accordingly, the operation of the lock switch 21TM051 and the operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are performed during the period in which the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is being performed or the period in which the variable display of the ordinary symbol is being performed. In such a case, there is a possibility that the setting value is being illegally changed.

  In the present embodiment, when the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are operated at a timing other than when the power is turned on or during a period in which the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Informs that an operation for changing the set value and an operation for confirming the set value have been performed on the image display device 5, which is the largest display device provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1, to detect fraud. I try to deter them.

  Further, as described above, when the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are operated, the gaming machine frame 3 is normally in an open state, so that the gaming machine frame / door frame is opened. The open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected by the sensor 21TM300, and the fact is notified. Further, as described above, ball lending is suspended or stopped, and award ball payout is also suspended or stopped. However, with respect to the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed at a predetermined position on the gaming island, the gaming machine frame 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed at a position facing the predetermined position on the gaming island is opened. Thus, the back side of the game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed at the predetermined position can be seen from the position facing the predetermined position, and the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch ( Setting switch 21TM052 can be operated. That is, even when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 at a predetermined position does not detect the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3, the lock switch 21TM051 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the predetermined position and In some cases, the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 can be operated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are set regardless of whether or not the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300. When the operation is performed, the fact that an operation for changing the set value and an operation for confirming the set value are performed is notified, thereby suppressing the deterrence of fraud.

(Setting change corresponding signal)
Next, various signals output from the information output terminal of the main board 11 will be specifically described. As shown in FIGS. 22 to 39, the information output circuit 112 in this embodiment is provided with ten information output terminals from a first terminal to a tenth terminal, and outputs a signal corresponding to each information output terminal. Is done.

  In the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 22-39 (1), a prize ball signal is output from the first terminal. The prize ball signal is a pulse signal output every time 10 prize balls are paid out, and has a pulse width of 0.1 second. A game machine frame / door frame open signal is output from the second terminal. The game machine frame / door frame open signal is turned on when the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3, and the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected. It is also in the ON state when it is on.

  From the third terminal, a signal for the total number of symbols determined is output. The all symbol determination frequency signal is output when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the display result is derived and displayed (when it is determined), and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed to derive the display result. It is a pulse-like signal output when displayed (when it is determined), and has a pulse width of 0.5 seconds. From the fourth terminal, an all starting port signal is output. The all-starting-port signal is a pulse-like signal that is output when a game ball is won to the first starting winning port and is also output when a game ball is received to the second starting winning port. The pulse width is 0.1 seconds.

  The jackpot 1 signal is output from the fifth terminal. The big hit 1 signal is turned on when the big hit game state is controlled. The jackpot outputs two jackpot signals. The big hit 2 signal is turned on when being controlled to the big hit gaming state, and is also turned on when being controlled to the high base state. That is, a period in which one big hit signal is in the OFF state and two big hit signals are in the ON state can be specified as the high base state.

  A setting change correspondence signal is output from the seventh terminal. The setting change corresponding signal is a signal that is turned on during the period of being controlled in the setting change mode and is also turned on during the period of being controlled in the setting check mode. The setting change corresponding signal can be output in a pulse form (special mode) after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, as described later. The setting value is specified on the external device side by the number of pulses at that time. It is possible.

  An out signal is output from the eighth terminal. The out signal is a pulse-like signal output every time 10 out balls (game balls fired in the game area and guided to the outlet) are detected by the outlet switch 21TM070, and the pulse width is 0. .1 second. A winning signal is output from the ninth terminal. A winning signal is generated each time a game ball wins a winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, large winning opening, first general winning opening to fourth general winning opening) (corresponding to each winning opening). This is a pulse-like signal that is output each time a winning is detected by the switch) and is output each time 10 winning balls are paid out. The pulse width of the winning signal is 0.1 second.

  A security signal is output from the tenth terminal. The security signal is a signal that is turned ON for 30 seconds when an initialization process (RAM clear in step S21TM1410) is executed when the power is turned on. In addition, when an injustice is detected, it is turned on for 4 minutes. In the case where the misconduct is detected, for example, a case where an abnormal prize is generated is included. An abnormal winning is determined based on the fact that the gaming ball has won in the case of winning). In addition, the case where the switch abnormality detection occurs is included, and the period in which the switch corresponding to each winning opening is in the winning detection state is abnormal (for example, the game control timer interrupt processing is performed ten times or more in succession). (1 When the start port switch is in the ON state, etc.), it is determined that the switch is abnormal. When the magnetic sensor detects abnormal magnetism, based on the occurrence of the game stop target error, the ON state continues until the power is turned off, and when the abnormal magnetism is no longer detected after the power is turned on again ( After the error is cleared), it is ON for 4 minutes.

  Furthermore, in the example of the pattern 1 shown in FIG. 22-39 (1), the security signal is in the ON state while being controlled in the setting change mode, and is also in the ON state while being controlled in the setting confirmation mode. .

  As described above, the security signal can be output from the tenth terminal, and the setting change correspondence signal can be output from the seventh terminal. It is possible to notify the outside that the control has been performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (the processing related to the setting change has been executed). Further, with the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the setting change corresponding signal output from the seventh terminal is temporarily turned off, and then stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 from the same seventh terminal. Since the number of pulse-like setting change correspondence signals corresponding to the current setting value is output, the setting value can be notified to the outside.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 22-40 (1), when the mode shifts to the setting change mode at the time of power-on, a setting correspondence change signal is output from the seventh terminal, and at the same time, from the tenth terminal. Outputs a security signal. Then, based on the execution of the RAM clear, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds even after the setting change corresponding signal is turned off with the end of the setting change mode.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 22-40 (2), when the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, a setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal, and at the same time, a security signal is output from the tenth terminal. Is output. Then, based on the fact that the RAM clear is not executed, the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal are simultaneously turned off with the end of the setting confirmation mode. Here, when the RAM clear is executed after the control is set to the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM1320 or NO in step S21TM1330), the example shown in FIG. Similarly to the above, after the setting change corresponding signal is turned off with the end of the setting check mode, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds.

  If the RAM is cleared without switching to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds after the power is turned on. Does not turn on.

  As described above, the security signal is also in the ON state while being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, even when the external device does not assume the input of the setting change corresponding signal and is configured not to execute the processing based on the input of the setting change corresponding signal, at least the external device is configured to perform the processing based on the input of the security signal. Thus, it is possible to recognize that control may be performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  The setting change corresponding signal is turned off when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, but the security signal is set in the setting change mode (or the parity in the setting confirmation mode) based on the execution of the RAM clear. Even if the result of the check is not normal), the state is ON for 30 seconds. On the other hand, when the RAM is cleared without being controlled by any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds from the time when the power is turned on. Therefore, on the external device side to which the security signal is input, when the input period of the security signal is about 30 seconds, the RAM clear is executed without being controlled by any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. It is possible to recognize that there is a possibility. On the other hand, when the input period of the security signal exceeds 30 seconds, it is possible to recognize that the control may be performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the input period of the security signal reaches 30 seconds. If not, it is possible to recognize that the RAM clear may not have been executed after being controlled to the setting confirmation mode. That is, when the input period of the security signal is about 30 seconds, it is determined that the RAM clear may have been executed without being controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. When the security signal can be recognized by the device and the input period of the security signal is less than 30 seconds, the management device can recognize that the setting control mode may have been temporarily controlled. If the period exceeds 30 seconds, the management apparatus can recognize that the setting change mode may have been controlled. Therefore, it is possible to distinguish what control the gaming machine has executed on the outside based on the output period of the security signal of the gaming machine.

  Therefore, even when the external device is configured not to assume the input of the setting change corresponding signal and not to execute the processing based on the input of the setting change corresponding signal, at least the external device is configured to perform the processing based on the input of the security signal. Thus, the possibility that the RAM clear has been executed and the possibility that the setting has been changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be distinguished and recognized.

  Note that, as shown in FIG. 22C, the security signal may not be output during the period when the mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode. This configuration includes a configuration in which the security signal is output during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled, and a configuration in which the security signal is not output during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Does not output the security signal and does not output the security signal even during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Specifically, when the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, a setting correspondence change signal is output from the seventh terminal, but no security signal is output from the tenth terminal. When the setting change corresponding signal is turned off with the end of the setting check mode, the OFF state of the security signal is maintained based on the fact that the RAM is not cleared. That is, when the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is not output on condition that the RAM clear is not executed.

  As described above, in the configuration in which the security signal is not output during the period of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode, the RAM is cleared after being controlled to the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. In this case (NO in step S21TM1320 or NO in step S21TM1330), the security signal is ON for 30 seconds from the end of the setting confirmation mode (OFF state of the setting change corresponding signal).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 22D, the security signal may not be output during the period in which the setting change mode is being controlled. That is, when the mode is changed to the setting change mode when the power is turned on, the setting correspondence change signal is output from the seventh terminal, but no security signal is output from the tenth terminal. Then, based on the fact that the RAM has been cleared with the end of the setting change mode, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds even after the setting change corresponding signal is turned off. In the configuration in which the security signal is not output during the period in which the control mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, if the RAM is cleared without shifting to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, The security signal is turned on for 30 seconds after the power is turned on, but the setting change corresponding signal is not turned on.

  As described above, while the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being controlled, the setting change corresponding signal is set to the ON state while the security signal is set to the OFF state, and when the RAM clear is executed, the setting change mode or the setting change mode is set. By turning on the security signal for 30 seconds after the setting check mode ends (after the setting change corresponding signal is turned off), when one signal is on, the other signal is turned off. Relationship. Due to such a relationship, the signal output control is simplified (the output control is simplified because both signals are not turned on at the same time), and the control period to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is clarified in the external device. , And clearly recognize that the initialization process has been executed upon termination of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 22-40 (6), when the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, the game is played from the second terminal. A machine frame / door frame open signal is output, and at the same time, a security signal is output from the tenth terminal. Then, based on the fact that the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is completed with the closing of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, After the machine frame / door frame open signal is turned off, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds.

  Here, in the example of the pattern 1 shown in FIG. 22-39 (1), the setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal, and the security signal is output from the tenth terminal. There is a case where it is difficult to assign an output terminal dedicated to the setting change corresponding signal because of the restriction on the assignment of the setting change corresponding signal. The example of the pattern 2 shown in FIG. 22-39 (2) shows an example in which the setting change corresponding signal is also output from the tenth terminal from which the security signal is output.

  In the pattern 2, the first to sixth terminals, the eighth terminal, and the ninth terminal are the same as in the signal assignment in the pattern 1. In pattern 2, unlike pattern 1, a high base signal is output from the seventh terminal. The high base signal is turned on when being controlled to the high base state. A security signal is output from the tenth terminal. The security signal is a signal that is turned ON for 30 seconds when an initialization process (RAM clear in step S21TM1410) is executed when the power is turned on. In addition, when an injustice is detected, it is turned on for 4 minutes. In the case where the misconduct is detected, for example, a case where an abnormal prize is generated is included. An abnormal winning is determined based on the fact that the gaming ball has won in the case of winning). In addition, the case where the switch abnormality detection occurs is included, and the period in which the switch corresponding to each winning opening is in the winning detection state is abnormal (for example, the game control timer interrupt processing is performed ten times or more in succession). (1 When the start port switch is in the ON state, etc.), it is determined that the switch is abnormal. When the magnetic sensor detects abnormal magnetism, based on the occurrence of the game stop target error, the ON state continues until the power is turned off, and when the abnormal magnetism is no longer detected after the power is turned on again ( After the error is cleared), it is ON for 4 minutes.

  Further, in the example of FIG. 22-39 (2), a setting change corresponding signal is output from the tenth terminal. The setting change corresponding signal is a signal that is turned on during the period of being controlled in the setting change mode and is also turned on during the period of being controlled in the setting check mode. The setting change corresponding signal can be output in a pulse form (special mode) after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, as described later. The setting value is specified on the external device side by the number of pulses at that time. It is possible. Therefore, a security signal and a setting change correspondence signal are output from the tenth terminal. That is, the security signal and the setting change correspondence signal are output from the common terminal.

  As described above, since the security signal and the setting change correspondence signal can be output from the tenth terminal, it is possible to notify the possibility that an illegal act has been performed to the outside, and to provide an output terminal dedicated to the setting change correspondence signal. Without this, it is possible to notify the outside that there is a possibility that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has been controlled (that there is a possibility that a process related to the setting change has been executed). Further, with the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the setting change corresponding signal output from the tenth terminal is temporarily turned OFF (when the RAM clear is executed, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is disabled). After 30 seconds from the end, the signal output from the tenth terminal is turned off), and thereafter, from the same tenth terminal, the number of pulse-shaped pulses corresponding to the current set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 Since the setting change corresponding signal is output, the setting value can be notified to the outside. Since the setting change corresponding signal is transmitted to the management device together with the game machine number (vehicle number) via the relay device provided on the gaming machine island, the management device sets the set value based on the machine number and the setting change corresponding signal. By displaying the set value and the predetermined set value in association with each other, it is possible to perform a process of displaying the set value in a comparable manner. As a result, the actual setting values of the plurality of gaming machines can be easily managed by the manager of the game arcade via the management device, and the setting values determined in advance by the manager and the setting values changed in the setting change work. The administrator can grasp the inconsistency with the value. Then, when such inconsistency has occurred, by performing setting confirmation or re-setting change work for the gaming machine, it is possible to achieve appropriate management of settings for a plurality of gaming machines in the amusement store. it can.

  As described above, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off with the end of the setting change mode and the end of the setting confirmation mode. Output in a special manner. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 22-41, a number of pulses corresponding to the set value are output as the setting change corresponding signal in the special mode. In this example, the same pulses as the number of set values are output. The pulse width is, for example, 0.1 second. For example, when the set value is 3, a pulse having a width of 0.1 second is output three times at predetermined intervals (for example, 0.5 second intervals). This makes it possible to easily specify the set value of each gaming machine in an external device such as a hall computer.

  As shown in FIG. 22-42 (1), when the power is turned on, the setting change mode is controlled, and the setting change corresponding signal is turned on. Here, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on is 1. Then, in the setting change mode, it is assumed that the setting change mode ends without the setting value being changed. With the end of the setting change mode, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off. Is output as one pulse.

  As described above, it is possible to notify the outside whether or not the setting change mode is controlled by the setting change corresponding signal, and to set the value at the end of the setting change mode (when the setting value is changed, (A set value after change) can be notified to the outside, and a signal for notifying whether or not the mode is controlled to the setting change mode and a signal for notifying the set value are output from a common information output terminal. Becomes possible.

  Further, in the present embodiment, not only when the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are ended, but also at predetermined predetermined timings, a number of pulses corresponding to the set value are output as a special mode setting change corresponding signal. You. Specifically, events related to the gaming state, such as being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, ending the jackpot gaming state, ending the high base state, and increasing the number of paid prize balls by 1000. In addition, when an event related to a gaming machine error such as detection of the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, detection of the opening of the glass door frame 3 a, detection of a magnetic abnormality, etc. (When it occurs), and outputs a special mode setting change corresponding signal corresponding to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. In the example shown in FIG. 22-42 (1), one pulse is output as a special mode setting change corresponding signal when a big hit occurs.

  Thereby, in the external device, it is possible to secure an opportunity to grasp the setting value of each gaming machine. For example, when the setting change corresponding signal is not properly input at the end of the setting change mode, the external device Even if the set value cannot be specified on the side, the set value can be specified at a predetermined subsequent timing, and the prevention of improper change of the set value by an inappropriate method can be enhanced.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 22-42 (2), the setting change corresponding signal is turned on when the power is turned on and the setting change mode is controlled. Here, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on is 1. Then, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 has been changed from 1 to 3 as a result of the change of the set value in the setting change mode. In this case, with the end of the setting change mode, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off, and based on the fact that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 becomes 3, the setting change corresponding signal is turned off. Three pulses are output as a signal. In the example shown in FIG. 22-42 (2), three pulses are output as a special mode setting change corresponding signal when a big hit occurs.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 22-41 (1), the operation of changing the set value (the operation of the setting changeover switch 21TM052) was not performed while being controlled in the setting change mode, and the set value was not changed. In the case and as shown in FIG. 22-41 (2), an operation of changing the setting value (operation of the setting changeover switch 21TM052) is performed while being controlled in the setting change mode, and the setting value is changed. In either case, after the setting change mode ends, a pulse-like setting change corresponding signal corresponding to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is output. I have. As described above, when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode, the common signal output process is executed at the end of the setting change mode regardless of whether the setting change operation or the setting value is actually changed. Thus, the signal output processing can be simplified.

  In the example shown in FIG. 22-42 (3), the setting change corresponding signal is turned on in accordance with the control to the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on. Here, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on is 1. In the setting confirmation mode, since the setting value is not changed, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 remains unchanged at 1. In this case, with the end of the setting confirmation mode, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off, and based on the fact that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is 1, the setting change corresponding signal is turned off. Is output as one pulse. In the example shown in FIG. 22- (3), one pulse is output as a special mode setting change corresponding signal when a big hit occurs.

  As described above, it is possible to notify to the outside whether or not the control mode is set to the setting check mode by the setting change corresponding signal, and to set values notified in the setting check mode (setting values stored in the RAM 102 when the power is turned on). A setting value stored in the area, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) can be notified to the outside, and a signal notifying whether or not the control is in the setting confirmation mode, and a setting value Can be output from a common information output terminal.

  In the information terminal assignment pattern 2 shown in FIG. 22-39 (2) described above, if the RAM clear is executed following the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, a signal output from the tenth terminal is output. After the elapse of 30 seconds from the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the state is turned off, and thereafter, from the same tenth terminal, a pulse number (special mode) corresponding to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 ) Is output.

(Modification of the game control main process)
Next, another embodiment related to the game control main processing of FIGS. 22-11 to 22-13 will be described with reference to FIGS. 22-43 and 22-44. FIGS. 22-11 to 22-13 show an example in which the initialization processing (RAM clear) is executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 22-44, after the initialization process (RAM clear) is executed, the mode may be shifted to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 22-11, when the CPU 103 sets the RAM 102 in an accessible state (step S21TM1060), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM2110 in FIG. The state of the output signal (clear signal) of the switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is confirmed (step S21TM2110).

  When the ON state is detected in checking the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM2110), the CPU 103 sets the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on. A RAM clear flag indicating that the operation has been performed is set (step S21TM2210), and an initialization process is executed (step S21TM2220). A series of processes involved in the initialization process (the processes shown in steps S21TM2220 to S21TM2270) are the same as the processes shown in steps S21TM1410 to S21TM1460 shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, in the state confirmation of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 in step S21TM2110, when the OFF state is detected (NO in step S21TM2110), the CPU 103 executes the processing of step S21TM2120 and thereafter. I do. The processing shown in step S21TM2120 to step S2170 is the same as the processing shown in step S21TM1230 to step S21TM1370 shown in FIG.

  Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the lock switch 21TM051 is ON after transmitting the backup command at the time of power-off restoration in step S21TM2170 or transmitting the initialization command at power-on in step S21TM2270. (Step S21TM2310 in FIGS. 22-44). If the lock switch 21TM051 is not ON (step S21TM2310; NO), the process proceeds to step S21TM2550. If lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM2310; YES), CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag has been set, that is, whether or not clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 has been operated at power-on. Is confirmed (step S21TM2320).

  If the RAM clear flag is set, that is, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM2320), the CPU 103 sets the setting change mode in which the set value can be changed. (Step S21TM2330 to Step S21TM2400). That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, and the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. The processing state is controlled to the setting change mode based on the status. The processing shown in steps S21TM2330 to S21TM2400 related to the setting change mode is the same as the processing shown in steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200 in FIG. After executing the processing of step S21TM2400, the set RAM clear flag is deleted (step S21TM2410), and the flow advances to step S21TM2550.

  If the RAM clear flag has not been set, that is, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has not been operated when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM2320), the CPU 103 checks the setting to confirm the setting value. The mode is shifted (step S21TM2510 to step S21TM2540). That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, but does not satisfy the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. Based on this, the processing state is controlled to the setting confirmation mode. The processing shown in steps S21TM2510 to S21TM2540 related to the setting confirmation mode is the same as the processing shown in steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240 in FIG. Then, in step S21TM2540, when it is confirmed that lock switch 21TM051 has been turned off (YES in step S21TM2540), the flow advances to step S21TM2550.

  Here, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not operated when the power is turned on, it is temporarily determined to be NO in step S21TM2120 or step S21TM2130 in FIG. Is executed, the RAM clear flag is not set. As a result, NO is determined in step S21TM2320, and the mode is not shifted to the setting change mode. As described above, even when the initialization process (initialization of the game state by clearing the RAM) is executed, when the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on is not satisfied. Is not controlled in the setting change mode.

  After the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, or when the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state at the time of turning on the power, a series of processes related to Steps S21TM2550 to S21TM2620 are performed in Steps S21TM1470 to S21TM1470 shown in FIG. This is the same as the series of processing shown in step S21TM1540, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 22-43 and 22-44, when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode, the CPU 103 transmits the power-on initialization command (step S21TM2270), and then transmits the setting change mode command (step S21TM2340). ) To transmit a setting command (step S21TM2550). When the CPU 103 is controlled to be in the setting confirmation mode, the CPU 103 transmits a backup command at the time of power-off recovery or an initialization command at the time of power-on (step S21TM2170 or step S21TM2270), and then transmits a setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM2170). S21TM2520), and transmits a setting command (step S21TM2550). Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the end of the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting command after receiving the setting change mode command, and the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp, and the like. 9 can notify the end of the setting change mode. Further, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the end of the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting command after receiving the setting confirmation mode command, and the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp, and the like. 9 can notify the end of the setting confirmation mode. According to such a configuration, without providing a dedicated command (a setting change mode end command or a setting check mode end command) for designating that the setting change mode or the setting check mode has ended, the setting command is received. Since it is possible for the effect control CPU 120 to specify that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has ended, the number of commands can be reduced. That is, the control load of the game control microcomputer 100 can be reduced, and the capacity for storing the number of commands can be suppressed.

(Other Modifications Related to Feature 21TM)
In the above embodiment, the example in which the switch for changing the set value is common to the clear switch for initializing the game machine (RAM clear) is not limited to such a form. Is provided on the main board 11 (the game control microcomputer 100 can detect the operation), and is different from a clear switch for initializing the game machine (RAM clear). It may be. With this configuration, the position of the switch for switching the set value and the position of the display monitor 21TM029 (the first display unit 21TM029A) are different from the case where the switch for switching the set value is provided on the power supply board. Is closer, and when changing the set value, it is easy to check the set value and to perform a switching operation in accordance with the check of the set value, thereby improving workability.

  In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the set value is displayed in the partial display area (the first display unit 21TM029A) of the display monitor 21TM029 on which the game information such as the totaled base is displayed is described. The display device is not limited to such a form, and is a display device different from the display monitor 21TM029 on which the aggregated game state is displayed, for example, a dedicated display device for displaying set values, and is provided on the main board 11. The set value may be displayed on a 7-segment display or the like. According to such a configuration, the aggregated game information and the set value can be individually and more clearly grasped, so that the work of changing the set value according to the aggregated game information can be easily performed. Therefore, workability can be improved.

  Further, a configuration may be employed in which a clear switch for initializing the gaming machine (RAM clear) is provided, but a switch for changing the set value is not provided. In such a configuration, the game control microcomputer 100 automatically changes the set values to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (the first display unit 21TM029A) in sequence while being controlled to the setting change mode (for example, 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 every 5 seconds) and when the lock switch 21TM051 changes from the ON state to the OFF state, it is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A). The set value (the set value stored in the set information temporary storage area) is stored in the set value storage area (the set value stored in the set value storage area is stored in the set information temporary storage area). The set value may be determined by overwriting the set value. The store clerk at the game hall switches the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state at the timing when the set value to be determined is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (the first display unit 21TM029A), and the value is displayed at that time. The set value can be determined as the set value of the gaming machine.

  In the above embodiment, the example has been described in which the gaming machine is the pachinko gaming machine 1 that pays out a predetermined number of game media to the upper plate or the lower plate based on the occurrence of a prize, but is not limited to such a form. An enclosed gaming machine may be one in which a gaming medium is sealed in a gaming machine and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. In the enclosed gaming machine, information regarding the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode may be included in the information periodically transmitted from the main board 11 to the card unit 21TM050 via the payout control board 21TM037, For example, being controlled by the setting change mode, being controlled by the setting confirmation mode, being within the period controlled by the setting change mode, being within the period being controlled by the setting confirmation mode, Information indicating that an operation for changing the setting has been performed, that the setting change mode has ended, that the setting confirmation mode has ended, and the like may be included. Further, the information may be transmitted from the information output circuit 112 to a management device such as a hall computer or the like, and the hall computer may be able to specify that each gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. .

  In the above embodiment, the image display device 5 or the like connected to the effect control board 12 is within the period controlled in the setting change mode, the period is controlled in the setting confirmation mode, and the like. Is shown, but the game control microcomputer 100 is not limited to such a mode, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4A, The symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display 20, and the like may be used to notify that the setting change mode is being controlled (for example, the 7-segment display may emit light in the first notification mode). Is controlled to the setting confirmation mode by the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the ordinary symbol display device 20, etc. Notification (for example, emit light to a different second notification manner from the first notification manner the 7-segment display) may be. Further, a display (number-of-rounds display) for displaying the number of rounds during the big hit game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 or an instruction for a player to launch a game ball in a specific area of the game area (for example, the right game area). When a display (right-handed display) or the like is provided, the display indicates that the processing of the setting change mode is being executed and that the processing of the setting confirmation mode is being executed. The light may be emitted in the embodiment.

  In the above embodiment, when the security signal is turned on when the mode is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the RAM is cleared after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the security is changed. An example is shown in which the security signal is continuously turned ON for 30 seconds after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode without the signal being turned OFF. Alternatively, when the security signal is turned on when the mode is controlled to the setting check mode, and then the RAM is cleared after the setting change mode or the setting check mode is ended, the security setting signal is turned off. Accordingly, the security signal is temporarily turned off for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds), and then the security signal is turned off. Utility signal specified period (e.g., 30 seconds) may be turned ON. With such a signal output method, it is possible to clearly specify the period in which the external device such as a hall computer is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and to clearly indicate that the RAM clear has been executed. Can be specified.

  Regarding the effect of suggesting the degree of expectation shown in FIG. ) May be changed. For example, even when the jackpot expectation degree is low, if the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is high (for example, 5 or 6), if the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is low (for example, (In the case of 1 or 2), an expectation degree suggestion effect in which the number of black stars is 3 or more may be executed at a higher rate. With such an effect configuration, even if the display result is lost, the expected value indicating that the number of black stars is 3 or more is executed, and the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is high. Can be expected from the player, and the player can pay attention to the effect mode (the number of black stars) when the expectation effect suggestion effect is executed. In addition, even when the reach of the jackpot is low, the expectation effect with a large number of black stars (for example, 3 or more) is executed, so that the player can use the pachinko gaming machine 1 Since it can be expected that the set value is high, the interest can be improved even when the jackpot expectation degree is low.

  In the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted, a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the game is played. If the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination when the symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by the player, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big machine) The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine in which one or more of bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus etc.) are mounted. In such a slot machine, the rate at which the bonus is established differs according to the set value, and the set value can be changed by controlling the slot machine to the setting change mode. It can be confirmed.

[Details and other forms regarding the feature portion 21TM]
Next, details and other aspects of the above-described feature portion 21TM will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a gaming machine frame. The gaming machine frame includes a gaming machine frame 3, a glass door frame 3a, and an outer frame (not shown). Further, the gaming machine frame includes a hinge mechanism (not shown) at one end in the left-right direction (for example, the left side as viewed from the player), and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a each support the hinge mechanism. The other end in the left-right direction (for example, the right side as viewed from the player) is rotatably connected in a direction away from the outer frame. By rotating the glass door frame 3a like a door with the hinge mechanism as a fulcrum, the inner portion of the outer frame including the game area of the game board 2 can be opened. A lock mechanism for fixing the other end of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a to the outer frame is provided on the other end side (for example, on the right side when viewed from a player).

  The outer frame is made of metal and is an outer frame of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is a frame made of a synthetic resin to which the gaming board 2 is attached, and has a substantially rectangular frame shape whose center is penetrated when viewed from the front. The gaming board 2 is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 from the front. The game board 2 attached to the game machine frame 3 is locked by the fixing device so as not to come off the game machine frame 3. The gaming machine frame 3 is a frame in which the speakers 8L and 8R, the gaming effect lamp 9, the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, and the like are provided. The glass door frame 3a is provided with a glass plate (corresponding to a window portion) as a see-through window that protects a game board surface and allows a game area on the front of the game board 2 to be visually recognized.

  When a store clerk at a game arcade performs maintenance on a game board surface (for example, measures to eliminate clogged balls), the glass door frame 3a is hinged from the closed state where the other end is fixed (locked) to the outer frame. It is necessary to open the other end side away from the outer frame by rotating the mechanism part (one end side) to the near side like a door with the fulcrum as a fulcrum. In order for the store clerk at the game hall to operate the power switch 21TM055, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, the display changeover switch 21TM030, and the like, which are arranged on the back side of the game board 2, and to visually recognize the display monitor 21TM029. By rotating the gaming machine frame 3 from the closed state in which the other end side is fixed (locked) to the outer frame, the hinge mechanism portion (one end side) is pivoted toward the front side like a door by using the hinge mechanism (one end side) as a fulcrum. It is necessary to open the other end side away from the outer frame.

  When the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can specify a detection signal capable of specifying that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state. When the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, a detection signal that can specify that the glass door frame 3a is open is output to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. On the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be distinguished and recognized.

(Process at power-on)
FIGS. 23A and 23B are diagrams illustrating an example of processing executed in the game control microcomputer 100 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, and FIGS. 22-11 to 22-13, and FIGS. This is processing corresponding to the processing shown in FIGS. 22-11 and FIGS. 22-43 to 22-44. However, among the processes shown in FIG. 22-11 and the like, some processes (for example, the process shown in FIG. 22-11) are not shown.

  As shown in FIG. 23A, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 checks data in the backup RAM area after the power is turned on (step S21TM3010). This process is similar to the process shown in step S21TM1330 in FIG. 22-13 and step S21TM2130 in FIG. 22-43, and performs a parity check as a data check.

  If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM3010), CPU 103 checks whether or not the setting change flag is set (step S21TM3020). The setting change flag is set when the process proceeds to a setting change / confirmation process described later (step S21TM3510), and is cleared when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off (step S21TM3710).

  If the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM3020), the CPU 103 matches the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 with a regular value, for example, any one of 1 to 6. It is confirmed whether or not this is the case (step S21TM3030). Here, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shipped from the gaming machine maker (before being installed in the game arcade), a value (for example, 0) different from the above-mentioned regular value is stored in the set value storage area. May be. When the data in the setting value storage area is broken, the data may not be a regular value. If the set value is a regular value (YES in step S21TM3030), it is checked whether the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM3040).

  If clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES in step S21TM3040), CPU 103 clears the area excluding the setting value storage area and sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM3050). In the RAM clear processing in step S21TM3050, the data (special symbol process flag, probable change flag, time reduction flag, and the like) indicating the game state before the power supply stop stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared, and the initial value is set. Is set, but the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared, and is not changed before the RAM clear processing. Further, the area in which the total values (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the connection ratio, the role ratio, and the base are stored for each set value is not cleared. The value is not changed before the RAM clear processing. Then, the character "C" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 to notify that the gaming state has been initialized. The notification that the gaming state has been initialized may be performed before being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and as described above, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends. It may be performed.

  Next, CPU 103 transmits an initialization command designating that the initialization processing has been performed (step S21TM3055), and proceeds to step S21TM3060. The effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the initialization process has been performed based on the reception of the initialization command. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, the effect control device 120 may notify that the game state or the like has been initialized in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9. It is possible.

  On the other hand, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3040), the CPU 103 transmits a backup command (command for restoration) as a command for restoring power supply (step S21TM3045). The process moves to step S21TM3060. The effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the power supply has been restored based on the data at the time of stopping the power supply based on the reception of the backup command (command at the time of restoration). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the backup command, in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9, and the like, the power supply is restored from the power cut based on the data at the time of stopping the power supply. It is possible to notify that.

  Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in an open state (step S21TM3060). Here, as described above, the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300. A detection signal indicating that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected and a detection signal indicating that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected are output from the sensor 21TM300 to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 recognizes that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, it notifies the gaming control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, When recognizing that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected, the game control microcomputer 100 notifies the game control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected. The open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

  In addition, a detection signal indicating that the open state of the game machine frame 3 has been detected and the open state of the glass door frame 3a have been detected from the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 to the game control microcomputer 100. If the configuration is such that a detection signal indicating that the game control has been output (that is, the game control microcomputer 100 includes the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300), the game control microcomputer 100 By the input of the detection signal, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

  When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM3060), it checks whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM3070). . Then, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM3070), the flow shifts to the processing after step S21TM3510 related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. When the mode shifts to the setting change mode, setting values can be checked and changed. When the mode shifts to the setting checking mode, setting values can be checked.

  That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM3010), no power interruption has occurred during the setting change (NO in step S21TM3020), and the set value is a regular value (step S21TM3020). The setting value is changed and / or changed on condition that the gaming machine frame 3 is open (YES in step S21TM3060) and the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM3070). Confirmation becomes possible, and the process proceeds to the normal game process on condition that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the closed state (NO in step S21TM3060) or the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3070). .

  In the present embodiment, although the change of the set value is not permitted, in order to set the state in which the set value can be checked (setting check mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is open, 2) Two conditions that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON are required. When the CPU 103 confirms that both of the conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied by the determination processing of step S21TM3060 and step S21TM3070, the CPU 103 can confirm the setting value (setting confirmation). Mode). Further, in addition to the conditions (1) and (2), (3) in step S21TM3040, on condition that it is determined that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES), As described later, it is possible to shift to a state in which the set value can be changed (setting change mode).

  As described above, the lock switch 21TM051, which must be operated to confirm or change the set value, is provided on the back side of the game board 2, and must be operated unless the game machine frame 3 is opened. Can not. If the lock switch 21TM051 is operated even though the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, it means that there is an abnormality in the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, or there is some irregularity. There is a possibility that confirmation or change of the set value is going to be performed by means. In such a state, it is inappropriate to allow the confirmation or change of the set value. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set in the setting confirmation mode. And the setting change mode is not controlled.

  In this embodiment, when one of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a is in the open state as the condition (1), the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode. Although the control is possible, the present invention is not limited to this mode. Even if the glass door frame 3a is open, if the gaming machine frame 3 is not open, the setting confirmation mode and the setting change mode May not be controlled.

  On the other hand, when the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the opened state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM3060 (NO in step S21TM3060), that is, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are not recognized. If it is in the closed state, the process proceeds to the normal game process. If it is confirmed in step S21TM3070 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3070), the flow shifts to a normal game process. With the transition to the normal game processing, processing corresponding to step S21TM1470 to step S21TM1540 shown in FIG. 22-13 or step S21TM2550 to step S21TM2620 shown in FIG. 22-44 can be executed. The indicated game control timer interrupt process can be executed (special symbol process process and the like can be executed).

  In the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM3010), if the check result is abnormal (NO in step S21TM3010), the CPU 103 determines that the set value stored in the set value storage area may be abnormal. The set value abnormality error command shown is transmitted to effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM3110). Here, even if regular values (1 to 6) are stored in the set value storage area, if a part of the backup RAM area is broken, step S21TM3110 is executed, and The CPU 103 and the effect control CPU 120 recognize that the value stored in the setting value storage area may be inappropriate.

  If it is confirmed in step S21TM3020 that the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM3020), CPU 103 transmits a setting value abnormality error command to effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM3110). ).

  Also, in step S21TM3030, if the regular values (1 to 6) are not stored in the set value storage area (NO in step S21TM3030), CPU 103 stores 0 in the set value storage area (step S21TM3100). ), And transmits a set value abnormality error command to effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM3110). In the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM3010), even if the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM3010), if the set value storage area does not store the normal values (1 to 6), , 0 is set as the set value, and the set value error command is transmitted.

  Upon receiving the setting value error command, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the image display device 5 that the setting value may be abnormal (for example, a message “Setting value is abnormal” is displayed. Do). Further, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the image display device 5 that the setting value should be changed (for example, a message “Please change the setting value” is displayed). The speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R may notify that the set value may be abnormal (for example, output a sound “the set value is abnormal.”), And change the set value. It may be informed that the state is to be changed (for example, a sound such as "Please change the set value.") May be output.

  Upon transmitting the set value abnormality error command, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in an open state (step S21TM3120). When the CPU 103 recognizes the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the opened state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM3120), it checks whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM3130). .

  If lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM3130), CPU 103 checks whether clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON or not (step S21TM3140).

  If clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES in step S21TM3140), CPU 103 clears the area including the set value storage area and sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM3150). In the RAM clearing process in step S21TM3150, the data (the special symbol process flag, the probable change flag, the time reduction flag, etc.) indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped, which is stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102, is cleared and initialized. Is set, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is also cleared, and 0 is stored in the set value storage area. On the other hand, for each set value, the area in which each total value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the connection ratio, the role ratio, and the base is stored is not cleared. The tally value is not changed before the RAM clear processing. Then, the character "C" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 to notify that the gaming state has been initialized.

  Then, after executing the RAM clear (step S21TM3150), the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command (step S21TM3160), and processes from step S21TM3510 related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. Move to The backup command (step S21TM3045) at the time of power-off recovery and the initialization command (step S21TM3055 or step S21TM3160) at the time of power-on are commands transmitted only once at the time of power-on. Therefore, when transmitting these power-on commands, the CPU 103 can specify that the power-on command has been transmitted, and set a command transmission flag that does not require backup storage at power-off. Alternatively, the command transmission flag may be cleared when shifting to the normal game process (from step S21TM1470). Then, only when the command transmission flag is not set, a backup command at the time of power-off restoration (step S21TM3045) and an initialization command at the time of power-on (step S21TM3055 or step S21TM3160) may be transmitted.

  On the other hand, when the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the opened state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM3120 (NO in step S21TM3120), that is, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are not recognized. If it is in the closed state, the process is not executed until the power is turned off (step S21TM3200). If it is confirmed in step S21TM3130 that lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3130), the process is not executed until power is turned off (step S21TM3200). If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM3140), the process is not executed until the power is turned off (step S21TM3200).

  That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM3010), the power is cut off during the setting change (that is, the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, If the answer is YES in step S21TM3020) or if the set value is not a regular value (NO in step S21TM3030), the game should not be performed in this state, Before shifting to the normal game process, the set value in the set value storage area needs to be fixed to a regular value. Therefore, the area including the set value storage area is cleared by RAM clear (step S21TM3150), and the mode is shifted to the setting change mode.

  In the present embodiment, in order to change the setting value (setting change mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is open, (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON, (3) The three conditions that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state are required. When the CPU 103 confirms that all of the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied by the determination processing of step S21TM3120, step S21TM3130, and step S21TM3140, the CPU 103 can change the setting value ( (Setting change mode).

  If any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the change of the set value is not permitted, so that the set value of the set value storage area can be fixed to a normal value. Therefore, the game cannot be shifted to the normal game process. For this reason, when it is determined as NO in any of the determination processes of step S21TM3120, step S21TM3130, and step S21TM3140, the power is turned off once and (1) to (3) at the next power-on. Are satisfied, the mode is shifted to the setting change mode, and the set value of the set value storage area is fixed to the normal value.

  When any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the CPU 103 transmits a command for notifying that the power should be turned off to the effect control CPU 120. You may do it. Then, the effect control CPU 120 that has received this command may display a message (for example, the characters “Please turn off the power.”) On the image display device 5 to prompt the user to turn off the power. . If any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the CPU 103 sets the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B in advance. The light may be emitted in the power-off instruction mode to urge the user to turn off the power.

  Next, processing related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode will be described with reference to FIG. In the processing of FIG. 23B, the CPU 103 sets a setting change in-progress flag indicating that the setting value may be changed (step S21TM3510). Since the area storing the value of the setting change flag is included in the backup RAM area, the value of the setting change flag is retained even when the power is turned off.

  Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in an open state (step S21TM3520). When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM3520), it checks whether the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (step S21TM3530). . If lock switch 21TM051 is ON (NO in step S21TM3530), CPU 103 outputs a setting change correspondence signal and a security signal (step S21TM3540), and displays the set value stored in the set value storage area. It is displayed on the monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM3550).

  Further, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM3570). If the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM3570), that is, if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) has not been executed, the CPU 103 sets the setting check mode to specify that the control mode has been changed to the setting check mode. A command is transmitted (step S21TM3580), and the flow shifts to step S21TM3520. The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

  On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM3570), that is, if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) has been executed, the CPU 103 performs the setting for designating the control to the setting change mode. A change mode command is transmitted (step S21TM3585), and it is confirmed whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM3590). The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is being controlled to the setting change mode.

  If setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has not been operated (NO in step S21TM3590), CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM3520. If the setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated (YES in step S21TM3590), CPU 103 updates the set value stored in the set value storage area of RAM 102 (step S21TM3600), and proceeds to step S21TM3520. Transition.

  Here, the output of the security signal (step S21TM3540), the display of the current setting value (step S3550), and the transmission of the setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM3580) can be executed, but the transmission of the setting change mode command (step S21TM3585). ) And a state in which the setting value cannot be updated (step S21TM3600) correspond to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed or the setting value cannot be changed. That is, in the setting confirmation mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (NO in step S21TM3530), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF (NO in step S21TM3040, and the RAM clear flag is determined). Is kept 0).

  In addition, it is possible to output a security signal (step S21TM3540) and display the current setting value (step S3550), and transmit a setting change mode command (step S21TM3585) and update the setting value (step S21TM3600). This state corresponds to a setting change mode in which setting values can be checked and changed. That is, in the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (NO in step S21TM3530), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES in step S21TM3040 or step S21TM3140). (The RAM clear flag is set to 1).

  The setting confirmation mode command is a command transmitted only once during the setting confirmation mode control. Therefore, when transmitting the setting confirmation mode command, the CPU 103 can specify that the setting confirmation mode command has been transmitted, and sets the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag that does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. When the setting change flag is cleared (step S21TM3710), the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag may be cleared. The setting confirmation mode command may be transmitted only when the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag is not set. Similarly, the setting change mode command is a command transmitted only once during the setting change mode control. For this reason, when transmitting the setting change mode command, the CPU 103 can specify that the setting change mode command has been transmitted, and sets the setting change mode command transmission flag that does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. Alternatively, the setting change mode command transmission flag may be cleared when the setting change flag is cleared (step S21TM3710). The setting change mode command may be transmitted only when the setting change mode command transmission flag is not set.

  In step S21TM3530, if lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (YES in step S21TM3530), CPU 103 clears the setting change flag (step S21TM3710). Here, when the setting change in progress flag is cleared, it is determined that the setting change in progress flag is not set (NO) in the processing of step S21TM3020 executed thereafter, so that it is possible to shift to the normal game processing. Become.

  Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting command for designating the set value stored in the set value storage area to the effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM3720). As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode has ended by receiving the setting command. Further, by executing an effect corresponding to the setting value specified by the setting command, the setting value can be suggested. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the big hit gaming state ends according to the specified set value.

  Next, the CPU 103 deletes the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM3730), and checks whether or not the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM3740).

  Here, the fact that the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM3740) indicates that the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM3010), and that power is cut off during the setting change. Is not present (NO in step S21TM3020), and the set value is determined to be a regular value (YES in step S21TM3030), and furthermore, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (step S21TM3040). NO), that means that the RAM clear (step S21TM3050) has not been executed, so that it is sufficient to execute the normal processing at the time of power restoration, and both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state. (Step S21TM3060 When the NO) has been confirmed, it may be shifted to the normal game processing.

  On the other hand, the fact that the value of the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM3740) means that the RAM has been cleared in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150, and the lock switch 21TM051 is temporarily turned off. Before (before YES is determined in step S21TM3530), if the regular set values (1 to 6) are not stored in the set value storage area (for example, in the setting change mode, the set value remains 0). When the operation of changing the set value is not performed (for example, when the operation of changing the set value is not performed), it is necessary to shift to the setting change mode and store the regular set values (1 to 6) in the set value storage area. Therefore, the CPU 103 shifts to the power-on processing again and executes the processing after step S21TM3010.

  As described above, the clerk at the game hall or the like sets the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the setting change mode by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning on the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on. In addition to being able to control, it is possible to initialize the game state and the like (to execute the RAM clear in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150). Further, by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning off the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and the gaming state and the like can be controlled. Can be initialized (that is, the determination in step S21TM3040 or step S21TM3140 is NO and the RAM clear in step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 is not executed). In this way, the clerk at the game hall can select whether to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and can also select whether to initialize the gaming state or the like. I have.

  In the control shown in FIG. 23-2, the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off (NO in step S21TM3530) in the state where the lock switch 21TM051 is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the gaming machine frame 3 and When all of the glass door frames 3a are closed, NO is determined in step S21TM3520, and the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in a state of waiting for being opened. At this time, the gaming control microcomputer 100 issues a command to notify that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a should be opened, and operates the lock switch 21TM051 to change the setting mode or confirm the setting. A command instructing to notify that the mode should be ended may be transmitted to effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 that receives these commands notifies the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R that the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a should be opened, and sets the lock switch 21TM051. The user is notified to end the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. For example, a message such as "Please open the gaming machine frame 3 and turn off the lock switch 21TM051 to end the setting change mode" may be displayed on the image display device 5.

  After the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and the process proceeds to the normal game process, when both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 Is operated (changed from the OFF state to the ON state), a lock switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120, and (2) the setting changeover switch ( When the (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated (changed from the OFF state to the ON state), a setting changeover switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120. Become.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 22-38 (2), the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120) performs the setting based on the reception of the lock switch operation command and / or the setting changeover switch operation command. Even though neither the change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, it is possible to specify that an operation for changing the set value has been performed, and to notify that fact. For example, based on the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes an abnormal operation warning notification that displays the character “operation of the lock switch has been detected.” In addition, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, an abnormal operation warning notification that displays the text “Operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected” is executed. As a result, the store clerk at the amusement arcade clearly understands that an operation for changing the set value has been performed even though the control is not performed in any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, and It can be checked whether or not the operation has been performed.

  The game control microcomputer 100 is not limited to such a mode, and after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and shifts to the normal game process, whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is operated, The lock switch operation command and the setting switch operation command may not be transmitted without confirming whether the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. As described above, during the period in which the normal game process (game control timer interrupt process) is being executed, the execution status of the operation for changing the set value and the operation for confirming the set value is not checked. This makes it possible to reduce the control load on the game control microcomputer 100.

  FIG. 23C is an explanatory diagram of changes in set values displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. When the mode is controlled to the setting change mode, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is displayed in step S21TM3550. At this time, if a value (0 in this example) different from the normal value is stored in the set value storage area, the 7-segment display of the display monitor 21TM029 is displayed as shown in FIG. Indicates the letter "E". Therefore, the clerk of the game hall operates at least the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 (performs the setting change operation), knowing that at least the regular value is not stored in the set value storage area.

  Each time a store clerk at the game hall operates the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM3590), the set value stored in the set value storage area is updated (step S21TM3600). In this example, for the sake of explanation, an example is shown in which the normal set value is in the range of 1 to 3, and in this case, the set value stored in the set value storage area is 0 for each setting change operation. The information is updated in the order of → 1 → 2 → 3 → 1, and accordingly, the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is updated in the order of E → 1 → 2 → 3 → 1.

  As described above, when the value stored in the setting value storage area is not a regular value, information (a letter E in this example) different from a number is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 as information corresponding to the value. Is displayed. This makes it possible to clearly grasp that a value different from the regular value is stored in the setting value storage area, and to prompt a setting change operation. If a value (0 in this example) different from the regular value is stored in the set value storage area, if the value (0 in this example) is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, the administrator of the game arcade May misunderstand that the value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 corresponds to one of the regular values, and may turn off the lock switch 21TM051 without performing the setting change operation. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a value different from the regular value is stored in the set value storage area, information (a letter E in this example) different from a number is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. In order to prevent such misunderstanding, the setting change operation is surely performed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 23C, if a value different from a normal value (0 in this example) is initially stored in the set value storage area when the setting change mode is controlled, The character "E" is displayed on the 7-segment display of the display monitor 21TM029. After that, if a setting change operation is performed even once and a normal value is stored in the setting value storage area, Regardless of how many times the setting change operation is performed, during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled (until the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off), the setting value is updated within the range of the regular setting value. This is performed, and a value (0 in this example) different from the normal value is not stored in the set value storage area, and information (a character E in this example) different from the normal value is also displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. ) Is not displayed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 23-3 (2), when the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is a regular value when the mode is changed to the setting change mode, the process proceeds to step S21TM3550. Thus, the regular set value (2 in this example) stored in the set value storage area is displayed. In this example, for the purpose of explanation, an example is shown in which the normal set value is in the range of 1 to 3, and in this case, the set value stored in the set value storage area is 2 for each setting change operation. The information is updated in the order of → 3 → 1 → 2 → 3, and accordingly, the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is updated in the order of 2 → 3 → 1 → 2 → 3.

  That is, if the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is initially a normal value when the setting change mode is controlled, no matter how many times the setting change operation is performed thereafter, During the period in which the setting change mode is controlled (until the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off), the setting value is updated within the range of the regular setting value, and the regular value is stored in the setting value storage area. A different value (0 in this example) is not stored, and information (a character of E in this example) different from the normal value is not displayed on the display monitor 21TM029.

  For example, when the gaming machine maker ships the pachinko gaming machine 1 (before installing the gaming machine), a value (0 in this example) different from a regular value is set in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102. Then, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on thereafter, if the set value is not changed to a regular value via the setting change mode when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the game with the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be performed. become unable. Thereby, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game arcade, the setting change operation can be reliably performed, and the set value can be fixed to a regular value.

  Also, when the gaming machine maker ships the pachinko gaming machine 1 (before installing the gaming machine), the setting changing flag is set in advance, and thereafter, the gaming machine side goes through the setting changing mode. Unless the setting value is changed to a regular value and the setting change mode is not ended, it becomes impossible to allow the pachinko gaming machine 1 to play a game. Thereby, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game arcade, the setting change operation can be reliably performed, and the set value can be fixed to a regular value.

(Restriction of ball lending based on detection of open state of gaming machine frame or glass door frame)
Next, the ball lending restriction method when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened and the glass door frame 3a is opened will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23D shows the main board 11 when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. It is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) and card unit 21TM050.

  In the example of FIG. 23-4, based on the fact that the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, The PRDY signal is not turned on. When the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (ie, the state in which the VL signal is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (ie, the game control microcomputer). Even when the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the CPU 103 does not turn the PRDY signal on, but turns it off.

  As a result, while the card is received in the card unit 21TM050, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and a ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains OFF. Even if a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains OFF.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 keeps the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state without setting the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. That is, when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, And the EXS signal are both OFF, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. Therefore, even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated, ball lending (payout of game media) is not executed.

  As described above, while the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the PRDY signal is set to the ON state. Not to be. In this manner, it is possible to prevent the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 from executing the payout of the game medium.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a in a closed state so that a clerk or the like at the game arcade can put the pachinko gaming machine 1 into a playable state. The provided game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 does not detect the open state of the game machine frame 3 and does not detect the open state of the glass door frame 3a. When both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

  When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated to input the ball lending switch signal, the card unit 21TM050 sends the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the ON state. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 to the ON state based on the fact that the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the ON state, and executes the subsequent ball lending payout control.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and can be opened by a predetermined key operation. Since the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot be operated unless it is in the open state, the gaming machine frame 3 must be opened in order to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. That is, it is normal that the gaming machine frame 3 is open during the period in which the control is performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Accordingly, the period in which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected includes a period in which the setting control mode is controlled and a period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

  Here, the transition to the setting change mode and the transition to the setting confirmation mode involve power-off (including turning off the power switch 21TM055) and subsequent power-on. If the payout control corresponding to the ball lending process or the prize ball process is executed in such an unstable state, an appropriate amount of game media corresponding to the payout request can be paid out. May not be. In order to prevent the disadvantage of the player in such a situation, it is appropriate to limit the payout control in the gaming machine controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. However, in order for the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 to grasp the control status to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode on the game control microcomputer 100 side, commands and determination processing for the control state are required, and the control is complicated. There is a problem that it becomes.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected during the period in which the open state of the game machine frame 3 is detected by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. During this period, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not execute the ball lending process and the prize ball process. As a result, the payout control is not executed regardless of whether or not the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled in the setting change mode and whether or not the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled in the setting confirmation mode. As a result, without complicating the control on the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side, the ball lending process and the prize ball process during the period of being controlled in the setting change mode and the period of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode are restricted. You. With such a configuration, appropriate payout control for the ball lending process and the prize ball process is realized.

  In this manner, the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 while the open state of the game machine frame 3 is detected. By restricting the payout control during the period, it is possible to avoid occurrence of troubles associated with the payout control, such as not being able to pay out an appropriate amount of game media corresponding to the payout request, and to provide the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Maintenance work and the like when the game machine is in the open state can smoothly proceed.

(Restart of ball lending after detection of open state)
Next, the payout is interrupted because the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened while the ball rental is being performed, and thereafter the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is closed. Is specifically described with reference to FIG. 23-5. In the example shown in FIG. 23-5, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state during the payout of the game medium. Then, the payout of the game medium is interrupted, and the interrupted payout is resumed based on the fact that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is no longer in the open state (in the closed state).

  FIG. 23-5 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control) when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) executes the payout of the game medium. FIG. 10 is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. While the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. Is in the ON state.

  When the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened while the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Switches the PRDY signal from the ON state to the OFF state based on detecting that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is open. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the output of the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned off. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, and the payout of the game medium is interrupted. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  The unpaid number is updated based on a detection signal from the number-of-payouts count switch 21TM301 input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. Specifically, the number of unpaid items is calculated from the predetermined number of game media to be paid out by the payout motor 21TM289 (that is, the number of payouts specified by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), from the number-of-payouts count switch. It is calculated by subtracting the number counted by the 21TM301 (that is, the number of game media actually paid out by the payout motor 21TM289).

  While the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs the PRDY signal. Is not turned on. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state but changes the PRDY signal to the OFF state even when the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even in the state of being electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, during the period in which the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the card unit 21TM050 operates based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. Thus, even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated, the BRDY signal is not output to the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains OFF. Even if a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains OFF.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 keeps the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state without setting the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the state in which the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is detecting the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, any of the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal Is also in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, so that the payout of the game medium is not executed.

  When the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state (the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door). When detecting that the open state of the frame 3a has been completed), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 changes the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 based on the fact that both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed (PRDY signal is turned on). The payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the above, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the unpaid number data becomes zero. This completes the payout of the game medium that has been interrupted by the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a.

  Therefore, of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the ball lending process executed before the power failure occurred (that is, the payout number designated by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), The payout is executed for the number of unpaid items that have not been paid, so that the disadvantage of the player can be avoided.

(Ball lending processing at power failure occurrence (do not shift to setting change mode))
Next, with reference to FIG. 23-6, regarding the processing in the case where the payout is interrupted due to the power cutoff during the ball lending being executed and the control is not controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored, the specific example is described with reference to FIG. Will be explained. In the example shown in FIG. 23-6, the payout of the game medium is interrupted based on the occurrence of the power supply interruption while the payout of the game medium is being performed, and the control is switched to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is turned on. After the connection confirmation signal is turned ON, the suspended payout is resumed.

  FIG. 23-6 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control) when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) executes the payout of the game medium. Is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. While the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. Is in the ON state.

  When the power is cut off during the period in which the payout control board 21TM037 is performing the payout of the game medium, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. You. That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the output of the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned off. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, and the payout of the game medium is interrupted. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Here, the clerk of the game arcade turns on the power switch 21TM055 after opening the gaming machine frame 3 to turn on the power. At this time, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is initialized, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is further operated. After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a power-on process. In this example, based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 was in the OFF state when the power was turned on, the processing after step S21TM1470 shown in FIG. Shall be. Here, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG.

  In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is started, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3, When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state because the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state but changes the PRDY signal to the OFF state even when the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even in the state of being electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated. That is, the BRDY signal remains OFF. Even if a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains OFF.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 keeps the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state without setting the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the state in which the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. During the period when the PRDY signal is in the OFF state), the payout of the game medium is not executed.

  When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 23-1, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes When possible, the PRDY signal is turned on. Here, when the connection confirmation signal is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a. The PRDY signal is turned on on the condition that it is not performed.

  As described above, after the power is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 becomes capable of detecting the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300. During the period in which the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected, whether the game machine is controlled to the setting change mode or not is controlled by the setting confirmation mode. No payout of game media is executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, By keeping the PRDY signal in the OFF state instead of the ON state, the ball lending process is prevented from being executed. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the PRDY signal is in the OFF state while the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

  When the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the clerk of the game hall usually confirms that the RAM clear has been executed, and then removes the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. In order to set the closed state, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a may be in the open state even during the period when the connection confirmation signal is ON (step S21TM1480 and thereafter). In such a case, even if the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the PRDY signal is turned OFF based on the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. .

  When the store clerk of the game arcade closes both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the connection confirmation signal and opens the game machine frame and door frame. The PRDY signal is turned ON based on the fact that neither the gaming machine frame 3 nor the glass door frame 3a has been opened by the sensor 21TM300. Then, based on the PRDY signal being turned on, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the unpaid number is calculated. The payout operation is performed one by one until the data becomes zero. Thereby, the supply of the game medium interrupted by the occurrence of the power interruption and the subsequent opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is completed. As described above, when the power supply is interrupted during the ball lending and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed when the power is restored thereafter. As a condition, it is possible to resume the suspended payout of the game media and complete the ball lending.

(Ball lending processing at power failure occurrence (transition to setting change mode))
FIG. 23-7 (1) is a block diagram showing a connection example of a RAM clear signal line in the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, the main board 11, and the payout control board 21TM037. In the example shown in FIG. 23-7 (1), when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is changed to the game control microcontroller. It is input to the I / O 105 of the computer 100 and the I / O 21TM372f of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. That is, the store clerk of the game arcade operates the one clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, thereby clearing the RAM 102 for initializing the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 and initializing the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. And clearing the RAM are executed.

  Next, with respect to the processing in the case where the payout is interrupted due to the power failure occurring during the ball lending and the control is switched to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored, FIG. 23-7 (2) This will be specifically described with reference to FIG. In this example, as shown in FIG. 23-7 (1), when the clear switch 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal is sent to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. It shall be transmitted. In the example shown in FIG. 23-7 (2), when the power supply is interrupted while the payout of the game medium is being executed, the payout being executed is stopped, and after the power is restored, the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Sometimes, the payout is not resumed, and even after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the payout is resumed based on the fact that the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has been executed. do not do.

  FIG. 23-7 (2) shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) is executing the payout of the game medium. It is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between (dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370) and card unit 21TM050. While the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. Is in the ON state.

  When the power is cut off during the period in which the payout control board 21TM037 is performing the payout of the game medium, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. You. That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the output of the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, both the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are in the OFF state. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops driving the payout motor 21TM289 based on the EXS signal being turned off, and interrupts the payout of the game medium. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Here, the clerk of the game arcade turns on the power switch 21TM055 after opening the gaming machine frame 3 to turn on the power. At this time, as described above, in order to shift to the setting change mode (and further to initialize the pachinko gaming machine 1), when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on, and The clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is also set to the ON state. To shift to the setting confirmation mode, when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off.

  After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a power-on process. In this example, the control is switched to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state when the power is turned on.

  In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is started, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3, When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

  Thereafter, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state but changes the PRDY signal to the OFF state even when the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even in the state of being electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, during the period when the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 performs the payout control based on the PRDY signal being OFF even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated. The BRDY signal is not output to the substrate 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains OFF. Even if a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains OFF.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 keeps the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state without setting the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the state in which the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the process is being executed, the payout of the game medium is not executed even if the data of the unpaid number is not cleared.

  After that, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, and the processes after step S21TM3710 shown in FIG. 23-2 are executed. When the RAM clear processing is executed, it is notified that the RAM clear has been executed. In this example, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at the time of turning on the power, a RAM clear signal is transmitted to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is erased (cleared).

  Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 23A, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 23-1, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes When possible, the PRDY signal is turned on. Here, when the connection confirmation signal is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a. The PRDY signal is turned on on the condition that it is not performed.

  As described above, after the power is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 becomes capable of detecting the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300. During the period in which the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected, whether the game machine is controlled to the setting change mode or not is controlled by the setting confirmation mode. No payout of game media is executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, By keeping the PRDY signal in the OFF state instead of the ON state, the ball lending process is prevented from being executed. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the PRDY signal is in the OFF state while the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

  Here, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the store clerk of the game hall usually confirms that the RAM clear has been executed, and then sets the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. Is closed, even if the connection confirmation signal after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed is in the ON state (step S21TM1480 and thereafter), the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is not closed. It may be open. In such a case, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected even when the connection confirmation signal after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed is in the ON state. , The PRDY signal is turned off.

  When the store clerk of the game arcade closes both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the connection confirmation signal (processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode). Has been completed), and based on the fact that neither the gaming machine frame 3 nor the glass door frame 3a has been opened by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, the PRDY signal is turned on. And

  In this example, when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not operated when the power is turned on), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is used. The microcomputer 21TM370 does not clear the unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 (because there are remaining game media to be paid out). Based on the PRDY signal being turned on, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. One by one until the data of the unpaid coin number becomes 0 performs a payout operation. As a result, the game medium that has been interrupted due to the occurrence of the power interruption, the subsequent control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Is completed. As described above, when the supply of the game medium is interrupted due to the power cutoff during the execution of the ball lending, the data of the unpaid number is not cleared when the power is restored thereafter, and the setting is performed based on the setting. Resuming the suspended payout of the game media and completing the ball lending, provided that the change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed. Is possible.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 23-7 (2), when RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executed (when the power is turned on, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated). In this case, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 clears the data of the number of unpaid items stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 (the remaining number to be paid out). Even when the PRDY signal is turned ON, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven and the payout operation is not performed even when the PRDY signal is turned ON.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 23-7 (1), the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052 is input to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Therefore, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has not yet been formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. The data of the unpaid number stored in the paid-out number storage buffer is initialized. As described above, when the clear switch 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the data of the number of unpaid items is initialized. Of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the ball lending process executed in the previous) (that is, the number of payouts designated by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), No payout is made for the number of payouts.

  Accordingly, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 causes the unpaid number data stored in the RAM 21TM302 to be executed. Is initialized, it is possible to simplify management of data of a predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the ball lending process or the prize ball process.

  As described above, when the payout is interrupted due to the power interruption during the execution of the ball lending process, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stores the unpaid number stored in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. The data of the unpaid number is stored in the buffer. Here, by operating the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the data of the unpaid number is cleared, so that the suspended payout is forcibly terminated (stopped) without being restarted. That is, when the power is restored, the payout for the number of unpaid items is not executed during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled and after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

(Modified example regarding ball lending processing (transition to setting change mode) when power failure occurs)
FIG. 23-8 (1) is a block diagram illustrating a connection example of the RAM clear signal line in the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 and the main board 11, and the clear switch 21TM052a and the payout control board 21TM037. In the example shown in FIG. 23-8 (1), the above-described clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is provided corresponding to the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), and corresponds to the payout control board 21TM037. Further, another clear switch 21TM052a different from the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is provided. That is, the main board 11 (the game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 are provided with separate and independent clear switches.

  When the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is input to the I / O 105 of the game control microcomputer 100. When the clear switch 21TM052a is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052a is input to the I / O21TM372f of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  If the game clerk initializes the game control microcomputer 100 and does not initialize the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the power supply is turned on, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned on, and the clear switch is turned on. 21TM052a is turned off. Conversely, when the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is initialized without initializing the game control microcomputer 100, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off when the power is turned on to clear the game. The switch 21TM052a is turned on. When the game control microcomputer 100 is initialized and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is initialized, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned on when the power is turned on, and the clear switch 21TM052a is also turned on. And

  Next, with respect to the processing in the case where the payout is interrupted due to the power cutoff during the ball lending being executed and the setting is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored, FIG. This will be specifically described with reference to FIG. In this example, as shown in FIG. 23-8 (1), the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 is initialized by operating the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on, and the clear switch 21TM052a is turned on when the power is turned on. By operation, the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is initialized. In the example shown in FIG. 23-8 (2), when the power supply is interrupted during the execution of the payout of the game medium, the payout during the execution is stopped, and after the power is restored, the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Sometimes, the payout is not resumed, and the payout is resumed based on the fact that the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends. .

  FIG. 23-8 (2) shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) is executing the payout of the game medium. It is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between (dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370) and card unit 21TM050. While the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. Is in the ON state.

  When the power is cut off during the period in which the payout control board 21TM037 is performing the payout of the game medium, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. You. That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the output of the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, both the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are in the OFF state. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops driving the payout motor 21TM289 based on the EXS signal being turned off, and interrupts the payout of the game medium. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Here, the clerk of the game arcade turns on the power switch 21TM055 after opening the gaming machine frame 3 to turn on the power. At this time, as described above, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on to shift to the setting change mode (and to initialize the game control microcomputer 100). The clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is also set to the ON state. To shift to the setting confirmation mode, when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off.

  After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a power-on process. In this example, the control is switched to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state when the power is turned on.

  In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is started, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3, When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

  Thereafter, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state but changes the PRDY signal to the OFF state even when the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even in the state of being electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, during the period when the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 performs the payout control based on the PRDY signal being OFF even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated. The BRDY signal is not output to the substrate 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains OFF. Even if a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains OFF.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 keeps the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state without setting the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the state in which the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the process is being executed, the payout of the game medium is not executed even if the data of the unpaid number is not cleared.

  After that, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, and the processes after step S21TM3710 shown in FIG. 23-2 are executed. When the RAM clear processing is executed in the game control microcomputer 100, it is notified that the RAM clear has been executed. Further, in this example, when the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the payout control board 21TM037 is operated at the time of turning on the power, a RAM clear signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 is erased (cleared).

  Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 23A, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 23-1, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes When possible, the PRDY signal is turned on. Here, when the connection confirmation signal is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a. The PRDY signal is turned on on the condition that it is not performed.

  As described above, after the power is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 becomes capable of detecting the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300. During the period in which the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected, whether the game machine is controlled to the setting change mode or not is controlled by the setting confirmation mode. No payout of game media is executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, By keeping the PRDY signal in the OFF state instead of the ON state, the ball lending process is prevented from being executed. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the PRDY signal is in the OFF state while the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

  Here, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the store clerk of the game hall usually confirms that the RAM clear has been executed, and then sets the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. Is closed, even if the connection confirmation signal after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed is in the ON state (step S21TM1480 and thereafter), the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is not closed. It may be open. In such a case, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected even when the connection confirmation signal after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed is in the ON state. , The PRDY signal is turned off.

  When the store clerk of the game arcade closes both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the connection confirmation signal and opens the game machine frame and door frame. The PRDY signal is turned ON based on the fact that neither the gaming machine frame 3 nor the glass door frame 3a has been opened by the sensor 21TM300.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 23-8 (2), when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed (when the clear switch 21TM052a is not operated when the power is turned on) ) Indicates that the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at power-on). However, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 clears the unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. (There are remaining game media to be paid out), and based on the fact that the PRDY signal has been turned on, based on the contents of the unpaid-out number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Then, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes zero. As a result, the game medium that has been interrupted due to the occurrence of the power interruption, the subsequent control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Is completed. As described above, when the supply of the game medium is interrupted due to the power cutoff during the execution of the ball lending, the data of the unpaid number is not cleared when the power is restored thereafter, and the setting is performed based on the setting. Resuming the suspended payout of the game media and completing the ball lending, provided that the change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed. Is possible.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executed (when the clear switch 21TM052a is operated at the time of turning on the power), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stores the backup data in the RAM 21TM302. When the data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the area has been cleared (because there is no remaining game medium to be paid out), and the PRDY signal is turned on. Also, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven and the payout operation is not performed.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 23-8 (1), the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052 is input to the game control microcomputer 100, but is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Not done. Therefore, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 corresponding to the main board 11 is operated, even if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the payout is performed. If the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the control board 21TM037 is not operated, the unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Not initialized. Thus, regardless of whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on (whether or not the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed) Regardless of this, if the clear switch 21TM052a is not operated, the data of the number of unpaid items is not initialized, and is executed before the power is cut off (before being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode upon power restoration). Of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the ball lending process (i.e., the number of payouts specified by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), the number of unpaid out payouts that have not been paid out , Payout will be executed.

  Therefore, regardless of whether the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the data of the unpaid number stored in the RAM21TM302 is not initialized. Data of a predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the processing or the prize ball processing can be appropriately protected.

  As described above, when the payout is interrupted due to the power interruption during the execution of the ball lending process, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stores the unpaid number stored in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. The data of the unpaid number is stored in the buffer. Here, even if the clear switch 21TM052 corresponding to the main board 11 is operated when the power is turned on, if the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the payout control board 21TM037 is not operated, the unpaid number data is maintained without being cleared. Therefore, the interrupted payout is resumed, and the payout of the unpaid number of game media is completed. In other words, after the power is restored, after a period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the payout of the unpaid number is executed.

  In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is provided on the payout control board 21TM037 (the open state detection signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370). The game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 is not limited to such an embodiment, and may be provided on the main board 11 (an open state detection signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100). In the case of such a configuration, the game control microcomputer 100 determines that the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). Then, the output of the connection confirmation signal is stopped (switching from the ON state to the OFF state). As a result, based on the fact that the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the PRDY signal to the OFF state or does not set the EXS signal to the ON state, thereby executing the ball lending. Not to be.

(Restriction on prize ball payout based on detection of open state of gaming machine frame or glass door frame)
Next, a method of restricting award ball payout when the game machine frame 3 is opened and the glass door frame 3a is opened will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 23-9. FIG. 23-9 illustrates a game control microcomputer 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 when the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. It is a timing chart which shows transmission and reception of the signal between computer 100 and microcomputer 21TM370 for payout control. As shown in FIG. 23-9, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Is received as the connection OK command. Upon receiving the connection OK command as the received ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 again transmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal after a lapse of 1 s (1 second) from the reception. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-described connection confirmation communication processing as long as the connection state is normal.

  At this time, when a clerk of the game hall opens the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 causes the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door. An open state of the frame 3a is detected. In the state in which the gaming machine frame 3 is open (and in the case where the glass door frame 3a and the upper plate are integrated, the state in which the glass door frame 3a is open), award balls to be paid out Is not physically connected to the path on which the flowing prize balls are stored, so if the prize balls are paid out in this state, the game media reaches the upper plate. Without falling.

  In the example of FIG. 23-9, when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the game control is performed. Microcomputer 100 has detected the passage of game media related to any of the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening, and the large winning opening. Is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 as a prize ball request signal based on the payout ball request signal, but the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 which detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Does not execute the payout control of the game medium, and sends the prize ball preparation command as the received ACK signal to the game control microcomputer 100. To send. This prize ball preparation command is issued until the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 no longer detects the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, that is, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Transmission to the game control microcomputer 100 is continued until the state is closed.

  As described above, during the period in which the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the gaming medium is provided with each winning port. , The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289 and does not execute the prize ball payout control. In this manner, it is possible to prevent the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 from executing the payout of the game medium. Then, a prize ball preparation command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a in a closed state so that a clerk or the like at the game arcade can put the pachinko gaming machine 1 into a playable state. The provided game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 does not detect the open state of the game machine frame 3 and does not detect the open state of the glass door frame 3a. With both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a being in the closed state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 drives the payout motor 21TM289 when the payout operation is possible, and the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass. The payout control of a predetermined number of prize balls (the number specified by the prize ball number command) according to the winning during the period in which the open state of the door frame 3a is detected is executed. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has paid out a predetermined number of game media transmits a winning ball end command as a received ACK signal.

(Restart of payout of prize balls after detection of open state)
Next, the payout is interrupted because the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened while the payout of the prize balls is being performed, and thereafter the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is closed. The processing in the case of the closed state will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. In the example shown in FIG. 23-10, based on the fact that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state during the payout of the game medium. Then, the payout of the game medium is interrupted, and the interrupted payout is resumed based on the fact that the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is no longer in the open state (in the closed state).

  As shown in FIG. 23-10, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Is received as the connection OK command. When receiving the connection OK command as the received ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 again transmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal after a lapse of 1 s (1 second) from the reception. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-described connection confirmation communication processing as long as the connection state is normal.

  If there is a winning when the connection confirmation communication process is not being executed (between the reception of the connection OK command as the received ACK signal and the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal), The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of winning balls in the winning ball request signal, and transmits the winning ball number command as the set winning ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Upon receiving the winning ball number command as the winning ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 pays out the number of winning balls specified by the winning ball number command. The gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is opened during the payout of the number of prize balls specified by the award ball number command, and the gaming machine frame / door frame provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Based on the opening sensor 21TM300 detecting the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops driving the payout motor 21TM289 and interrupts the payout of the game medium. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  The unpaid number is updated based on a detection signal from the number-of-payouts count switch 21TM301 input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. Specifically, the number of unpaid items is calculated from a predetermined number of game media to be paid out by the payout motor 21TM289 (that is, the number of payouts specified by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 14), and It is calculated by subtracting the number counted by the 21TM301 (that is, the number of game media actually paid out by the payout motor 21TM289).

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, which detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, does not execute the payout control of the game medium, and outputs the prize ball preparation command as a received ACK signal for the game control. It is transmitted to the microcomputer 100. This prize ball preparation command is issued until the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 no longer detects the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, that is, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Transmission to the game control microcomputer 100 is continued until the state is closed.

  As described above, during the period in which the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289 even during the execution of the payout of the game medium. Do not pay out game media. Then, a prize ball preparation command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

  When the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state (the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door). Upon detecting that the open state of the frame 3a has ended), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stores the information in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 based on the closing of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. The payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the stored contents of the unpaid number storage buffer, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes zero. This completes the payout of the game medium that has been interrupted by the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a.

(Prizeball processing when power failure occurs (without shifting to the setting change mode))
Next, with reference to FIG. 23-11, a process in a case where the payout is interrupted due to the occurrence of the power supply interruption during the execution of the prize ball payout and the control is not controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored. This will be specifically described. In the example shown in FIG. 23-11, the payout of the game medium is interrupted based on the occurrence of the power supply interruption while the payout of the game medium is executed, and the control is switched to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is turned on. After the connection confirmation signal is turned ON and the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the interrupted payout is resumed.

  As shown in FIG. 23-11, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Is received as the connection OK command. When receiving the connection OK command as the received ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 again transmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal after a lapse of 1 s (1 second) from the reception. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-described connection confirmation communication processing as long as the connection state is normal.

  If there is a winning when the connection confirmation communication process is not being executed (between the reception of the connection OK command as the received ACK signal and the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal), The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of winning balls in the winning ball request signal, and transmits the winning ball number command as the set winning ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Upon receiving the winning ball number command as the winning ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 pays out the number of winning balls specified by the winning ball number command. When the power is cut off during the payout of the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command, the power supply to the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, so that the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped and the game is stopped. Suspend media removal. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Here, the clerk of the game arcade turns on the power switch 21TM055 after opening the gaming machine frame 3 to turn on the power. At this time, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is initialized, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is further operated. After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a power-on process. In this example, based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 was in the OFF state when the power was turned on, the processing after step S21TM1470 shown in FIG. Shall be. Here, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG.

  In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is started, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3, When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

  Since the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the payout motor 21TM289 in the stopped state. As a result, after the power is turned on, a period during which the CPU 103 is performing the predetermined process as the power-on process (after the power is turned on, without being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the serial connection shown in FIG. In the communication circuit setting process (the period until the execution of the step S21TM1480), the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is in a stopped state, so that the state in which the payout of the game medium is interrupted is maintained.

  As a result, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. Therefore, during the period in which the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state (after the power is turned on, the serial communication circuit setting process shown in FIG. Until the execution of S21TM1480), the payout of the game medium is not executed.

  When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 23A, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes the payout operation based on the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 being turned on. When possible, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes zero. Do. Here, when the connection confirmation signal is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a. It is assumed that the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to perform a payout operation on condition that the payout operation is not performed.

  As described above, after the power is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 becomes capable of detecting the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300. During the period in which the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected, whether the game machine is controlled to the setting change mode or not is controlled by the setting confirmation mode. No payout of game media is executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, By not driving the payout motor 21TM289, the award ball processing is not executed. Thus, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven during the period in which the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

  When the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the clerk of the game hall usually confirms that the RAM clear has been executed, and then removes the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. In order to set the closed state, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a may be in the open state even during the period when the connection confirmation signal is ON (step S21TM1480 and thereafter). In such a case, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped based on the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. State, and the payout of the game medium is not executed.

  When the store clerk of the game arcade closes both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the connection confirmation signal and opens the game machine frame and door frame. Based on the fact that neither the gaming machine frame 3 nor the glass door frame 3a has been opened by the sensor 21TM300, the contents of the unpaid-number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are determined. Based on this, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes zero. Thereby, the supply of the game medium interrupted by the occurrence of the power interruption and the subsequent opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is completed. As described above, when the power supply is interrupted during the execution of the prize ball payout and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed when the power is restored thereafter. On condition that the payout of the interrupted game media can be resumed, the payout of the prize ball can be completed.

(Prizeball processing when power failure occurs (transition to setting change mode))
Next, with reference to FIGS. 23-12, regarding the processing in the case where the payout is interrupted due to the occurrence of the power supply interruption during the execution of the prize ball payout and the control is switched to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored. This will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. In this example, as shown in FIG. 23-7 (1), when the clear switch 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the RAM clear signal is sent to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. It shall be transmitted. In the example shown in FIG. 23-12, when the power supply is interrupted during the payout of the game medium, the payout being executed is stopped, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the power is restored, The payout is not restarted and the payout is not restarted even after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, based on the fact that the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has been subjected to the RAM clear.

  As shown in FIG. 23-12, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Is received as the connection OK command. When receiving the connection OK command as the received ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 again transmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal after a lapse of 1 s (1 second) from the reception. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-described connection confirmation communication processing as long as the connection state is normal.

  If there is a winning when the connection confirmation communication process is not being executed (between the reception of the connection OK command as the received ACK signal and the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal), The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of winning balls in the winning ball request signal, and transmits the winning ball number command as the set winning ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Upon receiving the winning ball number command as the winning ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 pays out the number of winning balls specified by the winning ball number command. When the power is cut off during the payout of the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command, the power supply to the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, so that the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped and the game is stopped. Suspend media removal. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Here, the clerk of the game arcade turns on the power switch 21TM055 after opening the gaming machine frame 3 to turn on the power. At this time, as described above, in order to shift to the setting change mode (and further to initialize the pachinko gaming machine 1), when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on, and The clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is also set to the ON state. To shift to the setting confirmation mode, when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off.

  After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a power-on process. In this example, the control is switched to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state when the power is turned on.

  In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is started, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3, When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

  Thereafter, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the payout motor 21TM289 in a stopped state. As a result, after the power is turned on, the period in which the CPU 103 is executing the predetermined process as the process at the time of power-on (the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the serial communication circuit setting process shown in FIG. 23A (step S21TM1480) During the period until the step ()) is executed, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, so that the state in which the payout of the game medium is interrupted is maintained even when the data of the number of unpaid is not cleared. Will be.

  After that, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, and the processes after step S21TM3710 shown in FIG. 23-2 are executed. When the RAM clear processing is executed, it is notified that the RAM clear has been executed. In this example, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at the time of turning on the power, a RAM clear signal is transmitted to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is erased (cleared).

  Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 23A, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 23-1, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes When possible, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the unpaid number data becomes zero. I do. Here, when the connection confirmation signal is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a. It is assumed that the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to perform a payout operation on condition that the payout operation is not performed.

  As described above, after the power is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 becomes capable of detecting the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300. During the period in which the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected, whether the game machine is controlled to the setting change mode or not is controlled by the setting confirmation mode. No payout of game media is executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, By not driving the payout motor 21TM289, the award ball processing is not executed. Thus, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven during the period in which the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

  Here, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the store clerk of the game hall usually confirms that the RAM clear has been executed, and then executes the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. Is closed, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a may be open even during the period when the connection confirmation signal is ON (step S21TM1480 and thereafter). In such a case, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped based on the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. State.

  When the store clerk of the game arcade closes both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the connection confirmation signal (processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode). Is completed), and based on the fact that neither the gaming machine frame 3 nor the glass door frame 3a has been opened by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven. Let it.

  In this example, when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not operated when the power is turned on), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is used. The microcomputer 21TM370 does not clear the unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 (because there are remaining game media to be paid out). The payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout is performed one by one until the unpaid number data becomes zero. Carry out the work. As a result, the game medium that has been interrupted due to the occurrence of the power interruption, the subsequent control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Is completed. As described above, when the power supply is interrupted during the execution of the prize ball payout and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, the data of the unpaid number is not cleared at the time of the subsequent power restoration, and On the condition that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed, the interrupted payout of the game medium is resumed and the award ball is paid out. Can be completed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 23-12, when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on). Since the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 clears the data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 (the remaining game media to be paid out are stored). Therefore, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven and the payout operation is not performed.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 23-7 (1), the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052 is input to both the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Therefore, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has not yet been formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. The data of the unpaid number stored in the paid-out number storage buffer is initialized. As described above, when the clear switch 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on, the data of the number of unpaid items is initialized. Of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the prize ball processing executed in the previous step (i.e., the number of payouts designated by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 14), No payout is made for the number of payouts.

  As described above, when the payout is interrupted due to the power interruption during the execution of the prize ball processing, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stores the unpaid number stored in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. The unpaid number data is stored in the buffer. Here, by operating the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the data of the unpaid number is cleared, so that the suspended payout is forcibly terminated (stopped) without being restarted. That is, when the power is restored, the payout for the number of unpaid items is not executed during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled and after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

(Modified example regarding prize ball processing (transition to setting change mode) when power interruption occurs)
Next, regarding the processing in the case where the payout is interrupted due to the power cutoff during the execution of the prize ball payout and the control is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored, FIGS. This will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. In this example, as shown in FIG. 23-8 (1), the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 is initialized by operating the clear switch 21TM052 when the power is turned on, and the clear switch 21TM052a is turned on when the power is turned on. By operation, the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is initialized. In the example shown in FIGS. 23-13, when the power supply is interrupted during the payout of the game medium, the payout being executed is stopped, and when the power supply is restored to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, After the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends without dispensing, the dispensing is resumed based on the fact that the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 of the dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370 has not been executed.

  23-13, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Is received as the connection OK command. When receiving the connection OK command as the received ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 again transmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal after a lapse of 1 s (1 second) from the reception. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-described connection confirmation communication processing as long as the connection state is normal.

  If there is a winning when the connection confirmation communication process is not being executed (between the reception of the connection OK command as the received ACK signal and the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal), The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of winning balls in the winning ball request signal, and transmits the winning ball number command as the set winning ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Upon receiving the winning ball number command as the winning ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 pays out the number of winning balls specified by the winning ball number command. When the power is cut off during the payout of the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command, the power supply to the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, so that the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped and the game is stopped. Suspend media removal. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Here, the clerk of the game arcade turns on the power switch 21TM055 after opening the gaming machine frame 3 to turn on the power. At this time, as described above, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on to shift to the setting change mode (and to initialize the game control microcomputer 100). The clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is also set to the ON state. To shift to the setting confirmation mode, when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is turned off.

  After that, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a power-on process. In this example, the control is switched to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state when the power is turned on.

  In the payout control board 21TM037, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is started, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3, When the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected, it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state.

  Thereafter, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the payout motor 21TM289 in a stopped state. As a result, after the power is turned on, the period in which the CPU 103 is executing the predetermined process as the process at the time of power-on (the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the serial communication circuit setting process shown in FIG. 23A (step S21TM1480) During the period until the step ()) is executed, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, so that the state in which the payout of the game medium is interrupted is maintained even when the data of the number of unpaid is not cleared. Will be.

  After that, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, and the processes after step S21TM3710 shown in FIG. 23-2 are executed. When the RAM clear processing is executed in the game control microcomputer 100, it is notified that the RAM clear has been executed. Further, in this example, when the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the payout control board 21TM037 is operated at the time of turning on the power, a RAM clear signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 is erased (cleared).

  Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 23A, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. When the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 23-1, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes When possible, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the contents of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout operation is performed one by one until the unpaid number data becomes zero. I do. Here, when the connection confirmation signal is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not detect the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and also detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a. It is assumed that the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to perform a payout operation on condition that the payout operation is not performed.

  As described above, after the power is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 becomes capable of detecting the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300. During the period in which the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected, whether the game machine is controlled to the setting change mode or not is controlled by the setting confirmation mode. No payout of game media is executed. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is turned on, if the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, By not driving the payout motor 21TM289, the award ball processing is not executed. Thus, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven during the period in which the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state.

  Here, when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed, the store clerk of the game hall usually confirms that the RAM clear has been executed, and then sets the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a. Is closed, even if the connection confirmation signal after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed is in the ON state (step S21TM1480 and thereafter), the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is not closed. It may be open. In such a case, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected even during the period in which the connection confirmation signal after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends is in the ON state. , The driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped.

  When the store clerk of the game arcade closes both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the connection confirmation signal and opens the game machine frame and door frame. The driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is started based on the fact that neither the gaming machine frame 3 nor the glass door frame 3a has been opened by the sensor 21TM300.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 23-8 (2), when the RAM clear for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is not executed (when the clear switch 21TM052a is not operated when the power is turned on) ) Indicates that the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed (when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at power-on). However, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 clears the unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. Therefore, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven based on the content of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM 21TM302 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and The payout operation is performed one by one until the data becomes 0. As a result, the game medium that has been interrupted due to the occurrence of the power interruption, the subsequent control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Is completed. As described above, when the power supply is interrupted during the execution of the prize ball payout and the payout of the game medium is interrupted, the data of the unpaid number is not cleared at the time of the subsequent power restoration, and On the condition that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed, the interrupted payout of the game medium is resumed and the award ball is paid out. Can be completed.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clearing for the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is executed (when the clear switch 21TM052a is operated when the power is turned on), the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stores the backup data in the RAM 21TM302. Since the data of the unpaid number stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the area is cleared (there is no remaining game medium to be paid out), the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven, and the payout is performed. No action is taken.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 23-8 (1), the RAM clear signal output from the clear switch 21TM052 is input to the game control microcomputer 100, but is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Not done. Therefore, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 corresponding to the main board 11 is operated, even if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed, the payout is performed. If the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the control board 21TM037 is not operated, the unpaid number data stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302 in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Not initialized. Thus, regardless of whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated when the power is turned on (whether or not the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) for the game control microcomputer 100 is executed) Regardless of this, if the clear switch 21TM052a is not operated, the data of the number of unpaid items is not initialized, and is executed before the power is cut off (before being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode upon power restoration). Of the predetermined number of game media to be paid out in the prize ball processing (i.e., the number of payouts designated by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 14), the number of unpaid out payouts that have not been paid out , Payout will be executed.

  As described above, when the payout is interrupted due to the power interruption during the execution of the prize ball processing, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stores the unpaid number stored in the backup area in the RAM 21TM302. The unpaid number data is stored in the buffer. Here, even if the clear switch 21TM052 corresponding to the main board 11 is operated when the power is turned on, if the clear switch 21TM052a corresponding to the payout control board 21TM037 is not operated, the unpaid number data is maintained without being cleared. Therefore, the interrupted payout is resumed, and the payout of the unpaid number of game media is completed. In other words, after the power is restored, after a period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the payout of the unpaid number is executed.

  In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is provided on the payout control board 21TM037 (the open state detection signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370). The game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 is not limited to such an embodiment, and may be provided on the main board 11 (an open state detection signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100). In the case of such a configuration, the game control microcomputer 100 determines that the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). Therefore, even if a prize is detected, the prize ball number command is not transmitted. As a result, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289 based on the reception of the winning ball number command being stopped, so that the payout of the prize balls is not executed.

(Output period of security signal and setting change corresponding signal)
As described above, in the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 22-39 (1), a security signal can be output from the tenth terminal. As described above, the security signal can notify the outside of the possibility that the initialization process (RAM clear), the detection of an illegal act, the detection of a game stop target error, and the like have been performed. In addition, the security signal is output from the time when the processing relating to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started to the time when the processing relating to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and the normal game processing is performed (for example, FIG. 23A and FIG. In the period from Step S21TM3510 to Step S21TM3060 or Step S21TM3070, which is shown in 23-2 (until NO is determined and the normal game process is executed), the state is turned on.

  In the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 22-39 (1), a setting change corresponding signal can be output from the seventh terminal. The setting change corresponding signal is a signal from the start of the processing relating to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode to the end of the processing relating to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and the transition to the normal game processing (for example, FIG. 23-1 and FIG. In the period from Step S21TM3510 to Step S21TM3060 or Step S21TM3070, which is shown as 23-2 (until NO is determined and the normal game process is executed), the ON state is set. With this setting change corresponding signal, it is possible to notify the outside that the process related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has been executed (the process related to the change or confirmation of the set value has been executed). Further, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends (when the process shifts to the normal game process), the setting change corresponding signal output from the seventh terminal is temporarily turned off. Since the number of pulse-like setting change correspondence signals corresponding to the current setting value stored in the setting value storage area is output, the setting value can be notified to the outside.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 23-14 (1), when the power is turned on, and the mode is changed to the setting change mode involving clearing the RAM (for example, step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 shown in FIG. 23-1), A setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal, and at the same time, a security signal is output from the tenth terminal. Then, based on the execution of the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150), the security signal is kept ON for 30 seconds even after the setting change mode ends and the normal game process is started. Also, with the end of the setting change mode (accurately, at a timing of 50 ms after the setting change mode ends and the normal game process is performed), the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off. Based on the fact that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is 2, two pulses are output as a special mode setting change corresponding signal.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 23-14 (2), when the power is turned on, the RAM is cleared (for example, step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150 shown in FIG. 23-1), but the mode is not shifted to the setting change mode. In this case, the security signal is in the ON state for 30 seconds after the power is turned on (when the RAM is cleared), but the setting change corresponding signal is not in the ON state.

  As described above, the security signal is also in the ON state while being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, even when the external device does not assume the input of the setting change corresponding signal and is configured not to execute the processing based on the input of the setting change corresponding signal, at least the external device is configured to perform the processing based on the input of the security signal. Thus, it is possible to recognize that control may be performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  As shown in FIGS. 23-15 (3) and (4), the setting change corresponding signal is turned on when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends. (Accurately, at the timing when 50 ms elapses after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and the process proceeds to the normal game process), the state is turned off. The security signal is also turned on when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started, but when the RAM is cleared (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) as shown in FIG. 23-15 (3). In this case, the OFF state is not set immediately after the setting change mode ends, and the ON state is continued for 30 seconds after the setting change mode ends. On the other hand, if the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is not executed as shown in FIG. 23-15 (4), the setting confirmation mode ends (exactly, the setting confirmation mode ends). (At the timing when 50 ms elapses after shifting to the normal game process).

  23-15 (3) and (4), the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off with the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (exactly, the setting change is performed). After the mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, the game is turned off at the timing when 50 ms elapses after shifting to the normal game processing), and thereafter (for example, after an elapse of 50 ms or more), the set value stored in the RAM 102 is stored. Based on the fact that the setting value stored in the area is 2, two pulses are output as a setting change corresponding signal in a special mode. This makes it possible to easily specify the set value of each gaming machine in an external device such as a hall computer.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 23-14 (2), when the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) is executed and the mode is not shifted to the setting change mode, the security signal is output when the power is turned on (RAM It is ON for 30 seconds from the time of clear execution).

  Therefore, on the external device side to which the security signal is input, if the input period of the security signal is about 30 seconds, the RAM is cleared (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150), but the mode does not shift to the setting change mode. It is possible to recognize that there is a possibility. On the other hand, if the input period of the security signal exceeds 30 seconds, there is a possibility that the mode has shifted to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (in particular, it is highly likely that the mode has shifted to the setting change mode with RAM clear). If the security signal input period has not reached 30 seconds, the mode may have shifted to the setting confirmation mode without executing the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150). That is, it is possible to recognize that there is a possibility that only the confirmation has been performed without being in a state where the setting value can be changed.

  That is, if the input period of the security signal is about 30 seconds, the fact that the RAM may have been cleared (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) but may not have shifted to the setting change mode may indicate that the hall computer or the like has not performed. If the security device is recognizable and the input period of the security signal is less than 30 seconds, the mode may have shifted to the setting confirmation mode without executing the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150). If the management device can recognize that the setting value may have been changed without being able to change the set value, and the input period of the security signal exceeds 30 seconds, , It may have shifted to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (Especially, it is likely that the transition to the setting change mode with RAM clear) and is recognizable in the management device. As described above, it is possible to distinguish what control the gaming machine has executed on the outside based on the output period of the security signal of the gaming machine.

  Therefore, even if the external device is configured not to assume the input of the setting change corresponding signal and not to execute the processing based on the input of the setting change corresponding signal, at least the external device is configured to perform the processing based on the input of the security signal. Thus, the possibility that the RAM clear (Step S21TM3050 or Step S21TM3150) has been executed and the possibility that the setting has been changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be distinguished and recognized.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode, since the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on, the RAM is always cleared (step S21TM3050). Or, step S21TM3150). As a result, the output period of the security signal is approximately +30 seconds during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled. On the other hand, when the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF when the power is turned on, and the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM3570). RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150) has not been executed. As a result, the output period of the security signal is a period controlled in the setting confirmation mode (more precisely, a period controlled in the setting confirmation mode + about 50 ms).

  As described above, since the output period of the security signal is different between the case where the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode and the case where the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, each of the gaming machines can change the setting on the external device side. It is possible to distinguish and specify whether the mode is controlled to the mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the setting change corresponding signal is turned on when the setting change mode or the setting check mode is started, and when the setting change mode or the setting check mode is ended (exactly, the setting change mode). Or, it becomes OFF state (at the timing when 50 ms has elapsed since the setting check mode ended and the normal game process was started). Therefore, on the external device side, the control period to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be specified by the input period of the setting change corresponding signal. When the input period of the security signal is longer than the input period of the setting change corresponding signal by about 30 seconds, it is recognized that the setting change mode has been controlled and that the RAM has been cleared accordingly. It is possible, and when the input period of the setting change corresponding signal and the input period of the security signal are the same period, it is possible to recognize that the setting is controlled to the setting confirmation mode without RAM clear.

  As described above, when the security signal and the setting change correspondence signal are output from different output terminals, the external device to which these signals are input causes a predetermined event (RAM clear in this example) in the gaming machine. Has occurred, and that the gaming machine has been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Then, it is possible to clearly specify the control period for the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and it is possible to specify which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode is controlled based on the input period of the security signal.

  Next, based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state when the power is turned on, the setting is confirmed without the RAM clear (step S21TM3050 or step S21TM3150). When the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in less than 50 ms after the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode (for example, after the setting change flag is set in step S21TM3510), the setting confirmation mode ends. Then, it is assumed that the process has shifted to the normal game process.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 23-15 (5), a setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal starting from the timing when the setting confirmation mode is started, and at the same time, a security signal is output from the tenth terminal. Is output. Even if less than 50 ms has elapsed since the setting confirmation mode was started, and the setting confirmation mode was terminated (the lock switch 21TM051 was turned off) and the process shifted to the normal game processing, at least a period of 50 ms or more The setting change correspondence signal and the security signal are continuously output. That is, once the setting change correspondence signal and the security signal are turned ON, the ON state is maintained for at least 50 ms.

  Assuming that the period during which the setting change correspondence signal and the security signal are in the ON state is shorter than a predetermined period (50 ms in this example), the pachinko gaming machine 1 sets the setting change mode or the setting confirmation on the external device side such as a hall computer. It becomes difficult to recognize the transition to the mode. As in the present embodiment, the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal are turned on for at least a predetermined period (50 ms in this example) regardless of the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. On the external device side, each pachinko gaming machine 1 can recognize that it has shifted to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  In addition, regarding the setting change corresponding signal, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, the setting change corresponding signal is output in a special mode having a pulse width of 100 ms, so that each pachinko machine on the external device side such as a hall computer. The set value of the gaming machine 1 can be specified and managed. If the time period during which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled is less than 50 ms, the setting change corresponding signal is turned on and then switched to the off state within less than 50 ms. When the number of pulses having a width of 100 ms corresponding to the set value stored in the storage area is output, the period in which the external device is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (less than 50 ms) Cannot be recognized, and by recognizing only the setting change corresponding signal of the special mode (pulse width is 100 ms) output thereafter, the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is erroneously set. May be recognized. As in the present embodiment, the external device side is set by turning on the setting change corresponding signal for at least a predetermined period (50 ms in this example) regardless of the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Thus, the set value of each pachinko gaming machine 1 can be accurately specified.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko gaming machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 10 ... General winning opening 11 ... Main board 12 ... Effect control board 13 ... Voice control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Ordinary symbol display 21 ... Gate switch 22A, 22B ... Starting port Switch 23: Count switch 30: Hitting operation handle 31A: Stick controller 31B: Push button 32: Movable body 100: Game control microcomputers 101, 121: ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... random number circuits 105, 125 ... I / O
120… effect control CPU
123 ... display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs a game and includes display means capable of displaying an effect display related to the game,
Detecting means for detecting an action of the player;
Valid display means for displaying on the display means a valid display indicating that the detection of the operation by the detection means is valid,
Difficult-to-visual effect means for performing a difficult-to-visual effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the effect display including the effective display displayed by the effective display means,
In a state where the first valid display is displayed as the valid display, when an operation is detected by the detection unit, a first production unit capable of performing a first production displaying a first production display,
When an operation is detected by the detection unit in a state where a second validity display indicating that an operation of selecting one option from a plurality of options is valid is displayed as the validity display, the operation is detected. A second production means capable of performing a second production displaying a second production display capable of specifying the result of the selection in accordance with
With
The first visual indication is displayed on the difficult-to-visual effect means, and when the first effect is performed by the first effect means, it is possible to perform a hard-to-visual effect, and the second effective display is displayed In the case where the second effect is performed by the second effect means, an effect that is difficult to view is not performed,
further,
Suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect indicating that it is controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player;
Title notification means capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggested effect,
A gaming machine, wherein the title notifying means is capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect.